AN INTRODUCTION TO

THE ARAMAIC OF TARGUM ONQELOS

by

Thomas O. Lambdin

and

John Huehnergard

© 2020 Thomas O. Lambdin and John Huehnergard

 corrected PDF, August 2021

with thanks to Ben Frostad and Noam Mizrahi

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preface and Acknowledgments ......................................................................................... vii

Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... viii
Aramaic .............................................................................................................................. ix
Targums ............................................................................................................................. xi
Resources ......................................................................................................................... xiii
Orthography and Phonology ..............................................................................................xv
Bibliography .................................................................................................................... xxi

Lessons

1.1 Noun Gender ............................................................................................................1

1.2 Noun Definition .......................................................................................................1
1.3 The Perfect of the G Verb (third person) .................................................................1
1.4 The Prepositions l] lǝ- and ˜mi min .............................................................................2
2.1 The G Perfect: Full Inflection ..................................................................................5
2.2 The Direct Object Marker ty: yāt ..............................................................................5
3.1 ty: yāt with Pronominal Suffixes ...............................................................................7
3.2 The Conjunction w} wǝ-: Combinatory Rules ............................................................7
4.1 Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes....................................................................9
4.2 The Prepositions b] bǝ-, l] lǝ-, and k] kǝ-: Combinatory Rules ..................................9
4.3 Relative Clauses .....................................................................................................10
5.1 G Perfects in e and o ..............................................................................................12
6.1 The Singular Noun with Pronominal Suffixes .......................................................14
7.1 The Demonstrative Pronouns .................................................................................16
7.2 rt'b; bātar and Other Prepositions with (Plural) Pronominal Suffixes ...................16
8.1 Noun Plurals...........................................................................................................19
8.2 Plural Nouns with Pronominal Suffixes ................................................................20
8.3 The Plurals of the Demonstratives .........................................................................20
9.1 The Genitive (Construct) Chain .............................................................................22
9.2 Expression of the Genitive with d] dǝ- ....................................................................22
9.3 The Form of the Construct Singular ......................................................................23
9.4 Anticipatory Genitive Construction .......................................................................24
10.1 The G Perfect: Roots III–Weak .............................................................................26
10.2 Sentences with Adverbial Predicate.......................................................................26
11.1 The G Perfect: Hollow and Geminate Roots .........................................................29
11.2 Stative Hollow Roots .............................................................................................29
iv CONTENTS

11.3 Temporal Clauses with hw:hw" wa-hwāh ....................................................................29

12.1 The Infinitive of G Verbs .......................................................................................32
12.2 Suffixes on the Infinitive .......................................................................................33
12.3 Uses of the Infinitive..............................................................................................33
13.1 D (Pael) Verbs: the Perfect ....................................................................................36
13.2 D Verbs: the Infinitive ...........................................................................................37
13.3 The Meaning of D Verbs .......................................................................................37
14.1 C (Aphel) Verbs: the Perfect..................................................................................39
14.2 C Verbs: the Infinitive ...........................................................................................39
14.3 The Interrogative h] hǝ- ...........................................................................................40
14.4 The Inflection of ba' ʔab and ja' ʔaḥ .......................................................................40
15.1 C Verbs: the Perfect (continued)............................................................................43
16.1 The Absolute State of the Noun .............................................................................46
16.2 The Cardinal Numbers ...........................................................................................47
17.1 Adjectives ..............................................................................................................49
17.2 The Existential Particles tyai ʔit and tyle let ............................................................49
18.1 G Verbs: the Active Participle ...............................................................................52
18.2 The Independent Personal Pronouns ......................................................................53
18.3 The ‘Tens’ and Higher Numbers ...........................................................................54
18.4 Gentilics and Other Adjectives in yÎ;/yÎ' -ay/-āy; Plurals in yÎE -e ..............................54
19.1 G Verbs: Imperfect and Imperative (Sound Roots; Roots II–Guttural and
and III–Guttural; Roots I–ʕ) .......................................................................57
19.2 Uses of the Imperfect .............................................................................................58
20.1 G Verbs: Imperfect and Imperative (Roots I–ʔ; Roots I–n; Roots I–y) .................60
21.1 G Verbs: Imperfect and Imperative (Roots III–Weak; Hollow Roots;
Geminate Roots) ........................................................................................62
22.1 G Verbs: the Passive Participle ..............................................................................64
22.2 D Verbs: Imperfect, Imperative, Participles ..........................................................64
22.3 C Verbs: Imperfect, Imperative, Participles ..........................................................65
23.1 The -t- Verbs: Gt, Dt, Ct ........................................................................................67
23.2 The Adjective ˜r;jwau ʔuḥrān (other) ........................................................................68
23.3 The Ordinal Numbers ............................................................................................68
24.1 The Verb with Object Suffixes ..............................................................................70
24.2 Anticipatory Object Construction ..........................................................................72
Paradigms
A. Nouns and Adjectives
A.1 Nouns and Adjectives with Unchanging Base .................................................75
A.2 Feminine Nouns Ending in -vCtā ....................................................................75
A.3. Nouns in -itā and -utā ......................................................................................75
 CONTENTS v

A.4 Adjectives and Nouns Final -y, -w ...................................................................76

B. Verbs
B.1 Sound Verbs .....................................................................................................77
B.2 Verbs I–ʔ ..........................................................................................................78
B.3 Verbs I–n..........................................................................................................78
B.4 Verbs I–y ..........................................................................................................79
B.5 Hollow Verbs ...................................................................................................79
B.6 Verbs III–Weak ................................................................................................80
B.7 Geminate Verbs ...............................................................................................81
Appendix Targum Onqelos to Genesis 12–16 ..................................................................83
Notes ................................................................................................................88
Glossary Aramaic–English..............................................................................................95
English–Aramaic............................................................................................104
Key to the Exercises.........................................................................................................117
 PREFACE AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This textbook was created some fifty years ago by Thomas O. Lambdin for his biennial
one-semester course on Targumic Aramaic at Harvard University. The version in use
when I took the course in 1975 was an outline of nineteen lessons in forty pages, plus
four pages of notes on Targum Onqelos to Genesis 12–16 (on which the lesson
vocabularies were based). Lambdin very kindly allowed me to continue using the outline
when I succeeded him at Harvard in 1983. Over the years I expanded the outline to
twenty-two lessons, rewrote a few exercises and added a few more, included an introduc-
tory description of the orthography and phonology, and appended a glossary of the words
given in the lesson vocabularies. I also converted the pointing from Tiberian, which
Lambdin had used, to supralinear Babylonian. Lambdin never intended the outline for
publication, but various colleagues and students who used it at other universities, or in
individual study, encouraged its wider distribution. I would regularly ask Lambdin about
publishing the outline, and he would regularly demur. But during a phone conversation
on his 91st birthday, in 2018, when I asked once again, he surprised me by relenting.
The present version of the textbook includes two more lessons, bringing the total
to twenty-four; new sections in several of the lessons; paradigms of nouns, adjectives,
and verbs; short introductions to the Aramaic language and to the targums; a brief section
on resources; a select bibliography; and a key to the exercises. Nevertheless it is still an
extremely terse presentation of the grammar of Targum Onqelos, introducing only the
bare essentials so that students can quickly begin to read Onqelos (and Targum Jonathan)
on their own. The brevity is mitigated to some extent by the fact that students will
normally already be familiar with Biblical Hebrew, with which the Aramaic of the
targums naturally shares many features.
The use of transliteration—a hallmark of all of Lambdin’s marvelous textbooks—
is prominent throughout this textbook as well, but another feature of the present version
is a much more thorough presentation of the Aramaic in script than in earlier versions.
This version of the textbook also incorporates a good number of corrections and
suggestions for improvement that have been offered by colleagues and students over the
course of three decades and more, and it remains to thank those kind individuals here:
Elitzur Bar-Asher Siegal, Bronson Brown-de Vost, Amos Dodi, Jim Eisenbraun, Allan C.
Emery, Agustinus Gianto, Jo Ann Hackett, Benjamin Kantor, Renaud Kuty, Matthew
Morgenstern, Gonzalo Rubio, and the late Michael Patrick O’Connor. Special
acknowledgment is due to Cynthia Miller-Naudé, Na‘ama Pat-El, Aaron Rubin, and Avi
Winitzer and his student Josephine Dru, all of whom sent several detailed lists of sugges-
tions and corrections. The greatest thanks, of course, is owed to Professor Lambdin, il
miglior fabbro.
John Huehnergard
Austin, Texas
April 2020
 ABBREVIATIONS

abs. absolute form of a noun or adjective

adj. adjective
adv. adverb
c common gender
C causative verb stem (aphel)
C consonant; C1, C2, C3 denote the consonantal radicals of a root
cstr. construct form of a noun or adjective
Ct causative verb stem with prefixed t (ittaphal)
D verb stem with doubled middle radical (pael)
Dt verb stem with doubled middle radical and prefixed t (ithpaal)
emph. emphatic form of a noun or adjective
f(.), fem. feminine
G basic stem of the verb (peal)
Gem. geminate root
Gt basic verb stem with prefixed t (ithpeel)
Gutt. guttural consonant
imp(er)f. imperfect
impv. imperative
infin. infinitive
IPA International Phonetic Alphabet
m(.), masc. masculine
obj. object
p, pl. plural
perf. perfect
prep. preposition
ptcpl. participle
s, sg., sing. singular
subj. subject
suff. suffix
v (unspecified) vowel
1, 2, 3 first, second, third person (of the verb)
 ARAMAIC

Aramaic is a member of the Semitic language family, which also includes Akkadian, the
cuneiform language of ancient Assyria and Babylonia; classical Ethiopic (Gəʕəz) and
modern Ethiopian languages such as Amharic; modern South Arabian languages such as
Mehri; Ancient South Arabian languages such as Sabaic; and Arabic. But the languages
most closely related to Aramaic are the other members of a branch of the family that is
usually called Northwest Semitic, namely, Ugaritic (the language of the ancient city of
Ugarit, modern Ras Shamra) and especially the Canaanite languages, which are most
prominently represented by Hebrew and Phoenician. Aramaic and Canaanite comprise a
sub-branch within Northwest Semitic; that is, they share a most-recent common ancestor
(Pat-El and Wilson-Wright 2018; see also Huehnergard 1995 and Loesov 2012).
Aramaic has one of the longest-attested histories of any language. It is first known
from inscriptions dated to the 9th century BCE, and forms of Aramaic are still spoken
today. Languages undergo changes over time, and over nearly three millennia Aramaic
has naturally changed and ramified profoundly. It is thus customary to talk about
Aramaic in terms of chronological and geographical varieties. These can be categorized
in several ways; the dialect classification in the following overview is that of Fitzmyer
(1979). Surveys of the history of pre-modern Aramaic are Kutscher (1970); Greenfield
(1978); Beyer (1986); Kaufman (1997); Greenspahn (2002); Creason (2004); Ferrer
(2004); Millard, Khan, and Coghill in Postgate (2007); and Gzella (2014, 2015).
The earliest inscriptions, to the 6th century BCE, are referred to as Old Aramaic.
These are attested over much of the Fertile Crescent, from Syria to Iraq, and already
exhibit a certain amount of linguistic variation. Old Aramaic texts are collected in Donner
and Röllig (2002); Hug (1993); Gibson (1975); the grammar is described in Degen
(1969).
In the 6th century, because of its widespread use, Aramaic became one of the
official languages of the Persian (Achaemenid) Empire; the many documents are referred
to as either Official Aramaic or Imperial Aramaic. (A majority of these have been found
in Egypt, and are also called Egyptian Aramaic.) As an official language and a lingua
franca, the grammar of these is quite uniform. Many of the texts are presented in Porten
and Yardeni (1986–99); detailed grammars are Muraoka and Porten (2003) and Folmer
(1995); an introductory textbook is Muraoka (2012). Official Aramaic includes the
Biblical Aramaic of the book of Ezra, the grammar of which is covered in a number of
works, such as Rosenthal (2006), Greenspahn (2003), and Bauer and Leander (1927).
Following the end of the Persian Empire in the late 4th century BCE, Aramaic
becomes more diverse. The period up through the 2nd century CE is called Middle
Aramaic, which includes a wide variety of texts from across much of the Near East.
Inscriptions from Syria and Iraq include Old Syriac, Palmyrene, and Hatran. A number of
texts in a descendant of Official Aramaic are collectively referred to as Standard Literary
Aramaic (Greenfield 1974); these include the biblical book of Daniel, the Dead Sea
x ARAMAIC

Scrolls from Qumran (treated in Muraoka 2011 and Beyer 1984–2004) and related texts,
and—of particular note here—the early targums such as Onqelos and Jonathan (for
references, see below, “Targums” and “Resources”).
Late Aramaic, from the 2nd to the 14th century CE, is still more diverse, and its
varieties are generally divided by scholars into a western and an eastern branch. The
western dialects are Jewish Galilean Aramaic (especially in the Jerusalem Talmud;
Fassberg 1990; Golomb 1985; Kutscher 1976; Levias 1930; Sokoloff 2011a), Samaritan
Aramaic (Tal 2011, 2013; Stadel 2019), and Christian Palestinian Aramaic (Müller-
Kessler 1991; Morgenstern 2011b). The eastern dialects are Jewish Babylonian Aramaic
(especially in the Babylonian Talmud; Bar-Asher Siegal 2016; Morgenstern 2011a;
Sokoloff 2011b; Morag 1988), Syriac (Nöldeke 1904; Healey 2011; Pat-El 2019), and
Mandaic (Macuch 1965; Burtea 2011; Häberl 2019).
As noted above, Aramaic continues to be spoken today, in a few pockets in the
Middle East and in a widespread diaspora. There are four dialect groups of Neo-Aramaic:
Western, in a few villages near Damascus; Central, in a few villages in Turkey;
Northeastern, in several parts of Iraq and Kurdistan; and Mandaic, mostly in Iran.
 TARGUMS

The Aramaic word µwgUrt' targum means ‘translation’. As noted above, Aramaic in the
second half of the first millennium BCE became a lingua franca across much of the Near
East. As the use of Aramaic increased in Palestine, at the expense of Hebrew, more and
more Jews became unfamiliar with the language of the Bible, creating the need to
translate the text of weekly readings. The translations were presumably oral at first, but
eventually there were certain guidelines, for example, that the Torah was to be translated
one verse at a time.
There are targums to every biblical book except Ezra–Nehemia and Daniel. Most
of these probably originated in Palestine. Several strains of targums exist, in complex
interrelationships with each other.
Targum Onqelos, the grammar of which is described in the present textbook, is a
targum of the Torah, which became an official targum of the Babylonian Jewish
communities; the Babylonian Talmud (BT), refers to it as ‘our targum’ (˜lyd µwgrt; BT
Qiddušin 49a), and quotes Onqelos as an authoritative source. The origin and
development of Onqelos are obscure, and much debated by scholars, but there is a
consensus that it originated in Palestine (perhaps as early as the late first century CE), and
was later redacted and edited in Babylonia (perhaps by about 250 CE). The name
“Onqelos” is based on BT Megilla 3a, which refers to ‘Onqelos the proselyte’ (rgh
swlqnwa) as the translator of the Torah; this is probably a misunderstanding, since the
Jerusalem Talmud (Megilla 71c) mentions ‘Aquilas the proselyte’ as translator, but with
reference to a translation into Greek rather than Aramaic. The Onqelos textual tradition is
quite stable, manuscripts for the most part exhibiting only minor variations; it even has its
own masorah (Klein 2000). Onqelos is generally quite literal in translating the Hebrew
text, frequently offering a rigorous word-for-word rendering. It is, however, also
interpretive, generally agreeing in legal matters with the Mishna as understood in the
Babylonian schools. Further, it not infrequently does diverge from the Hebrew. For
example, it avoids phrasing that anthropomorphizes the deity; compare the Masoretic
Text of Gen. 26:3 with the rendering of Onqelos:
MT ÚM][i hy<h]a,w“ taZoh' ≈r<a;B; rWG gûr bā-ʔā́ reṣ hazzōʔt wǝ-ʔehye ʕimmǝkā ‘Sojourn in this
land, and I will be with you’;
TO ˚d;[]s'b] yrim]yme yheywI ad;h; a[;ra'b] rwdu dur bǝ-ʔarʕā hādā w-ihe memǝri bǝ-saʕǝdāk
‘Sojourn in this land, and my word will be in your aid’.
At some point in its history in Babylonia, probably by 500 CE, the text of Onqelos
was supplied with a system of supralinear vowel signs. The standard critical edition of
Onqelos, published by Alexander Sperber as volume 1 of his The Bible in Aramaic
(Sperber 1959–73), presents the text with this Babylonian vowel system, and so it is also
the system in which the grammar is presented in this textbook.
The dialect of the Aramaic of Targum Onqelos has been the subject of much
xii TARGUMS

scholarly debate. It is a form of Standard Literary Aramaic, but it also exhibits features of
both western and eastern Late Aramaic; an eastern feature is the non-determinative nature
of the article aÎ; -ā on singular nouns, but more diagnostic features are western. The
curious mixture of dialect features undoubtedly reflects the complex compositional and
redactional history of the text.
Very closely related to Targum Onqelos, in both grammar and translation
technique, is Targum Jonathan to the Prophets, and it too is considered authoritative in
BT. (The same passage in BT Megilla 3a that identifies Onqelos as the translator of the
Torah identifies a certain Jonathan ben Uzziel as the translator of the Prophets.) In
Sperber’s The Bible in Aramaic (see above), volume 2 contains the Former Prophets and
volume 3 the Latter Prophets according to Targum Jonathan. In Jonathan, the Former
Prophets are generally translated quite strictly, as in Onqelos, while the Latter Prophets
are often rendered more periphrastically. The great similarity of the grammar of Jonathan
to that of Onqelos means that the present outline may also serve as an introduction to the
former as well.
There are other targums besides Onqelos and Jonathan. For the Torah there is a
second set of traditions referred to as Palestinian targums. These are considerably more
fluid, their texts never having become completely fixed. A complete manuscript, discov-
ered only in the 1950’s, is Codex Neofiti 1 (also written Neophyti 1; Díez Macho 1968–
78). Another version, called either Targum Pseudo-Jonathan or Targum Yerushalmi I, is
complete except for a few verses. That these targums are not as literal as Onqelos is well
illustrated by the fact that Pseudo-Jonathan is nearly twice as long as the Hebrew text it is
translating. Other Palestinian targums are not complete; Targum Yerushalmi II, in fact, is
also often called the Fragmentary Targum. The language of these targums is Galilean
Jewish Aramaic, a western form of Late Aramaic.
For the Prophets, besides Targum Jonathan, discussed above, a Palestinian targum
(tradition or traditions) has been inferred, but only a few verses are preserved in later
writings.
There are also targums to (most of) the Writings; indeed, for some books there are
two or more quite different targums. These targums are often somewhat, or even very,
periphrastic, sometimes in fact more like midrash, especially for books such as Esther
and Song of Songs. Some no doubt contain material that is old; the Talmud notes that
Rabban Gamliel, 1st century CE, had (and immured) a copy of a targum of Job, and a
targum of Job was found among the scrolls from Qumran.
 RESOURCES

As noted in the preceding section, the standard critical edition of Targum Onqelos is the
first volume of Alexander Sperber’s The Bible in Aramaic (1959). Sperber’s edition has
been criticized for his use of some manuscripts that do not present the most reliable text,
particularly some whose vocalization may reflect a later Tiberian tradition rather than a
genuine early Babylonian one. Since it is nevertheless the standard edition for Onqelos, it
has served as the basis for the outline of the grammar presented in this textbook. (For
other important manuscripts of Onqelos see Díez Macho 1968; Boyarin 1976.)
Sperber’s text of Onqelos is accessible online, albeit with the Babylonian vowels
converted to Tiberian, on the website of the Comprehensive Aramaic Lexicon (CAL),
which is organized and maintained by Professor Stephen A. Kaufman: http://cal.huc.edu/.
With CAL, one can also look up the parsing of any form, consult a dictionary entry,
create a concordance, and survey the large bibliography. As its name implies, CAL
comprises all of (ancient) Aramaic, not only targums. (Earlier concordances of Onqelos
are Brederek 1906 and Kasovsky 1940.)
A recent scholarly monograph covering all aspects of targums is Flesher and
Chilton (2011). Earlier introductions and surveys are Beattie and McNamara (1994); Díez
Macho (1972); Le Déaut (1966). For encyclopedia-length overviews of the targums and
targumic literature, see Alexander (1988, 1992); Ben-Eliyahu et al. (2012, chapter 5);
Grossfeld and Sperling (2006); Kuty (2013).
There is no full reference grammar of the Aramaic of Targum Onqelos. An
important study is the 1981 dissertation of Amos Dodi (in Hebrew), which covers the
phonology and morphology of Onqelos fragments from the Cairo Geniza. Another
comprehensive work covering the phonology and morphology is Dalman (1905), which,
however, does not adequately distinguish the several strains of Jewish Aramaic and
which is naturally out of date in many respects. A monograph in which important features
of the syntax of Targum Jonathan are investigated is Kuty (2010); since the Aramaic of
Jonathan is very similar to that of Onqelos, Kuty’s results can generally be considered
valid for Onqelos as well (as also shown, for example, by Kuty 2009). Other significant
studies of aspects of the grammar of Onqelos (and Jonathan) include the following:
Bombeck (1995a, 1995b); Condrea (2020); Dodi (1983, 1989); Fassberg (1985); Garr
(1991, 2008); Goshen-Gottstein (1978); Gropp (1994); Kaddari (1963a, 1963b); Kuty
(2005, 2007, 2008); Lund (1998); Malone (1972); Muraoka (1983); Pat-El (2012); Tal
(1975).
A reliable glossary specifically devoted to Onqelos is Cook (2008). In addition, as
noted above, one can consult CAL. Earlier dictionaries that include Onqelos in their
coverage are Jastrow (1903) and Dalman (1938).
For the Masorah to Onqelos, see Klein (2000; earlier works are Berliner 1877;
Landauer 1896).
xiv RESOURCES

Knudsen (1981) contains a convenient selection of texts from Onqelos and

Jonathan based on Sperber’s edition, as well as an introduction to targums and a glossary
of the selected texts.
English translations of Onqelos, based on Sperber’s edition, are Aberback &
Grossfeld (1982); Grossfeld (1988a, 1988b, 1988c, 1988d); Drazin (1982, 1984, 1992,
1998).
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY

1. Consonants

Final forms appear in parentheses. On the transliterated letters with underlining, see §6,
below, on Spirantization.
a ʔ f ṭ [ ʕ
b b, b y y (π) p p,p
g g,g (˚) k k,k (≈) x ṣ
d d,d l l q q
h h (µ) m m r r
w w (˜) n n ç š
z z s s t t,t
j ḥ

2. Vowels and Vowel Letters

(a) Vowel Signs
The vocalization system employed in this textbook is the Babylonian, or superlinear,
system, which is generally considered to be older than the Tiberian (sublinear), and to be
the one with which Targum Onqelos was first pointed.
The Babylonian vowel signs (with b b to indicate their placement; their Tiberian cor-
respondences are given in parentheses):
b' ba (B' ba, B, be); over thin letters: g";
b; bā (B; bā [qāmeṣ rāḥāb]); over thin letters: g:;
be be (Be bē);
bi bi (Bi bi/bī);
bo bo (Bo bō; B; bo [qāmeṣ ḥāṭûp]);
bu bu (WB bû; B¨ bu/bū);
b] bǝ (B] bǝ [šǝwā mobile]; B} bă, B‘ bĕ, B’ bŏ).
(In the best manuscripts, Bab. vowels appear slightly to the left above the consonant: go.)
No vowel sign appears when a consonant is not followed by a vowel (vs. šǝwā
quiescens in Tiberian): Tib. jn"d“m' madnaḥ but Bab. jn"dm' ‘east’. Where Tib. has a
compound šǝwā (i.e., with guttural consonants), Bab. normally has a simple šǝwā: Tib.
lk'a} ʔăkal but Bab. lk'a] ʔəkal ‘he ate’; Tib. ah;l;a‘ ʔĕlāhā but Bab. ah;l;a] ʔǝlāhā ‘God’. In
some manuscripts, however, a appears rather than ə after a word-initial guttural, as in lk'a'
ʔakal rather than lk'a] ʔəkal, db'[' ʕabad rather than db'[] ʕəbad ‘he did’.
Since Babylonian pointing does not have a separate vowel corresponding to Tiberian
xvi ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY

seghol (B,), Biblical Hebrew names with seghol appear with a: hç'mo Mošah ‘Moses’ (Tib.
hv,m)o , µk'ç] Šǝkam ‘Shechem’ (Tib. µk,v)] .

(b) Vowel Letters (matres lectionis)

Four of the letters, namely, a, h, w, y, are used in the script (in conjunction with the vowel
signs) to indicate vowels in the middle and at the end of words. When used to indicate
vowels, these letters are not represented in our transliteration (except final h for -ā in
some instances).
Final vowels: These are always indicated by a vowel letter:
Final a (which is uncommon) is written with a: an'b] bǝna ‘build (fs)!’.
Final ā is written with a: ak;lm' malkā ‘king’; an;b] bǝnā ‘he built’. There are four
exceptions to this, in which final ā is written with h:
(i) when the last consonant of a word is a ʔ: ha;r;xmi Miṣrāʔā ‘Egyptian’; ha;n"b] bǝnáʔā
‘they (f) built’;
(ii) in the form hw:h] hǝwāh ‘he was’ (§10.1);
(iii) in Hebrew proper names: hw:j' Ḥawwāh ‘Eve’; hp;lzI Zilpāh ‘Zilpah’;
(iv) in numbers with masc. nouns: hç;mj' ḥamšāh ‘five’ (§16.2).
(In the last three instances, viz., hǝwāh, Hebrew names, and numbers, we will trans-
literate the final h, even though it was not pronounced in such cases. Final h in all other
instances was pronounced: e.g., hk'lm' malkah ‘her king’ [indicated in the Tiberian
vocalization with mappîq: HK'l]m]' .)
Final e and final i are written with y: yaer;xmi Miṣrāʔe ‘Egyptians’; ynebyi yibne ‘he will
build’; ydib[' ʕabdi ‘my servant’; ytiç] šǝti ‘he drank’.
Final o and final u are written with w: wlox] ṣǝlo ‘prayer’; wnob] bǝno ‘they (m) built’; wsuk]
kǝsu ‘garment’; wbut'k] kǝtábu ‘they (m) wrote’.
ǝ does not occur at word end.
Medial vowels (vowels within a word): Only e, i, o, u are ever indicated by a vowel letter,
e and i again by y, and o and u again by w. The internal vowel letters are optional with
most words, but they are present more often than not (and much more often than in
Biblical Hebrew). Examples:
e: at;ybe betā ‘house’; qyles] (or qles)] sǝleq ‘he went up’;
i: ar;pysi (or ar;psi) siprā ‘book’; wquylis] (or wqulis)] sǝlíqu ‘they (m) went up’;
o: µwço (or µço) šom ‘name’; bwtok] (or btok)] kǝtob ‘write (ms)!’;
u: az:gwru (or az:gru) rugzā ‘anger’; wbuwtuk] (or wbutuk)] kǝtúbu ‘write (mp)!’.
In the lessons below, including the exercises, forms will appear both with and without
such medial vowel letters.
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY xvii

In summary:
a is used to indicate final ā and occasionally final a;
h is used to indicate final ā after consonantal a ʔ, in hw:h] hǝwāh, in Hebrew names,
and in numbers with masc. nouns;
w is used to indicate final and medial o and u;
y is used to indicate final and medial e and i.

(c) Vowel Length

It is unlikely that phonemic distinctions in vowel length were made in the Aramaic of
Targum Onqelos. Rather, the seven vowel signs probably indicate purely qualitative dis-
tinctions. (This applies as well to ā and a; although we transcribe the former with a
macron, the distinction between the two was most likely one of vowel quality rather than
vowel quantity: ā perhaps as in ought, IPA [ɔ], and a perhaps as in father, IPA [a].)

3. Consonantal Doubling
Certain formal distinctions indicate that most of the consonants could occur doubled (i.e.,
lengthened): e.g.,
ar;whon} nǝhorā ‘light’: ar;whonbi bi-nhorā ‘in the light’;
but ar;whon}mi min-nǝhorā ‘from the light’.
The Babylonian system of vocalization, however, has no sign comparable to the Tiberian
. dāgeš (forte) to indicate such consonantal doubling (e.g., ar:/hN“m)i . Nevertheless, the
doubling will always be represented in our transliteration.

4. Syllabification
(a) No syllable may begin with a vowel (except wU u- ‘and’);
(b) No syllable may begin or end with more than one consonant.
Examples: ˚t;ybe betāk ‘your (ms) house’: be/tāk;
˜wkok]lm' malkǝkon ‘your (mp) king’: mal/kǝ/kon;
ha;r;ç; šārāʔā ‘to begin’: šā/rā/ʔā;
hynelif]qyi yiqṭǝlinneh ‘he will kill him’: yiq/ṭǝ/lin/neh.
Exceptions are certain verbal forms that end with two consonants: e.g., tbt'k] kǝtabt
‘you (sg) wrote’: kǝ/tabt.

5. Stress
In the majority of forms, stress falls on the final syllable: bt'k] kǝtab ‘he wrote’; at;ybe betā
‘house’. Less frequently, the penultimate syllable is stressed: tb't'k] kǝtábat ‘she wrote’:
an:t'ybe betánā ‘our house’. As the examples illustrate, the position of the stress will not be
indicated in the script for either alternative, but will be marked (with ´ ) in the translitera-
tion when it does not fall on the final syllable.
xviii ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY

6. Spirantization
The six consonants b b, g g, d d, k k, p p, t t were spirantized, i.e., pronounced as the
fricatives [v, ɣ, ð, x, f, θ], respectively, under certain conditions, viz.:
(a) after any vowel:
bt'k] kǝtab [kǝθav] ‘he wrote’; az:gwru rugzā [ruɣzā] ‘anger’;
ay:bin} nǝbiyā [nǝviyā] ‘prophet’; db'[] ʕǝbad [ʕǝvað] ‘he did’;
qp'n} nǝpaq [nǝfaq] ‘he went out’; al;k]yme mekǝlā [mexǝlā] ‘food’.
Note that this applies as well when a form ending in a vowel is prefixed to a
word beginning with one of these consonants: am;rk' karmā [karmā] ‘vineyard’,
but am;rk'b] bǝ-karmā [bǝxarmā] ‘in the vineyard’; an:b] bǝnā [bǝnā] ‘he built’, but
an:bwu u-bnā [uvnā] ‘and he built’.
(b) if a vowel precedes in the underlying form:
bt'kwu u-ktab [uxθav] < *wǝ-kǝtab ‘and he wrote’;
ay:binyli li-nbiyā [linviyā] < *lǝ-nǝbiyā ‘to the prophet’.
In the Tiberian system of vocalization, the distinction between stops and fricatives could
be indicated by a dāgeš (lene) in the former; e.g.,
˜/kB] bǝkon [bǝxon] ‘in you (mp)’;
T]b]t'K] kǝtabt [kǝθavt] ‘you (sg) wrote’.
In the Babylonian system, however, there is no sign or device like the dāgeš to indicate
whether the stop or the fricative was to be pronounced. Since the spirantization is com-
pletely predictable in the two circumstances noted above, it will likewise not be indicated
in our transliteration of such forms.
There is another group of examples in which spirantization occurs, however, viz.:

(c) when a vowel preceded the consonant at an earlier stage of the language, but has
since been lost:
ay:k'lm' malkayyā [malxayyā] < *malakayyā ‘kings’;
ab;hd' dahbā [dahvā] < *ðahabā ‘gold’;
at;ma' ʔamtā [ʔamθā] < *ʔamatā ‘female servant’;
at;k]rybi birkǝtā [birxǝθā] < *barakatā ‘blessing’;
˜wkonk'çm' maškankon [maškanxon] < *maškanvkun ‘your (mp) tent’.
In these cases the spirantization, since it is not generally predictable, will be indicated in
the transliteration, as the examples show, by a line under the consonant in question.

The consonants are never spirantized if they are doubled:

lybeq' qabbel [qabbel] ‘he received’;
qypey" yappeq [yappeq] ‘he will send out’.
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY xix

7. Some Combinatory Rules involving ǝ

Aramaic phonology does not tolerate a sequence of two syllables whose vowels are both
ǝ. When this would occur, therefore, certain changes take place. In the following, G rep-
resents any guttural consonant (a ʔ, h h, j ḥ, [ ʕ), C any non-guttural consonant except y y.
(a) Cǝ + Gǝ → Ca-Gǝ, i.e., ǝ becomes a before a guttural plus ǝ:
*dǝ-ʕǝbad → da-ʕǝbad (db'[]d)' ‘which he made’;
*lǝ-ʔǝbúhi → la-ʔǝbúhi (yhiwbua]l)' ‘to his father’.
If the guttural is h h or j ḥ, the following ǝ is frequently lost:
*wǝ-hǝwo → wa-hǝwo (wwoh]w") or wa-hwo (wwohw") ‘and they (m) were’;
*dǝ-ḥǝlámit → da-ḥǝlámit (tymil'j]d)' or da-ḥlámit (tymil'jd') ‘which I dreamt’.
(b) Cǝ + yǝ → C-i, i.e., the sequence -ǝyǝ- is replaced by i:
*wǝ-yǝdaʕ → w-idaʕ ([d'ywi) ‘and he knew’;
*bǝ-yǝmāmā → b-imāmā (am;m;ybi) ‘in daytime’.
(c) Cǝ + Cǝ → Ci-C, i.e., the first ǝ becomes i, the second is lost:
*kǝ-nǝbiya → ki-nbiyā (ay:binki) ‘like a prophet’;
*dǝ-kǝtab → di-ktab (bt'kydi) ‘which he wrote’.
Rule (c) does not apply when the first word is w] wǝ- (‘and’); rather:
(d) wǝ- + Cǝ → u-C, i.e., wǝ- becomes u-, and the second ǝ is again lost:
*wǝ-nǝbiya → u-nbiyā (ay:binwu) ‘and the prophet’;
*wǝ-kǝtab → u-ktab (bt'kwu) ‘and he wrote’;
wǝ- + Gǝ occasionally → u-G rather than wa-G as in (a): u-ḥmārin (˜yrim;jwU) ‘and
donkeys’.

8. Some Distinctions vis-à-vis Biblical Hebrew

Hebrew and Aramaic are closely related languages, as the following forms, which may be
either language, illustrate: ykilm' malki ‘my king’; ˚reb;y} yǝbārek ‘he will bless’. Each
language has an independent history, however, and they differ in many ways. The follow-
ing selection of differences is essentially confined to phonological features.

(a) Consonants
Proto-Semitic, the parent language of Hebrew and Aramaic, had more consonants than
appear in either of those later languages. In the latter, pairs or even trios of sounds fell
together over time (i.e., came to be pronounced the same). But the same sounds did not
always fall together in both Hebrew and Aramaic, as the table below illustrates.
In Old and Official Aramaic texts, several of these sets of sounds had not yet fallen
together. Since Aramaic speakers borrowed their writing system (alphabet) from the
Phoenicians, and since Phoenician had only 22 consonants, certain letters had to do
double duty in the early Aramaic dialects. These double-duty letters usually do not reflect
xx ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY

pairs of sounds that fell together in later Aramaic, but rather pairs that had fallen together
in Phoenician (and in Hebrew).

Proto- Hebrew Early Mid./Late Hebrew Mid./Late

Semitic Aramaic Aramaic Aramaic
d dd dd dd dām dǝmā ‘blood’
ð zz zz dd ʔṓzen ʔudnā ‘ear’
dz zz zz zz ʔérez ʔarzā ‘cedar’
ǵ [ʕ [ʕ [ʕ ʕélem ʕulemā ‘youth’
ʕ [ʕ [ʕ [ʕ ʕáyin ʕenā ‘eye’
ṣ́ xṣ qq [ʕ ʔéreṣ ʔarʕā ‘earth’
tṣ xṣ xṣ xṣ ṣām ṣām ‘to fast’
θ̣ xṣ xṣ fṭ nāṣar nǝṭar ‘keep’
ṭ fṭ fṭ fṭ ṭōb ṭāb ‘good’
ts ss ss ss sāmak sǝmak ‘to lean’
ś cś çš ss śām sām ‘to place’
s vš çš çš šāmaʕ šǝmaʕ ‘hear’
θ vš çš tt šālōš tǝlāt ‘three’
t tt tt tt báyit betā ‘house’

Thus, Middle and Late Aramaic d d corresponds to Hebrew d d, z z

[ ʕ [ ʕ, x ṣ
f ṭ f ṭ, x ṣ
s s s s, c ś
t t t t, v š

(b) Vowels
(i) Early Semitic ā remained unchanged in Aramaic, but became ō in Hebrew, e.g.,
Aramaic ṭāb, but Hebrew ṭōb ‘good’;
kāteb kōtēb ‘writing’;
tǝlāt šālōš ‘three’.
(ii) Early Semitic short vowels in open syllables before the stress were reduced to ǝ
in Aramaic, but lengthened in Hebrew (in nouns and certain verb forms): e.g.,
Northwest-Semitic *ðahab- ‘gold’ > Aramaic dǝhab, Hebrew zāhāb;
Northwest-Semitic *katab- ‘he wrote’ > Aramaic kǝtab, Hebrew kātab.
 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Aberbach, Moses and Bernard Grossfeld. 1982. Targum Onkelos to Genesis: A Critical Analysis together
with an English Translation of the Text. New York: Ktav.
Alexander, Philip S. 1988. Jewish Aramaic Translations of Hebrew Scriptures. Pp. 217–53 in Mikra:
Text, Translation, Reading and Interpretation of the Hebrew Bible in Ancient Judaism and Early
Christianity, ed. Martin Jan Mulder and Harry Sysling. Assen/Maastricht: Van Gorcum, Philadelphia:
Fortress.
Alexander, Philip S. 1992. Targum, Targumim. Pp. 6.320–31 in The Anchor Bible Dictionary, ed. David
Noel Freedman. New York: Doubleday.
Bar-Asher Siegal, Elitzur A. 2011. The Epistolary Terms k‘t, k‘nt in Official Aramaic, the Feminine
Endings in Aramaic Dialects and Other Dialectal Features in the History of Aramaic. Ancient Near
Eastern Studies 48: 199–231.
Bar-Asher Siegal, Elitzur A. 2016. Introduction to the Grammar of Jewish Babylonian Aramaic. 2nd ed.
Lehrbücher orientalischer Sprachen III/3. Münster: Ugarit.
Bauer, Hans and Pontus Leander. 1927. Grammatik des Biblisch-Aramäischen. Halle: Max Niemeyer
(reprinted Hildesheim: Olms, 1962).
Beattie, D. R. G. and M. J. McNamara, eds. 1994. The Aramaic Bible: Targums in Their Historical
Context. Journal for the Study of the Old Testament, Supplementary Series 166. Sheffield: JSOT.
Ben-Eliyahu, Eyal, Yehudah Cohn, and Fergus Millar. 2012. Handbook of Jewish Literature from Late
Antiquity, 135–700 CE. Oxford: Oxford University Press for The British Academy.
Berliner, A. 1884. Targum Onkelos. 2 volumes. Berlin: Gorzelanczyk (reprinted Jerusalem: Makor,
1974).
Berliner, A. 1877. Die Massorah zum Targum Onkelos. Leipzig: J. C. Hinrichs.
Beyer, Klaus. 1984–2004. Die aramäischen Texte vom Toten Meer. 2 volumes and supplementary volume
to Vol. 1. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Beyer, Klaus. 1986. The Aramaic Language. Its Distribution and Subdivisions. Translated by J. F.
Healey. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Bombeck, Stefan. 1995a. Das Partizip mit der enklitischen Subjektsform des Personal Pronomens in den
Targumen Onqelos, Pseudo-Jonathan und Neofiti. Biblische Notizen 80: 16–19.
Bombeck, Stefan. 1995b. Das Partizip von HWH in den Targumen Onqelos, Pseudo-Jonathan und
Neofiti. Biblische Notizen 80: 19–22.
Boyarin, Daniel. 1976. Targum Onkelos to the Pentateuch: A Collection of Fragments in the Library of
the Jewish Theological Seminary of America, New York. 4 volumes. Jerusalem: Maqor.
Boyarin, Daniel. 1981. An Inquiry into the Formation of the Middle Aramaic Dialects. Pp. 2.613–49 in
Bono homini donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns, ed. Y. L.
Arbeitman and A. R. Bomhard. Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Brederek, Emil. 1906. Konkordanz zum Targum Onkelos. Giessen: A. Töpelmann.
Breuer, Yochanan. 2006. Aramaic in Late Antiquity. Pp. 457–91 in The Cambridge History of Judaism,
Vol. 4: The Late Roman-Rabbinic Period, ed. Steven T. Katz. Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.
Brock, Sebastian, et al., eds. 2001. The Hidden Pearl: The Aramaic Heritage. 3 volumes. Piscataway, NJ:
Gorgias.
Burtea, Bogdan. 2011. Mandaic. Pp. 670–84 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Butts, Aaron M. 2018. The Aramaic Šap̄ˁel in Its Semitic Context. Aramaic Studies 16: 117–43.
CAL = The Comprehensive Aramaic Lexicon, general editor Stephen A. Kaufman. http://cal.huc.edu/.
Condrea, Vasile. 2020. Syntactic Studies in Targum Aramaic: A Text-Linguistic Reading of 1 Samuel.
Georgias Biblical Studies 71. Piscataway, NJ: Gorgias.
Cook, Edward M. 1986. Rewriting the Bible: the Text and Language of the Pseudo-Jonathan Targum.
Ph.D. Dissertation, UCLA.
xxii BIBLIOGRAPHY

Cook, Edward M. 1994. A New Perspective on the Language of Onqelos and Jonathan. Pp. 142–56 in
Beattie and McNamara 1994.
Cook, Edward M. 2008. A Glossary of Targum Onkelos according to Alexander Sperber’s Edition.
Studies in the Aramaic Interpretation of Scripture 6. Leiden: Brill.
Cook, Edward M. 2015. Dictionary of Qumran Aramaic. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.
Creason, Stuart. 2004. Aramaic. Pp. 391–426 in The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient
Languages, ed. Roger D. Woodard. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press (reprinted as pp. 108–44
in The Ancient Languages of Syria-Palestine and Arabia, ed. Roger D. Woodard; Cambridge: CUP,
2008).
Dalman, Gustav. 1905. Grammatik des jüdisch-palästinischen Aramäisch nach der Idiomen des
palästinischen Talmud, des Onkelostargum und Propheten-targum und der jerusalemischen
Targume. 2nd ed. Leipzig: J. C. Hinrichs (reprinted, with Aramäische Dialektproben, Darmstadt:
Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, 1960).
Dalman, Gustav. 1938. Aramäisch-neuhebräisches Wörterbuch zu Targum, Talmud und Midrasch. 3rd
ed. Göttingen: Eduard Pfeiffer (reprint Hildesheim: Georg Olms, 1997).
Díez Macho, Alejandro. 1968. A Fundamental Manuscript for an Edition of the Babylonian Onqelos to
Genesis: MS 152 of the Jewish Th. Seminary of New York. Pp. 62–78 in In Memoriam Paul Kahle,
ed. Matthew Black and Georg Fohrer. Berlin: Alfred Töpelmann.
Díez Macho, Alejandro. 1968–78. Neophyti 1: Targum palestinense MS de la Biblioteca Vaticana. 5 vols.
Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas.
Díez Macho, Alejandro. 1972. El Targum. Introducción a las traducciones aramaicas de la Biblia.
Barcelona: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas.
Díez Merino, L. 1995. Historia de la gramática aramea: Panorama bibliográfico. Aula Orientalis 13: 241–
53.
Dodi, Amos. 1981. The Grammar of Targum Onqelos according to Geniza Fragments. Ph.D. Dissertation,
Bar-Ilan University (Hebrew with English summary).
Dodi, Amos. 1983. A Morphological Study of the Wesk Verbs in Targum Onqelos. Lešonénu 47: 187–
207 (Hebrew).
Dodi, Amos. 1989. The Formation of I–ʔ Verbs in Targum Onqelos according to the Geniza. Masorot 3–
4: 73–86 (Hebrew).
Dodi, Amos. 1991. Forms in Pausal Positions in the Masorah of Targum Onqelos. Lešonénu 55: 203–19.
Drazin, Israel. 1982. Targum Onkelos to Deuteronomy: An English Translation of the Text with Analysis
and Commentary. New York: Ktav.
Drazin, Israel. 1990. Targum Onkelos to Exodus: An English Translation of the Text with Analysis and
Commentary. New York: Ktav.
Drazin, Israel. 1994. Targum Onkelos to Leviticus: An English Translation of the Text with Analysis and
Commentary. Hoboken, NJ: Ktav.
Drazin, Israel. 1998. Targum Onkelos to Numbers: An English Translation of the Text with Analysis and
Commentary. Hoboken, NJ: Ktav.
Dušek, Jan. 2007. Les manuscrits araméens du Wadi Daliyeh et la Samarie vers 450-332 av. J.-C.
Leiden, Brill.
Fassberg, Steven E. 1985. Determined Forms of the Cardinal Number “One” in Three Pentateuchal
Targumim. Sefarad 45: 207–15.
Fassberg, Steven E. 1990. A Grammar of the Palestinian Targum Fragments from the Cairo Genizah.
Harvard Semitic Studies 38. Atlanta: Scholars.
Fassberg, Steven E. 1995. Lamedh-yodh Verbs in Palestinian Targumic Aramaic. Pp. 43–52 in Studia
Aramaica: New Sources and New Approaches, ed. M. J. Geller, J. C. Greenfield and M. P. Weitzman.
Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Ferrer, Joan. 2004. Esbozo de historia de la lengua aramea. Studia Semitica 3. Córdoba/Barcelona: StS.
Fitzmyer, Joseph A. 1970. The Languages of Palestine in the First Century A.D. Catholic Biblical
Quarterly 32: 501–31.
Fitzmyer, Joseph A. 1979. The Phases of the Aramaic Language. Pp. 57–84 in idem, A Wandering
Aramean: Collected Aramaic Essays. Missoula, MT: Scholars.
 BIBLIOGRAPHY xxiii

Fitzmyer, J. A. 2004. The Genesis Apocryphon. 3rd ed. Rome, Pontificio Instituto Biblico.
Fitzmyer, Joseph A., and Daniel J. Harrington. 1978. A Manual of Palestinian Aramaic Texts. Rome:
Biblical Institute.
Flesher, Paul V. M. and Bruce Chilton. 2011. The Targums: A Critical Introduction. Waco, TX: Baylor
University Press.
Folmer, Margaretha L. 1995. The Aramaic Language in the Achaemenid Period: A Study in Linguistic
Variation. Leuven: Peeters.
Folmer, Margaretha L. 2008. The Use and Form of the nota objecti in Jewish Palestinian Aramaic
Inscriptions. Pp. 131–58 in Gzella and Folmer 2008.
Folmer, Margaretha L. 2011. Imperial Aramaic as an Administrative Language of the Achaemenid
Period. Pp. 587–97 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Garr, W. Randall. 1991. *ay > a in Targum Onqelos. Journal of the American Oriental Society 111: 712–
19.
Garr, W. Randall. 2008. The Determined Plural Ending -ē in Targum Onqelos. Pp. 173–206 in Gzella and
Folmer 2008.
Golomb, David M. 1985. A Grammar of Targum Neofiti. Harvard Semitic Monographs 34. Chico, CA:
Scholars.
Golomb, David M. 1987. The Targumic Renderings of the Verb lehištaḥawôt: A Targumic Translation
Convention. Pp. 105–18 in Working With No Data: Semitic and Egyptian Studies Presented to
Thomas O. Lambdin, ed. David M. Golomb. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.
Goshen-Gottstein, Moshe H. 1978. The Language of Targum Onqelos and the Model of Literary
Diglossia in Aramaic. Journal of Near Eastern Studies 37: 169–79.
Greenfield, Jonas C. 1974. Standard Literary Aramaic. Pp. 280–89 in Actes du premier Congrès
internationale de linguistique sémitique et chamito-sémitique, Paris 16–19 juillet 1969, ed. André
Caquot and David Cohen. The Hague: Mouton.
Greenspahn, Frederick E. 2002. Aramaic. Pp. 93–108 in Beyond Babel: A Handbook for Biblical Hebrew
and Related Languages, ed. John Kaltner and Steven L. McKenzie. Resources for Biblical Studies 42.
Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature.
Greenspahn, Frederick E. 2003. An Introduction to Aramaic. 2nd ed. Resources for Biblical Study 46.
Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature.
Gropp, Douglas M. 1990. The Language of the Samaria Papyri: A Preliminary Study. Pp. 169–87 in
Sopher Mahir: Northwest Semitic Studies Presented to Stanislav Segert (= Maarav 5–6), ed. Edward
M. Cook. Los Angeles: Western Academic.
Gropp, Douglas M. 1994. The 3 f.s. Inflection of the Perfect in OJA and Related Problems. Journal of
Semitic Studies 39: 153–59.
Grossfeld, Bernard. 1972–90. A Bibliography of Targum Literature. 3 volumes. Cincinnati: Hebrew
Union College Press; New York: Sepher-Hermon.
Grossfeld, Bernard. 1988a. Targum Onqelos to Genesis. Wilmington, DE: Michael Glazier.
Grossfeld, Bernard. 1988b. Targum Onqelos to Exodus. Wilmington, DE: Michael Glazier.
Grossfeld, Bernard. 1988c. The Targum Onqelos to Leviticus and the Targum Onqelos to Numbers.
Wilmington, DE: Michael Glazier.
Grossfeld, Bernard. 1988d. Targum Onqelos to Deuteronomy. Wilmington, DE: Michael Glazier.
Grossfeld, Bernard and S. David Sperling. 2006. Aramaic: the Targumim. Pp. 3.588–95 in Encyclopedia
Judaica, 2nd ed., ed. Fred Skolnik. Farmington Hills, MI: Thomson Gale.
Gzella, Holger. 2011a. Imperial Aramaic. Pp. 574–86 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Gzella, Holger. 2011b. Late Imperial Aramaic. Pp. 598–609 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Gzella, Holger. 2014. Language and Script. Pp. 71–106 in The Aramaeans in Ancient Syria, ed. Herbert
Niehr. Leiden: Brill.
Gzella, Holger. 2015. A Cultural History of Aramaic: From the Beginnings to the Advent of Islam. Hand-
book of Oriental Studies 1, 111. Leiden: Brill.
Gzella, Holger and Margaretha L. Folmer, eds. 2008. Aramaic in Its Historical and Linguistic Setting.
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Häberl, Charles. 2019. Mandaic. Pp. 679–710 in Huehnergard and Pat-El 2019.
xxiv BIBLIOGRAPHY

Healey, John F. 2011. Syriac. Pp. 637–51 in Weninger et al. 2011.

Huehnergard, John. 1995. What is Aramaic? Aram 7: 265–86.
Huehnergard, John and Na‘ama Pat-El, eds. 2019. The Semitic Languages. 2nd ed. London: Routledge.
Jastrow, Marcus. 1903. A Dictionary of the Targumim, the Talmud Babli and Yerushalmi, and the
Midrashic Literature. 2 volumes. New York: G. P. Putnam (reprinted New York: Pardes, 1950).
Kaddari, Menahem Z. 1963a. Studies in the Syntax of Targum Onqelos. Tarbiz 32: 232–51 (Hebrew).
Kaddari, Menahem Z. 1963b. The Use of the d Clauses in the Language of Targum Onqelos. Textus 3:
36–59 (Hebrew).
Kasovsky, H. J. 1940. Targum Concordance. Jerusalem: Mosad ha-Rav Kuk (Hebrew).
Kaufman, Stephen A. 1997. Aramaic. Pp. 114–30 in The Semitic Languages, ed. Robert Hetzron.
London/New York: Routledge.
Khan, Geoffrey. 1997. Jewish Palestinian Aramaic Phonology. Pp. 1.103–13 in Phonologies of Asia and
Africa, ed. Alan S. Kaye. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.
Klein, Michael L. 1983. New Editions of the Palestinian Targumim to the Pentateuch. Pp. 89–95 in
Arameans, Aramaic and the Aramaic Literary Tradition, ed. Michael Sokoloff. Bar-Ilan Studies in
Near Eastern Languages and Cultures. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press.
Klein, Michael L. 2000. The Masorah to Targum Onqelos as Preserved in MSS Vatican Ebreo 448, Rome
Angelica Or. 7, Fragments from the Cairo Geniza and in Earlier Editions by A. Berliner and S.
Landauer. Binghamton, NY: Global.
Knudsen, Ebbe Egede. 1981. A Targumic Aramaic Reader. Leiden: Brill.
Kutscher, E. Y. 1958. The Language of the Genesis Apocryphon: a Preliminary Study. Scripta
Hierosolymitana 4: 1–35.
Kutscher, E. Y. 1970. Aramaic. Pp. 347–412 in Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 6, ed. Thomas A.
Sebeok. The Hague: Mouton.
Kutscher, E. Y. 1976. Studies in Galilean Aramaic. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press.
Kuty, Renaud J. 2005. Determination in Targum Jonathan to Samuel. Aramaic Studies 3: 187–201.
Kuty, Renaud J. 2007. Genitive Constructions in Targum Jonathan to Samuel. Aramaic Studies 5: 111–
31.
Kuty, Renaud J. 2008 Remarks on the Syntax of the Participle in Targum Jonathan on Samuel. Pp. 207–
20 in Gzella and Folmer 2008.
Kuty, Renaud J. 2009. Genitive Constructions in Targum Onqelos to Genesis: The Relation between the
Aramaic of Targum Onqelos and the Aramaic of Targum Jonathan. Pp. 89–111 in Relative Clauses
and Genitive Constructions in Semitic, ed. Janet C. E. Watson and Jan Retsö. Manchester: University
of Manchester Press.
Kuty, Renaud J. 2010. Studies in the Syntax of Targum Jonathan to Samuel. Ancient Near Eastern
Stuidies, Supplements 30. Leuven: Peeters.
Kuty, Renaud J. 2013. Aramaic Targums. In Encyclopedia of Hebrew Languages and Linguistics, ed.
Geoffrey Khan. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Online.
Landauer, S. 1896. Die Mâsôrâh zum Onkelos auf Grund neuer Quellen lexikalisch geordnet und kritisch
beleuchtet. Amsterdam: Levisson (reprint Jerusalem: Makor, 1970).
Le Déaut, R. 1966. Introduction à la littérature targumique. Rome: Institut Biblique Pontifical.
Levias, Caspar. 1930. A Grammar of Galilean Aramaic. With an introduction by Michael Sokoloff, 1986.
New York: The Jewish Theological Seminary of America (Hebrew).
Levy, Jacob. 1924. Neuhebräisches und chaldäisches Wörterbuch über die Talmudim und Midrashim.
2nd ed. 4 volumes. Leipzig: F. A. Brockhaus (reprinted Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesell-
schaft, 1963).
Levy, Jacob. 1867–68. Chaldäisches Wörterbuch. 2 volumes. Leipzig: Baumgärtner.
Loesov, Sergey. 2012. A New Attempt at Reconstructing Proto-Aramaic. I. Babel und Bibel 6: 421–56.
Lund, Jerome A. 1998. Morphological Variation in the Imperfect of hewâ in Onqelos and Jonathan.
Sefarad 58: 261–70.
Macuch, Rudolf. 1965. Handbook of Classical and Modern Mandaic. Berlin: W. de Gruyter.
Malone, Joseph L. 1972. Juncture in the Aramaic Verb of the Onkelos and Jonathan Targums. Journal of
Near Eastern Studies 31: 156–66.
 BIBLIOGRAPHY xxv

Morag, Shelomo. 1988. Babylonian Aramaic: The Yemenite Tradition. Historical Aspects and
Transmission, Phonology, the Verbal System. Jerusalem: Ben Zvi Institute (Hebrew).
Morgenstern, Matthew. 1999. The History of Aramaic Dialects in the Light of Discoveries from the
Judaean Desert: The Case of Nabataean. Eretz-Israel 26: 134*–142*.
Morgenstern, Matthew. 2011a. Studies in Jewish Babylonian Aramaic Based upon Early Eastern
Manuscripts. Harvard Semitic Studies 62. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.
Morgenstern, Matthew. 2011b. Christian Palestinian Aramaic. Pp. 628–36 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Müller-Kessler, Christa. 1991. Grammatik des Christlich-Palästinisch-Aramäischen. 1: Schriftlehre,
Lautlehre, Formenlehre. Hildesheim: Olms.
Müller-Kessler, Christa. 2001. The Earliest Evidence for Targum Onqelos from Babylonia and the
Question of Its Dialect and Origin. Journal of the Aramaic Bible 3: 181–98.
Müller-Kessler, Christa. 2002. Die Stellung des Koine-Babylonisch-Aramäischen auf Zauberschalen
innerhalb des Ostaramäischen. Pp. 91–103 in Neue Beiträge zur Semitistik, ed. Norbert Nebes.
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Muraoka, Takamitsu. 1983. On the Morphosyntax of the Infinitive in Targumic Aramaic. Pp. 75–79 in
Arameans, Aramaic and the Aramaic Literary Tradition, ed. Michael Sokoloff. Bar-Ilan Studies in
Near Eastern Languages and Cultures. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press.
Muraoka, Takamitsu. 1985. A Study in Palestinian Jewish Aramaic. Sefarad 45: 3–21.
Muraoka, Takamitsu. 2011. A Grammar of Qumran Aramaic. Ancient Near Eastern Studies, Supplement
38. Leuven: Peeters.
Muraoka, Takamitsu. 2012. An Introduction to Egyptian Aramaic. Lehrbücher orientalischer Sprachen
III/1. Münster: Ugarit.
Muraoka, Takamitsu and Bezalel Porten. 2003. A Grammar of Egyptian Aramaic. Handbuch der Orien-
talistik 1, 32. 2nd ed. Leiden: Brill.
Nöldeke, Theodor. 1904. Compendious Syriac Grammar. Translated by James A. Crichton. London:
Williams & Norgate (reprint, Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns, 2001).
Odeberg, Hugo. 1939. The Aramaic Portions of Bereshit Rabba with Grammar of Galilæan Aramaic.
Lund: C. W. K. Gleerup.
Pat-El, Na‘ama. 2008. Traces of Aramaic Dialectal Variation in Late Biblical Hebrew. Vetus Testamen-
tum 58: 650–55.
Pat-El, Na‘ama. 2012. Studies in the Historical Syntax of Aramaic. Perspectives on Linguistics and
Ancient Languages 1. Piscataway, NJ: Gorgias.
Pat-El, Na‘ama. 2019. Syriac. Pp. 653–78 in Huehnergard and Pat-El 2019.
Pat-El, Na‘ama and Aren Wilson-Wright. 2018. Features of Aramaeo-Canaanite. Journal of the American
Oriental Society 138: 781–806.
Porten, Bezalen and Ada Yardeni. 1986–99. Textbook of Aramaic Documents from Ancient Egypt. 4
volumes. Jerusalem: Hebrew University Press.
Posen, Rafael B. 2004. Consistency of Targum Onqelos’ Translation. Jerusalem: Magnes (Hebrew).
Postgate, J. N., ed. 2007. Languages of Iraq, Ancient and Modern. London: British School of Archaeo-
logy in Iraq.
Ribera Florit, Josep. 1988. El Targum de Isaías. Valencia: Institución S. Jerónimo.
Ribera Florit, Josep. 1991. El arameo del Targum de los profetas (Isaías, Jeremías). Morphología de los
pronombres. Annuari de Filologia 14: 39–54.
Ribera Florit, Josep. 1992. Targum Jonatán de los profetas posteriores en tradición Babilónica:
Jeremías. Textos y estudios “Cardenal Cisneros” 52. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones
Cientificas, Instituto de Filología del CSIC, Departmento de Filología Bíblica y de Oriente Antiguo.
Ribera Florit, Josep. 1999. El Targum de Jeremías: la versión aramea del Profeta Jeremías, Versíon
crítica, introducción y notas. Navarra: Estella.
Rosenthal, Franz. 2006. A Grammar of Biblical Aramaic. 7th ed. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Rosenthal, Franz, ed. 1967. An Aramaic Handbook. 4 volumes. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Smelik, Willem F. 1995. The Targum of Judges. Leiden: Brill.
Sokoloff, Michael. 1990. A Dictionary of Jewish Palestinian Aramaic of the Byzantine Period. Ramat-
Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press.
xxvi BIBLIOGRAPHY

Sokoloff, Michael. 2002. A Dictionary of Jewish Babylonian Aramaic of the Talmudic and Geonic
Periods. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2003. A Dictionary of Judean Aramaic. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2011a. Jewish Palestinian Aramaic. Pp. 610–18 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2011b. Jewish Babylonian Aramaic. Pp. 660–69 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2012. Outline of Aramaic Diachrony. Pp. 379–406 in Diachrony in Biblical Hebrew,
ed. Cynthia L. Miller-Naudé and Ziony Zevit. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2014. A Dictionary of Christian Palestinian Aramaic. Leuven: Peeters.
Sperber, Alexander. 1959–73. The Bible in Aramaic. 5 volumes. Leiden: Brill.
Staalduine-Sulman, Eveline van. 2002. The Targum of Samuel. Leiden: Brill.
Stadel, Christian. 2019. Samaritan Aramaic. Pp. 611–31 in Huehnergard and Pat-El 2019.
Steiner, Richard C. 2019. On the Use of Greek Translations in Dating the Shift from Targum Proto-
Jonathan to Targum Yerushalmi in Ezekiel. Textus 28: 145–56.
Stenning, J. F. 1949. The Targum of Isaiah. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Stevenson, Wm. B. 1962. Grammar of Palestinian Jewish Aramaic. 2nd ed. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
Tal, Abraham. 1975. The Language of the Targum of the Former Prophets and Its Position within the
Aramaic Dialects. Texts and Studies in the Hebrew Language and Related Subjects 1. Tel-Aviv: Tel-
Aviv University Press (Hebrew, English summary).
Tal, Abraham. 1986. The Dialects of Jewish Palestinian Aramaic and the Palestinian Targum of the
Pentateuch. Sefarad 46: 441–48.
Tal, Abraham. 2008. The Role of Targum Onqelos in Literary Activity During the Middle Ages. Pp. 159–
71 in Gzella and Folmer 2008.
Tal, Abraham. 2011. Samaritan Aramaic. Pp. 619–27 in Weninger et al. 2011.
Tal, Abraham. 2013. Samaritan Aramaic. Lehrbücher orientalischer Sprachen III/2. Münster: Ugarit.
Vogt, Ernestus. 1971. Lexicon linguae aramaicae veteris testamenti documentis antiquis illustratum.
Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.
Weninger, Stefan et al., eds. 2019. The Semitic Languages: An International Handbook. Handbücher zur
Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft 36. Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton.
Younger, K. Lawson, Jr. 2016. A Political History of the Arameans from Their Origins to the End of
Their Polities. Archaeology and Biblical Studies 13. Atlanta: Society of Biblical Literature.
 LESSON ONE

1.1 Noun Gender

There are two grammatical genders in Targumic Aramaic: masculine and feminine. The
gender of nouns denoting animate beings normally corresponds to sexual gender. Other-
wise, there is no clearly predictable relationship between gender and meaning, but there
is a consistent relationship between gender and form: nearly all feminine nouns are
marked by the ending -t- in the basic lexical form (see §1.2, below), while masculine
nouns have no special ending.
ak;lm' malkā king at;k]lm' malkǝtā queen
al;[b' baʕlā husband at;t]yai ʔittǝtā woman
al;qj' ḥaqlā field at;n}ygI ginnǝtā garden
There are exceptions, however. A small number of nouns without -t- are feminine in gen-
der, such as
a[;ra' ʔarʕā (f.) earth
ar;ybe berā (f.) pit
am;yai ʔimmā (f.) mother.
Occasionally a noun is used in either gender: e.g., an:myzI zimnā ‘time’. In the lesson vocab-
ularies, gender will be indicated only for these exceptional cases.

1.2 Noun Definition

The distinction between a definite and an indefinite noun (i.e., ‘the king’ as opposed to ‘a
king’) is indicated, if at all, by the ending of the noun in question. This feature will be
treated in detail in a later lesson (see §16.1). It will suffice for the moment to note that the
basic lexical form in -ā (fem. -tā), traditionally known as the emphatic form, is generally
regarded as the definite or determined form. In fact, however, it is very often the only
(non-bound) form of the singular noun in use, and it must be translated as definite or
indefinite according to the context:
aj;b]dm' madbǝḥā the altar, an altar
ak;lm' malkā the king, a king.

1.3 The Perfect of the G Verb

The basic form of the verb (traditionally known as the Peal) will be referred to in this
textbook as the G stem (German Grundstamm). The lexical form of the G verb consists of
the verbal root, usually triconsonantal, with an appropriate vowel pattern, namely, ǝ be-
tween the first and second consonants, and either a, e, or o between the second and third
consonants; most commonly, the second vowel is a (for e and o verbs, see §5.1, below):
2 LESSON ONE

e.g.,
bt'k] kǝtab he wrote, he has written (root: k-t-b)
qp'n} nǝpaq he went forth, he has gone forth (root: n-p-q).
This form is the 3rd person masc. sing. of the inflection called the Perfect. The Perfect
corresponds to the English simple past (preterite) or present perfect. In the lesson
vocabularies we shall always gloss the Aramaic Perfect with the English infinitive (thus,
e.g., kǝtab ‘to write’; nǝpaq ‘to go forth’).
The Perfect is inflected for person, number, and gender by the addition of subject
suffixes. The 3rd person forms are as follows; note that stress is on the second syllable in
each of these forms:
m. sg. qp'n} nǝpaq he went forth
f. sg. tq'p'n} nǝpáqat she went forth
m. pl. wqup'n} nǝpáqu they (masc.) went forth
f. pl. aq;p'n} nǝpáqā they (fem.) went forth.

A nominal subject (all of which are 3rd person by definition) normally follows the verb,
which agrees with the subject in number and gender: e.g.,
ak;lm' qp'n} Nǝpaq malkā. The king went forth.
at;k]lm' tq'p'n} Nǝpáqat malkǝtā. The queen went forth.
The Perfect is negated with al; lā, which directly precedes the verb:
ak;lm' qp'n} al; Lā nǝpaq malkā. The king did not go forth.

1.4 The Prepositions l] lǝ- and i˜mi min

The preposition l] lǝ- ‘to, for (a person), to (a place)’, is written as part of the following
word. We shall transcribe all such proclitic particles with a hyphen.
at;rq'l] lǝqartā = lǝ-qartā to the city.
The same is true of the preposition ˜mi (or ˜ymi) min ‘from’, with the additional feature of
the final -n assimilating to the first non-guttural consonant of the following noun; before a
guttural or r, the form is Ame me-: e.g.,
at;rq'mi miqqartā = miq-qartā from the city
ar'wfuymi miṭṭurā = miṭ-ṭurā from the mountain
a[;ra'me meʔarʕā = me-ʔarʕā from the land
aç;mr'me meramšā = me-ramšā from evening.
Min may optionally remain a separate word; this is not common except in certain expres-
sions that will be noted in the vocabularies.
 LESSON ONE 3

Vocabulary 1
Verbs:
db'a] ʔǝbad to perish, die.*
lz"a] ʔǝzal to go.*
lf'n} nǝṭal to raise, lift, take up; to set out, travel.
qp'n} nǝpaq to go forth; ˜mi qp'n} nǝpaq min to depart from, leave (a place).
qr'[] ʕǝraq to flee.
*As noted above, p. xv, some manuscripts have a' rather than a] in such forms, thus db'a'
ʔabad, lz"a' ʔazal.

Nouns (note: these forms may be translated as definite or indefinite; see §1.2):
at;t]yai ʔittǝtā woman, wife.
ar;bg'÷ar;bwgu gubrā/gabrā man.
ar;wfu ṭurā mountain.
ak;lm' malkā king.
at;k]lm' malkǝtā queen.
am;[' ʕammā people, the people; nation. Verbal agreement with ʕammā may be
singular or plural.
at;rq' qartā city.
Prepositions:
l] lǝ- to, for (a person), to, into (a place); see §1.4, above.
˜mi÷˜ymi min from, out of; also partitive: some of; see §1.4, above.
Adverbs:
al; lā (negative).
˜m;t' tammān there, in that place; ˜m;t'l] lǝ-tammān to there, thither; ˜m;t'mi mit-
tammān from there, thence.

Exercises
A. Translate the following sentences (the same sentences in script follow on the next
page).

1. ʔǝzal lǝ-ṭurā. 11. ʕǝráqat malkǝtā lǝ-ṭurā.

2. ʔǝzálat lǝ-qartā. 12. ʕǝráqu mit-tammān.
3. Nǝpáqu miq-qartā. 13. Nǝpáqat ʔittǝtā mit-tammān.
4. Nǝpáqā lǝ-ṭurā. 14. ʔǝbádu ʕammā tammān.
5. ʔǝbad gubrā. 15. Lā ʕǝraq malkā miq-qartā.
6. ʔǝbádat ʔittǝtā. 16. Lā ʔǝzálat ʔittǝtā lǝ-ṭurā.
7. ʔǝbádu ʕammā. 17. Lā nǝpáqu ʕammā mit-tammān.
8. Nǝṭal malkā. 18. Lā nǝṭálu lǝ-tammān.
9. Nǝṭálat malkǝtā. 19. Lā nǝpáqat malkǝtā miq-qartā.
10. ʕǝráqu miq-qartā. 20. Lā ʕǝraq gabrā lǝ-tammān.
4 LESSON ONE

B. These are the same as the sentences in exercise A. Point sentences 11–20.
arwfl atklm tqr[ 11 ar;wful] lz"a] 1
˜mtm wqr[ 12 at;rq'l] tl'z"a] 2
˜mtym attya tqpn 13 at;rq'ymi wqupn' } 3
˜mt am[ wdba 14 ar;wful] aq;pn' } 4
atrqm aklm qr[ al 15 ar;bwgu db'a] 5
arwfl attya tlza al 16 at;t]yai td'b'a] 6
˜mtm am[ wqpn al 17 am;[' wdub'a] 7
˜mtl wlfn al 18 ak;lm' lf'n} 8
atrqym atklm tqpn al 19 at;k]lm' tl'fn' } 9
˜mtl arbg qr[ al 20 at;rq'mi wqur'[] 10
 LESSON TWO

2.1 The G Perfect: Full Inflection

3ms bt'k] kǝtab he wrote 3mp wbut'k] kǝtábu they (m) wrote
3fs tb't'k] kǝtábat she wrote 3fp ab;t'k] kǝtábā they (f) wrote
2ms tbt'k] kǝtabt you (ms) wrote 2mp ˜wtubt'k] kǝtabtun you (mp) wrote
(or at;bt'k] kǝtábtā)
2fs tbt'k] kǝtabt you (fs) wrote 2fp ˜ytibt'k] kǝtabtin you (fp) wrote
1cs tybit'k] kǝtábit I wrote 1cp an:bt'k] kǝtábnā we wrote
The 2ms appears with -t or with -tā; the latter is less common. The 2mp and 2fp
endings are stressed; in all other forms the stress is on the second syllable.

2.2 The Direct Object Marker ty: yāt

The direct object of a transitive verb is usually, but not obligatorily, indicated by the par-
ticle ty: yāt if the direct object is
(a) definite (i.e., the emphatic form of a noun, used as definite; see §1.2);
(b) a proper name;
(c) a noun with a possessive suffix (see §6.1).
Some examples:
(a) ar;bg" ty: wluf'q] Qǝṭálu yāt gabrā. They killed the man.
but aj;b]dm' an:b] Bǝnā madbǝḥā. He built an altar.
(b) lwauç; ty: lf'q] Qǝṭal yāt Šāʔul. He killed Saul.
(c) an:t'rq' ty: ak;lm' an:b] Bǝnā malkā yāt qartánā. The king built our city.
Occasionally, the direct object is indicated by the preposition Al] lǝ- rather than by ty: yāt.

Vocabulary 2
Verbs:
rb'd] dǝbar take, to lead (away) (direct object is (1) a person or animal one takes
along from one place to another; or (2) a person one takes as part of one’s
group, household, or family).
bt'k] kǝtab to write.
rb'[] ʕǝbar to cross (something: yāt or bǝ-); to transgress.
jl'p] pǝlaḥ to serve (as slave, etc.).
lf'q] qǝṭal to kill.
Nouns:
a[;ra' ʔarʕā (f.) land, country; the earth.
ap;sk' kaspā silver, money.
6 LESSON TWO

ar;hn" nahrā river.

am;g:tpi pitgāmā word, thing, affair.
ar;px' ṣaprā morning.
an:y:nqi qinyānā property, possessions.
aç;mr' ramšā evening.

Other:
b] bǝ- (prep.) in, within; with (instrumental).
ty: yāt (direct object particle).
am;l] lǝmā or am; l[' ʕal mā (interrog.) why?

Exercises
A. Translate the following sentences.
1. Nǝpáqit bǝ-ṣaprā. 14. Pǝláḥu yāt malkā.
2. ʕǝráqnā mit-tammān. 15. Kǝtábit yāt pitgāmā.
3. ʔǝbádu bǝ-nahrā. 16. Lǝmā ʕǝbartun yāt nahrā?
4. Lǝmā lā ʕǝraqt? 17. Kǝtábat ʔittǝtā yāt pitgāmā.
5. Nǝṭálnā bǝ-ramšā. 18. Dǝbar malkā yāt gabrā.
6. Lǝmā ʔǝzaltun lǝ-ṭurā? 19. Lǝmā dǝbart yāt gabrā?
7. Lā nǝṭálit bǝ-ṣaprā. 20. ʔǝbádat ʔarʕā.
8. ʕǝráqit lǝ-nahrā. 21. Bǝ-ṣaprā ʕǝbáru ʕammā bǝ-ʔarʕā.
9. Lǝmā lā nǝpaqtin miq-qartā? 22. Bǝ-ramšā ʕǝbárnā yāt nahrā.
10. Lā ʔǝbádit tammān. 23. Pǝláḥnā yāt malkǝtā.
11. ʕǝbárnā yāt ʔarʕā. 24. Lā dǝbáru yāt ʔittətā.
12. Dǝbárit yāt ʔittǝtā. 25. Qǝṭálnā yāt malkā.
13. Lǝmā qǝṭalt yāt malkǝtā?

B. These sentences are the same as those in exercise A. Point sentences 16–25.
ak;lm' ty: wjul'p] 14 ar;px'b] tyqip'n}
1
am;g:typi ty: tybit'k] 15 ˜m;t'mi an:qr'[]
2
arhn ty ˜wtrb[ aml 16 ar;hn"b] wdub'a]
3
amgtp ty atta tbtk 17 tqr'[] al; am;l]
4
arbg ty aklm rbd 18 aç;mr'b] an:lf'n}
5
arbg ty trbd aml 19 ar;wful] ˜wtulz"a] am;l]
6
a[ra tdba 20 ar;px'b] tylif'n} al;
7
a[rab am[ wrb[ arpxb 21 ar;hn"l] tyqir'[]
8
arhn ty anrb[ açmrb 22 at;rq'ymi ˜ytiqp'n} al; am;l]
9
atklm ty anjlp 23 ˜m;t' tydib'a] al;
10
attya ty wrbd al 24 a[;ra' ty: an:rb'[]
11
aklm ty anlfq 25 at;t]yai ty" tyrib'd]
12
at;k]lm' ty: tlf'q] am;l] 13
 LESSON THREE

3.1 ty: yāt with Pronominal Suffixes

Pronominal direct objects may be expressed by attaching pronominal suffixes to the

particle yāt: e.g., hytey: tylif'q] Qǝṭálit yāteh. I killed him. The full inflection is as follows:
ytiy: yāti me an:t'y: yātánā us
˚t;y: yātāk you (ms) ˜wkot]y: yātǝkon you (mp)
˚ytiy: yātik you (fs) ˜yket]y: yātǝken you (fp)
hytey: yāteh him, it (m) ˜whoty] : yātǝhon them (m)
ht'y: yātah her, it (f) ˜yhet]y: yātǝhen them (f)
It is not uncommon for yāt with a pronominal suffix to come between the verb and its
subject: compare ad;b[' ty: ak;lm' rb'd] Dǝbar malkā yāt ʕabdā The king took the servant
along, but ak;lm' hytey: rb'd] Dǝbar yāteh malkā The king took him along.

3.2 The Conjunction w] wǝ-: Combinatory Rules

The conjunction w} wǝ- (and) assumes various forms depending on the initial segment of
the following word:
(a) before a guttural + ǝ: the form is usually wa-, as in rb'[]w" wa-ʕǝbar and he
crossed; the ǝ is sometimes lost ˜yrim;jw" wa-ḥmārin ‘and male donkeys’; occasion-
ally one finds u- (see d, below) rather than wa- before a guttural, as in ˜yrim;jwU u-
ḥmārin;
(b) before yǝ-: the sequence wǝyǝ- contracts to wi-, as in [d'y} yǝdaʕ he knew, but [d'ywI
w-idaʕ (< *wǝ-yǝdaʕ) and he knew;
(c) before any labial consonant (b, m, p): the form is u-, as in ak;lm'wU u-malkā and the
king;
(d) before any consonant, other than a guttural or y, plus ǝ: the form is u-, and the ǝ
is omitted, as in qp'n} nǝp̄ aq, but qp'nwU u-np̄ aq and he went forth.
(e) otherwise: the form is w] wǝ-.

Vocabulary 3
Verbs:
bh'y} yǝhab to give; to place, set.
tj'n} nǝḥat (also tyjen} nǝḥet; see §5.1) to come/go down, descend.
lp'n} nǝpal to fall.
sr'p] pǝras to pitch (a tent).
Nouns:
at;ybe betā (masc.) house.
8 LESSON THREE

am;jl' laḥmā bread, food.

ay:m' mayyā (pl.) water.
ar;ç]yme mešǝrā plain, valley.
an:k]çm' maškǝnā tent, habitation.
Other:
tw:l] lǝwāt (prep.) to, unto, into the presence of (a person); tw:l]mi mil-lǝwāt from
the presence of.
d[' ʕad (prep.) up to, as far as, until.
l[' ʕal (prep.) on, down onto; against; about, concerning, in regard to; l['me
me-ʕal from upon.

Exercises
A.
1. Yǝhábit yāteh lǝ-gubrā. 2. Qǝṭálu yātǝhon bǝ-betā. 3. ʕǝbárnā yāteh bǝ-ṣaprā. 4. Dǝbar
yātánā lǝwāt malkā. 5. ʕǝráqit mil-lǝwāt malkā. 6. Nǝḥátu miṭ-ṭurā lǝ-mešǝrā. 7. Pǝrásit
yāt maškǝnā tammān. 8. Nǝpálat wa-ʔǝbádat. 9. Nǝṭal bǝ-ṣaprā wa-ʔǝzal ʕad nahrā. 10.
Lǝmā lā yǝhabt yāt laḥmā lǝ-ʔittǝtā? 11. Nǝṭal yāt kaspā w-ihab yāteh lǝ-gabrā. 12.
Yǝhábnā yāt qinyānā lǝ-ʕammā. 13. Nǝḥátnā lǝ-nahrā u-prasnā yāt maškǝnā tammān. 14.
Nǝpal betā ʕal malkǝtā wa-ʔǝbádat. 15. Nǝpálit bǝ-mayyā. 16. Lǝmā lā yǝhabtin yāt
mayyā lǝ-ʔittǝtā? 17. ʕǝbárnā bǝ-ʔarʕā ʕad qartā. 18. ʕǝráqat mib-betā wa-ʔǝzálat lǝ-
nahrā. 19. Nǝḥátu miṭ-ṭurā ʕad mešǝrā u-prásu yāt maškǝnā tammān.

ar;bg"l] hytey" bh'ywi ap;sk' ty: lf'n} 11 ar;bwgUl] hytey: tybih'y} 1

am;['l] an:y:nqi ty: an:bh'y} 12 at;ybeb] ˜whot]y: wluf'q] 2
˜m;t' an:k]çm' ty: an:sr'pwu ar;hn"l] an:tj'n} 13 ar;px'b] hytey: an:rb'[] 3
td'b'a]w" at;k]lm' l[' at;ybe lp'n} 14 ak;lm' tw:l] an:t'y: rb'd] 4
ay:m'b] tylip'n} 15 ak;lm' tw:l]mi tyqir'[] 5
at;t]yail] ay:m' ty: ˜ytibh'y] al; am;l] 16 ar;ç]ymel] ar'wfumi wtujn' } 6
at;rq' d[' a[;ra'b] an:rb'[] 17 ˜m;t' an:k]çm' ty: tysir'p] 7
ar;hn"l] tl'z"a]w" at;ybemi tq'r'[] 18 td'b'a]w" tl'pn' } 8
˜m;t' an:k]çm' ty: wsur'pwu ar;ç]yme d[' ar;wfumi wtuj'n} 19 ar;hn" d[' lz"a]w" ar;px'b] lf'n} 9
at;t]yail] am;jl' ty: tbh'y} al; am;l] 10

B. Point and translate.

a[ra l[ aklm lpn 1

arbwgl aym ty anbhy al 2
atta twlm tqr[ aml 3
aklml hty bhyw attya ty rbd 4
˜mt wdbaw arçyml wqr[ 5
˜yhty wlfq al 6
 LESSON FOUR

4.1 Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes

The pronominal object of most prepositions is expressed by the same set of pronominal
suffixes given in Lesson 3 with yāt; thus,
bǝ-: ybi b-i an:b' b-ánā lǝ-: yli l-i an:l' l-ánā
˚b; b-āk ˜wkob] b-ǝkon ˚l; l-āk ˜wkol] l-ǝkon
˚ybi b-ik ˜ykeb] b-ǝken ˚yli l-ik ˜ykel] l-ǝken
hybe b-eh ˜whob] b-ǝhon hyle l-eh ˜whol] l-ǝhon
hb' b-ah ˜yheb] b-ǝhen hl' l-ah ˜yhel] l-ǝhen
similarly tw:l] lǝwāt ‘unto’: ytiw:l] lǝwāti, ˚t;w:l] lǝwātāk, ... ˜wkot]w:l] lǝwātǝkon, etc.

The preposition ˜mi min doubles the -n- before suffixes; the doubling may be lost before
the 2 and 3 plural suffixes:
ynimi minn-i (also an"mi minn-a) an:n"mi minn-ánā
˚n:mi minn-āk ˜wkon}mi minn-ǝkon or ˜wkonmi min-kon
˚ynimi minn-ik ˜yken}mi minn-ǝken ˜ykenmi min-ken
hynEmi minn-eh ˜whon}mi minn-ǝhon ˜whonmi min-hon
hn"mi minn-ah ˜yhen}mi minn-ǝhen ˜yhenmi min-hen
similarly µ[i ʕim with: ymi[i ʕimm-i, ˚m;[i ʕimm-āk, ˚ymi[i ʕimm-ik, etc. (with -mm-; here too
the doubling may be lost before the 2 and 3 pl. suffixes: e.g., 2mp ˜wkom][i
ʕimm-ǝkon or ˜wkom[i ʕim-kon);
wgob] bǝ-go within: the base is wg"b] bǝ-gaww- before suffixes: ywig"b] bǝ-gaww-i, ˚w:g"b]
bǝ-gaww-āk, ˚ywig"b] bǝ-gaww-ik, ..., ˜wkow}g"b] bǝ-gaww-ǝkon, etc.
For l[' ʕal with pronominal suffixes, see §7.2; l[' ʕad does not take pronominal suffixes.

4.2 The Prepositions b] bǝ-, l] lǝ-, and k] kǝ-: Combinatory Rules

The prepositions b] bǝ-, l] lǝ-, and k] kǝ- (like, as) take the following forms before nouns:
(a) before a guttural with ǝ: ba-, la-, ka-: at;j;a]l' la-ʔǝḥātā to the sister; the ǝ is
sometimes omitted: ar;m;j] ḥǝmārā male donkey, but ar;m;jk' ka-ḥmārā like a
male donkey;
(b) before yǝ-: *bǝ-yǝ-, *lǝ-yǝ-, and *kǝ-yǝ- contract to b-i-, l-i-, k-i-: ad;y} yǝdā
hand, but *bǝ-yǝdā > ad;ybi b-idā in hand;
(c) before any other consonant with ǝ: bi-, li-, ki-, with omission of ǝ in the
first syllable of the noun (i.e., bǝ-Cǝ > bi-C): ay:bin} nǝbiyā prophet, but ay:binli
li-nbiyā [li-nviyā] to a prophet;
(d) otherwise, with ǝ: a[;ra'b] bǝ-ʔarʕā ‘in the land’; ay:m'k] kǝ-mayyā like water.
10 LESSON FOUR

4.3 Relative Clauses

The relative pronoun d] dǝ- is uninflected for gender or number. In form it follows the
same combinatory rules as bǝ, lǝ-, kǝ-, above.
qp'ndi ak;lm' malkā di-npaq the king who went forth
lz"a]d' ar;bg" gabrā da-ʔǝzal the man who went
tl'z"a]d' at;t]yai ʔittǝtā da-ʔǝzálat the woman who went
Prepositional relationships, such as ‘in which’, ‘from which’, must be expressed by
resumptive pronouns within the relative clause:
the man to whom I gave the money → the man who I gave to him the money
ap;sk' ty: hyle tybih'ydi ar;bg" gabrā d-ihábit leh yāt kaspā
the city from which I went forth → the city which I went forth from it
hn"mi tyqip'ndi at;rq' qartā di-npáqit minnah
Direct object resumption is optional and uncommon:
(hytey): wluf'qydi ar;bg" gabrā di-qṭálu (yāteh) the man whom they killed

Vocabulary 4
Verbs:
lk'a] ʔǝkal to eat.
rz"g} gǝzar to cut; to circumcize; gǝzar qǝyām ʕim to make a covenant with.
rs'm] mǝsar to hand over (to, into the hand of: bǝ-yad, lǝ-, or qǝdām).
rf'n} nǝṭar to guard, preserve, keep, observe.
πd'r] rǝdap to pursue (obj. with bātar).
fh'r] rǝhaṭ (also fyher] rǝheṭ; see lesson 5) to run.
qb'ç] šǝbaq to leave, abandon, forsake; with lǝ-: to forgive.

Nouns:
al;k]yhe hekǝlā palace, temple.
am;ylew[u ʕulemā boy, lad; servant, attendant.
at;m]ylew[u ʕulemǝtā girl, maiden.
am;y:q] qǝyāmā or am;y:qi qiyāmā treaty, covenant; gǝzar qǝyām ʕim to make a
covenant with.

Other:
wgob] bǝ-go (with suffix ywIg"b] bǝ-gawwi, etc.; prep.) in, within, in the midst of; wgomi
mig-go (with suffix ywIg"mi mig-gawwi, etc.; prep.) from within, from the
midst of.
dy'b] bǝ-yad (prep.) into the hand/power of.
rt'b; bātar (prep.) after, behind (both spatial and temporal meanings); pronomi-
nal suffixes with bātar are given in §7.2.
k] kǝ- (prep.) like, as, according to; kǝ- does not take pronominal suffixes.
 LESSON FOUR 11

µ[i ʕim (with suffix ymi[i ʕimmi, etc.) with, together with.
µd;q] qǝdām (prep.) before, in the presence of; min qǝdām from before, from the
presence of; pronominal suffixes with qǝdām are given in §7.2.

Exercises
A.
1. qartā da-ʔǝbádu bǝ-gawwah 2. gabrā d-ihábit leh yāt qinyānā 3. ʔittǝtā di-ktábat yāt
pitgāmā 4. ʕulemā di-npal ʕal ʔarʕā 5. hekǝlā da-ʕǝráqnā minneh 6. laḥmā d-ihabtin li
7. mayyā di-nṭartun lánā 8. gubrā di-rháṭit lǝwāteh 9. qǝyāmā di-gzárnā ʕimmǝkon
10. ʔittǝtā d-ihábtā lah yāt kaspā
l[' lp'ndi am;ylew[u 4 am;g:tpi ty: tb't'kdi at;t]yai 3 an:y:nqi ty: hyle tybih'ydi ar;bg" 2 hw"g"b] wdub'a]d' at;rq' 1
hytew:l] tyfih'rdi ar;bwgu 8 an:l' ˜wturf'ndi ay:m' 7 yli ˜ytibh'ydi am;jl' 6 hyneymi an:qr'[]d' al;k]yhe 5 a[;ra'
ap;sk' ty: hl' at;bh'ydi at;t]yai 10 ˜wkom][i an:rz"gdi am;y:q] 9

B. Vocalize and translate:

arpxb wrb[d arçym 4 ˜mt ansrpd ankçm 3 hynm wtjnd arwf 2 aklm µdq jlpd amylw[ 1
hb wrb[d a[ra 5
C.
1. Yǝhábit lik yāt qinyānā. 2. Gǝzar qǝyām ʕimmánā. 3. Rǝdap bātar gabrā u-qṭal yāteh.
4. ʔǝzálā lǝ-hekǝlā u-šbáqā yāt ʕulemā tammān. 5. Rǝháṭnā lǝwāteh. 6. ʔǝkálu yāt laḥmā
wǝ-lā yǝhábu lánā minneh. 7. Mǝsáru yāt ʕulemā bǝ-yad malkā. 8. Nǝpaq ʕim gabrā, u-
nṭálu ʕad ṭurā. 9. Lā mǝsárnā yāt qartā bǝ-yad malkā. 10. Nǝṭárit yāt qinyānā d-ihab li.

ty: aq;b'çwu al;k]yhel] al;z"a] 4 hytey: lf'qwu ar;bg" rt'b; πd'r] 3 an:m'[i µy:q] rz"g} 2 an:y:nqi ty: ˚yli tybih'y} 1
ak;lm' dy"b] am;ylew[u ty: wrus'm] 7 hyneymi an:l' wbuhy' } al;w] am;jl' ty: wluk'a] 6 hytew:l] an:fh'r] 5 ˜m;t' am;ylew[u
yli bh'ydi an:y:nyqi ty: tyrifn' } 10 ak;lm' dy'b] at;rq' ty: an:rs'm] al; 9 ar;wfu d[' wluf'nwu ar;bg" µ[i qp'n} 8

D. Vocalize and translate:

atmylw[ tqr[ 4 am[l tqbç al am l[ 3 amylw rtb ˜wtpdr al aml 2 atrq wgb ˜whty wlfq 1
˜ykl tybtkd amgtp ty ˜ytrfn al 5 ytwl tfhrw atybm
 LESSON FIVE

5.1 G Perfects in e and o

Many G Perfects have the pattern qǝtel rather than qǝtal. These include most stative
verbs, i.e, verbs expressing the possession of, or attainment of, a characteristic, such as
tǝqep (to grow strong), dǝḥel (to be afraid), as well as other intransitive action verbs, such
as sǝleq (to go up) and qǝreb (to draw near). There are also a few transitive active verbs
in this group, e.g., rǝḥem (to love). Their inflection is as follows:
3ms qyles] sǝleq 3mp wquylis] sǝlíqu
3fs tq'yles] sǝléqat 3fp aq;ylis] sǝlíqā
2ms tqyles] sǝleqt 2mp ˜wtuqyles] sǝleqtun
(or at;qyles] sǝléqtā)
2fs tqyles] sǝleqt 2fp ˜ytiqyles] sǝleqtin
1cs tyqiyles] sǝléqit 1cp an:qyles] sǝléqnā
Note especially the change of the stem vowel from e to i in the 3rd person plural.
Some verbs occur with both patterns; e.g.,
bysen}÷bs'n} nǝsab/nǝseb to take;
fyher]÷fh'r] rǝhaṭ/rǝheṭ to run;
tyjen}÷tj'n} nǝḥat/nǝḥet to go down.
A third, and extremely rare, type of G Perfect has the pattern qǝtol; e.g.,
˚wmod] dǝmok to fall asleep;
bwgOn} nǝgob to subside, abate.
Not all forms of these are attested, but they appear to have had a change of o → u in the
3rd plural, corresponding to e → i above. Thus, ˚wmod] dǝmok, tk'wmod] dǝmókat, etc.; pl. wkuwmud]
dǝmúku, ak;wmud] dǝmúkā, etc.

Vocabulary 5
Verbs:
lyjed] dǝḥel to be afraid, fear (object usually with min or min qǝdām).
bytey} yǝteb to sit, dwell, remain, settle.
bs'n}÷bysen} nǝseb/nǝsab to take (the most general verb of ‘taking’; includes all the mean-
ings noted for dǝbar as well).
dygEs] sǝged to bow down.
qyles] sǝleq to go up, ascend (intrans.).
byreq] qǝreb to approach, draw near (to: lǝ-, lǝwāt); to be on the point of (+ infini-
tive); qǝreb bǝ- to come into contact with, touch.
πyqet] tǝqep to grow strong, be strong; to be severe; to become rich, wealthy; tǝqep
 LESSON FIVE 13

lǝ-N N became angry (e.g., ak;lm'l] πyqet] tǝqep lǝ-malkā the king became
angry; yli πyqet] tǝqep li I became angry).

Nouns:
am;wrod; dāromā the south; mid-dāromā lǝ- on the south of.
an:pk' kapnā famine, hunger.
ar;b]dm' madbǝrā desert, steppe, wilderness.
aj;n}dm' madnǝḥā (also aj;ndim' madinḥā) the east; lǝ-madnǝḥā east(ward); mim-
madnǝḥā on the east; mim-madnaḥ (or madnǝḥā) lǝ- on/to the east of.
ab;r][m' maʕrǝbā (also ab;r['m' maʕarbā) the west; mim-maʕrǝbā on the west.
µyIr'xmi Miṣráyim Egypt.
an:wpuyxi ṣippunā the north.

Note also the idioms: whuma'l/] wtuyail] hyle N ty: rb'd/] bysen} nǝseb/dǝbar yāt N leh lǝ-ʔittu/lǝ-
ʔamhu He took N as his wife/maidservant. wtuyai ʔittu and whuma' ʔamhu are abstract nouns
(wifehood, servanthood), little used outside this idiom.

Exercises
A.
1. ʔǝzálu lǝ-madnǝḥā. 2. Yǝtíbu mim-madnaḥ lǝ-qartā. 3. Qǝreb lǝ-qartā. 4. Qǝrébnā lǝ-
nahrā. 5. Sǝgédit qǝdām malkā. 6. Nǝsébit yātah li lǝ-ʔittu. 7. Dǝbar yāt ʕulemā u-nṭal
ʕimmeh lǝ-ṣippunā. 8. Qǝríbu lǝ-ʔarʕā miṣ-ṣippunā. 9. Yǝtébnā mid-dāromā lǝ-ṭurā.
10. Lā sǝléqit lǝ-ṭurā. 11. Lǝmā nǝsebt yāt ʕulemǝtā lǝ-hekǝlā? 12. ʔǝzálu lǝ-mešǝrā w-
itíbu bǝ-gawweh. 13. Tǝqep leh u-qṭal yāt gabrā. 14. Tǝqep kapnā bǝ-ʔarʕā. 15. Dǝḥélat
min qǝdām malkā wa-ʕǝráqat mil-lǝwāteh.

ak;lm' µd;q] tydiyges] 5 ar;hn"l] an:byreq] 4 at;rq'l] byreq] 3 at;rq'l] jn"dm'mi wbuytiy} 2 aj;n}dm'l] wluz"a] 1
an:bytey} 9 an:wpuyximi a[;ra'l] wbuyriq] 8 an:wpuyxil] hyme[i lf'nwu am;ylew[u ty: rb'd] 7 wtuyail] yli ht'y: tybiysen} 6
wbuytiywi ar;ç]ymel] wluz"a] 12 al;k]yhel] at;m]ylew[u ty: tbysen} am;l] 11 ar;wful] tyqiyles] al; 10 ar;wful] am;wrod;mi
hytew:l]mi tq'r'[]w" ak;lm' µd;q] ˜mi tl'yjed] 15 a[;ra'b] an:pk' πyqet] 14 ar;bg' ty: lf'qwu hyle πyqet] 13 hyweg"b]

B. Vocalize and translate:

al 4 µyrxml am[ wtjnw anpk πyqt 3 arpx d[ ˜mt bytyw arwfl qyls 2 annm ˜wtlyjd aml 1
amylw[ ty wbysn 7 ajndml aklm rtb wpdr 6 arbdm d[ abr[ml alfn 5 atklm µdq wdygs
tybyrq al 10 anynqb arbwg πyqt 9 ˜wkm[ anrzgd amyq ty ˜wtrfn al 8 aklm dyb hyty wrsmw
bysn 14 arbdmb wbyty al 13 tydygsw hytwl tybyrq 12 atrq ty wqbçw annm wlyjd 11 amjlb
wtyal ˜whl ˜yhty wbysn 15 whmal hyl attya ty
 LESSON SIX

6.1 The Singular Noun with Pronominal Suffixes

The pronominal suffixes given in §3.1 are attached directly to a noun to indicate pronom-
inal possession. The stem to which they are attached may be obtained by dropping the
final aA; -ā of the lexical form. Thus, from ak;lm' malkā:
ykilm' malk-i my king an:k'lm' malk-ánā our king
˚k;lm' malk-āk your (ms) king ˜wkok]lm' malk-ǝkon your (mp) king
˚ykilm' malk-ik your (fs) king ˜ykek]lm' malk-ǝken your (fs) king
hykelm' malk-eh his king ˜whok]lm' malk-ǝhon their (m) king
hk'lm' malk-ah her king ˜yhek]lm' malk-ǝhen their (f) king
There are a few formal complications involved before the suffixes -kon-, -ken, -hon, and
-hen:
(a) Stems ending in -CC- or -vC- (where v is not ǝ) insert ǝ before these suffixes:
e.g., ˜wkok]lm' malk-ǝkon, ˜wkot]ybe bet-ǝkon, etc.
(b) Nouns whose stems end in -ǝC-, e.g., hekǝl-, must restore a full vowel in the
final stem syllable before these suffixes. The vowel restored is a in an over-
whelming number of nouns: ˜wkolk'yhe hekal-kon, hekal-ken, hekal-hon, hekal-hen.
(c) All feminine nouns ending in -ǝtā fall under the preceding rule:
ytik]lm' malkǝt-i, ˚t;k]lm' malkǝt-āk, ..., but ˜wkotk'lm' malkat-kon, etc.
The vowel here is invariably a.
(d) Exceptions to the preceding rules are relatively rare and will be dealt with indiv-
idually in the following lessons.

Note the translation of ‘whose’ in relative clauses:

the man whose money I took → the man who I took his money
hypesk' ty: tybiysendi ar;bg" gabrā di-nsébit yāt kaspeh

Vocabulary 6
Verb:
µyjer] rǝḥem to love.
Nouns:
at;ma' ʔamtā female servant, slave.
an:t;a/] an:t;a' ʔattānā/ʔǝtānā female donkey.
ar;y[ib] bǝʕirā cattle.
al;[b' baʕlā husband.
 LESSON SIX 15

ar;b] bǝrā son.

at;r'b] bǝrattā daughter.
at;n}ygiginnǝtā garden.
al;mg' gamlā camel.
ar;m;j] ḥǝmārā male donkey.
al;qj' ḥaqlā field.
ab;rj' ḥarbā (f.) sword.
ad;b[' ʕabdā male servant, slave; attendant.
an:[; ʕānā (f.; sometimes construed as f.pl.) flock(s) (sheep and goats).
az:gwru rugzā anger, wrath; Ab hyzEgwru πyqet] tǝqep rugzeh bǝ- he became angry at/
with.
ar;wto torā bull, ox.
at;r]wto torǝtā cow.

Exercises
A.
1. ḥǝmārik 2. ḥarbánā 3. hekalkon 4. gamlǝhon 5. ḥaqleh 6. ʕānǝhon 7. ʕulemǝtik
8. bǝʕirǝkon 9. pitgāmāk 10. ʔǝtāneh
hynEt;a] 10 ˚m;g:tpi 9 ˜wkor]y[ib] 8 ˚ytim]ylew[u 7 ˜whon}[; 6 hyleqj' 5 ˜whol]mg' 4 ˜wkolk'yhe 3 an:b'rj' 2 ˚yrim;j] 1
B.
˜wkdb[ 10 ylqj 9 ˜yktnyg 8 anry[b 7 ˚ytma 6 ˚n[ 5 ynta 4 hylmg 3 ytta 2 ˚db[ 1

C.
1. Dǝḥélat min qǝdām baʕlah. 2. Sǝléqnā miq-qartǝhon. 3. Lā sǝgídu qǝdām malkánā. 4.
Qǝríbā lǝ-beti bǝ-ramšā. 5. Tǝqep rugzeh bi-breh. 6. Yǝtíbu mim-madnaḥ lǝ-ʔarʕánā. 7.
Lā nǝsébit yāt laḥmik. 8. Rǝháṭat bǝrattah lǝwātah. 9. Lǝmā lā nǝṭártā yāt qǝyāmi? 10.
ʕal mā nǝsebt yāt ʕulemā ʕimmāk? 11. ʕǝráqu mil-lǝwāt malkathon. 12. ʔǝbad ʕammi
tammān. 13. Dǝbárit yāt bǝri ʕimmi u-npáqit mib-beti. 14. Nǝseb yāt ḥarbi minni. 15.
Mǝsar yāt qinyāneh bǝ-yad ʕabdeh.
aç;mr'b] ytiybel] ab;yriq] 4 an:k'lm' µd;q] wduygis] al; 3 ˜whot]rq'mi an:qyles] 2 hl'[b' µd;q] ˜mi tl'yjed] 1
am;l] 9 ht'w:l] ht'r'b] tf'h'r] 8 ˚ymijl' ty: tybiysen} al; 7 an:['ra'l] jn'dm'mi wbuytiy] 6 hyrebbi hyzegwru πyqet] 5
˜m;t' ymi[' db'a] 12 ˜whotk'lm' tw:l]mi wqur'[] 11 ˚m;[i am;ylew[u ty: tbysen} am; l[' 10 ymiy:q] ty: at;rf'n} al;
hydeb[' dy'b] hyney:nqi ty: rs'm] 15 yniymi ybirj' ty: bysen} 14 ytiybemi tyqip'nwu ymi[i yrib] ty: tyrib'd] 13

D.
ty ˜wtbysn aml 4 açmrb ˜whtnygb tybyty 3 anm[ ty wlfqw an[ra ty wrb[ 2 ˚l πyqt aml 1
alw hyrmj l[ byty 7 htwlm htma tqr[ 6 htrb tyw hrb ty atta tmyjr 5 ytrwt tyw yrwt
byrq 11 ary[bbw an[b πyqt 10 atnygl jndmm attyaw arbg wbyty 9 ˜wklqjl ˜wklmg lza 8 tjn
a[ra l[ hybrj tlpn 14 hytta ty µyjr al 13 wtyal hyl atma ty rbd 12 dygsw hymylw[ µ[
˜whry[bm wlka al 15
 LESSON SEVEN

7.1 The Demonstrative Pronouns

The demonstrative pronouns are:

this masc. ˜yde den fem. ad; dā
that masc. awhu huʔ fem. ayhi hiʔ
When used as the subjects of simple non-verbal predications, such as ‘This is our king’,
the order of the elements generally follows that of the Hebrew. Note that there is no
equivalent in Targumic of the English copula (‘is, are’):
ayhi an:t'k]lm' Malkǝtánā hiʔ. She is our queen. (or) That one is our queen.
When used attributively as demonstrative adjectives, a prefix hā- is required, and the
demonstrative must follow its noun:
˜ydeh; ak;lm' malkā hāden this king ad;h; at;k]lm' malkǝtā hādā this queen
awhuh; ak;lm' malkā hāhuʔ that king ayhih; at;kl] m' malkǝtā hāhiʔ that queen
This hā- is frequently omitted in the expression ˜yde am;wyo yomā den ‘this day, today’, and
occasionally in a few other expressions.

7.2 rt'b; Bātar and Other Prepositions with Pronominal Suffixes

Several prepositions have pronominal objects expressed by a series of pronominal suf-

fixes different from those given in §3.1; for example, rt'b; bātar:
yr't]b; bātǝr-ay after me an:r't]b; bātǝr-ánā after us
˚r;t]b; bātǝr-āk after you (ms) ˜wkoyret]b; bātǝr-ekon after you (mp)
˚r't]b; bātǝr-ak after you (fs) ˜ykeyret]b; bātǝr-eken after you (fp)
yhiwrot]b; bātǝr-óhi after him, it (m) ˜whoyret]b; bātǝr-ehon after them (m)
ah;r't]b; bātǝr-áhā after her, it (f) ˜yheyret]b; bātǝr-ehen after them (f)
The following prepositions are employed with these same suffixes:
µd;q] qǝdām: Amd;q] qǝdām- before, in the presence of;
twjot] tǝḥot: Atwjot] tǝḥot- under, beneath (but 3rd fem. sg. is ht'wjot] tǝḥot-ah);
˜ybe ben: Anybe ben- between (but 1st pers. sg. is an"ybe ben-a, sometimes ynIybe ben-i);
l[' ʕal: Al[] ʕǝl- on, upon (but 3rd fem. sg. is hl'[] ʕǝl-ah);
ywEl;y[i ʕillāwe: Awl;y[i ʕillāw- on, upon; a synonym of ʕal, used especially in the com-
pound ywEl;y[ime me-ʕillāwe (= me-ʕal) when pronominal suffixes are required.

Vocabulary 7
Verbs:
dj'a] ʔǝḥad to seize, grasp, lay hold of; to close (a door).
 LESSON SEVEN 17

rm'a] ʔǝmar to say.

[d'y} yǝdaʕ to know (yrea] ʔǝre: that).
tyrey} yǝret to inherit.
bx'n} nǝṣab to plant.
db'[] ʕǝbad to do, act; to make, fashion.
jt'p] pǝtaḥ to open.

Nouns:
an:l;yai ʔilānā tree.
aç;d' daššā door, doorleaf.
am;wyo yomā day.
ay:l]yle lelǝyā night.
a[;rt' tarʕā gate (of a city), doorway (of a house or tent).

Other:
yrea] ʔǝre (conj.) (the fact) that; when, since, because (corresponds to Hebrew yKi kî).
lko kol (also written lk; in imitation of Tiberian AlK;) preceding an emphatic singular
noun used definitely, lko means ‘all of, the whole of’, as in: ar;ç]yme lko kol
mešǝrā the whole plain, at;rq' lko kol qartā the whole city, a[;ra' lko kol ʔarʕā
the whole earth, all the land, hynEy:nyqi lko kol qinyāneh all of his property; with a
suffix, the base is kull-: hylewku kulleh ‘all of it (m)’.
am; mā what?
˜m' man who?

Exercises
A.
1. qǝdām malkā hāhuʔ 2. lǝwāt ʔittǝtā hāhiʔ 3. bǝ-ginnǝtā hādā 4. ʕad nahrā hāhuʔ 5.
min qǝdām malkā hāden 6. bǝ-kol ʔarʕā hāhiʔ 7. Dā qartánā. 8. Huʔ bǝri. 9. Hiʔ bǝrattik.
10. Baʕli huʔ. 11. Ginnǝtánā dā.

˜ydeh; ak;lm' µd;q] ˜mi 5 awhuh; ar;hn" d[' 4 ad;h; at;n}ygib] 3 ayhih; at;t]ai tw;l] 2 awhuh; ak;lm' µd;q] 1
ad; an:tn' }gi 11 awhu yli[b' 10 ˚ytir'b] ayhi 9 yrib] awhu 8 an:tr' q' ad; 7 ayhih; a[;ra' lkob] 6

B.
lk 5 ˜ydh arçym wgb 4 ayhh atmylw[ µ[ 3 awhh arwfl jndmm 2 adh atrql amwrdm 1
htma ayh 11 ynta ad 10 hymgtp ˜yd 9 awhh amwy lk 8 arbdm lk 7 ˜whlqj lk 6 atrq
awh hymylw[ 13 ayh ˚ttya 12

C.
1. Rǝhaṭ lǝ-daššā u-ptaḥ yāteh. 2. Rǝdap bātǝrehon ʕad ṭurā. 3. Mā ʕǝbadt tammān bǝ-
yomā hāhu? 4. Yǝrétit yāt kol qinyānā hāden. 5. Lā yǝdáʕit ʔǝre ʕǝráqat ʔittǝti. 6. ʔǝḥad
18 LESSON SEVEN

yāt ḥarbā u-qṭal yāteh bah. 7. Nǝṣabnā yāt ʔilānā bǝgo ginnǝtánā. 8. Man ʕǝbad yāt
pitgāmā hāden? 9. Yǝteb bǝ-tarʕā wǝ-lā nǝpaq. 10. Nǝpáqit wa-ʔǝḥádit yāt daššā bātǝray.
11. Den qǝyāmi di-gzárit ʕimkon. 12. Yǝhábit lǝkon yāt kol ʔarʕā hādā. 13. Mā ʔǝmartun
lǝ-ʕabdeh?

lko ty: tytiyrey} 4 awhuh; am;wyob] ˜m;t' tdb'[] am; 3 ar;wfu d[' ˜whoyret]b; πd'r] 2 hytey: jt'pwu aç;d'l] fh'r] 1
wgob] an:l;yai ty: an:bx'n} 7 hb' hytey: lf'qwu ab;rj' ty: dj'a] 6 ytit]ai tq'r'[] yrea] ty[idy' } al; 5 ˜ydeh; an:y:nqi
˜yde 11 yr't]b; aç;d' ty: tydij'a]w" tyqipn' } 10 qp'n} al;w} a[;rt'b] bytey} 9 ˜ydeh; am;g:tpi ty: db'[] ˜m' 8 an:tn' }gI
hydeb['l] ˜wturm'a] am; 13 ad;h; a[;ra' lko ty: ˜wkol] tybih'y} 12 ˜wkom[i tyriz"gdi ymiy:q]

D.
ty tbhy ˜ml 4 wqr[w ylmg ty wdja 3 atrqm wqpnw a[rt ty wjtp 2 ˜whklm dba yra w[dy 1
wdba 8 atngb atta tlka am 7 awhh amwyb tybxnd anlya ˜yd 6 aylylb antybl abyrq 5 atrwt
˜whyl[ atyb lpn 11 awhh alqj ty tyry 10 yl tdb[ am hyl tyrma 9 awhh aylylb am[ lk
˜whymdq anjlp 13 yhwmdq wdygs 12
 LESSON EIGHT

8.1 Noun Plurals

The plural of a noun in the emphatic state is as follows:

masc. sing. am;wyo yomā masc. pl. ay:m'wyo yomayyā
fem. sing. at;rw] to torǝtā fem. pl. at;r;wto torātā
For the vast majority of nouns, both masculine and feminine, the stem of the plural is the
same as that of the singular. There are, however, certain irregularities:
(a) Some nouns that have masculine form in the singular have plurals in -ātā, e.g.,
aç;pn" napšā soul, person, plural at;ç;pn" napšātā.
(b) Some feminine nouns have plurals in -ayyā, e.g., at;l]ymi millǝtā word, plural ay:l'ymi
millayyā.
(c) In nouns of the form C1vC2C3 in which C3 is a bgdkpt letter, that letter is spiran-
tized in the plural (from the earlier presence of a vowel before C3 in the plural):
malkā, but malkayyā; ʕabdā, but ʕabdayyā. Similarly feminines of the form
C1vC2C3ǝtā: malkǝtā, malkātā. (This spirantization is of course not indicated in
the Babylonian pointing: ak;lm', ay:k'lm'; cf. Tiberian aK;l]m,' aY:k'l]m.' )
(c) Some very frequent nouns have other irregularities in the formation of their
plurals, e.g..
ar;b] bǝrā son, plural ay:n"b] bǝnayyā
at;rq' qartā city, plural ay:w"rqi qirwayyā.
Listed below are all nouns occurring thus far whose plural forms are attested:
(1) No irregularities (apart from spirantization of C3 = bgdkpt):
singular plural singular plural singular plural
ʔilānā ʔilānayyā ḥaqlā ḥaqlayyā ʕabdā ʕabdayyā
gabrā gabrayyā ṭurā ṭurayyā ʕulemā ʕulemayyā
gubrā gubrayyā yomā yomayyā ʕulemǝtā ʕulemātā
gamlā gamlayyā malkā malkayyā pitgāmā pitgāmayyā
daššā daššayyā mešǝrā mešǝrayyā torā torayyā
ḥǝmārā ḥǝmārayyā maškǝnā maškǝnayyā torǝtā torātā
(2) With irregularities:
singular plural singular plural
ʔamtā at;h;ma' ʔamhātā betā ay:t'b; bāttayyā
ʔittǝtā ay:ç'n} nǝšayyā ʕammā ay:m'm][' ʕamǝmayyā
bǝrā ay:n"b] bǝnayyā qartā ay:w"rqi qirwayyā
bǝrattā at;n:b] bǝnātā
Attested plurals will be included in the lesson vocabularies from now on.
20 LESSON EIGHT

8.2 Plural Nouns with Pronominal Suffixes

Possessive suffixes are attached to plural nouns as follows:
(a) Plurals in -ātā drop the final -ā and add the same suffixes used with a singular
noun (§6.1): e.g., ytin:b] bǝnāti my daughters:
ytin:b] bǝnāt-i an:t'n:b] bǝnāt-ánā
˚t;n:b] bǝnāt-āk ˜wkot]n:b] bǝnāt-ǝkon
˚ytin:b] bǝnāt-ik ˜yket]n:b] bǝnāt-ǝken
hyten:b] bǝnāt-eh ˜whot]n:b] bǝnāt-ǝhon
ht'n:b] bǝnāt-ah ˜yhet]n:b bǝnāt-ǝhen
Occasionally, plurals in -ātā add suffixes as in (b), especially 1cs, 3ms, and 3fs:
yt'n:b] bǝnāt-ay, yhiwton:b] bǝnāt-óhi, ah;t'n:b] bǝnāt-áhā.
(b) Plurals in -ayyā drop the -ayyā and add the suffixes in the forms given for bātar
in §7.2: e.g., yn"b] bǝn-ay my sons:
yn"b] bǝn-ay an:n"b] bǝn-ánā
˚n:b] bǝn-āk ˜wkoyneb] bǝn-ekon
ykin"b]÷˚n"b] bǝn-ak/bǝn-áki ˜ykeyneb] bǝn-eken
yhiwnob] bǝn-óhi ˜whoyneb] bǝn-ehon
ah;n"b] bǝn-áhā ˜yheyneb] bǝn-ehen
Note that some nouns will appear the same in the singular and the plural with
the suffixes of the 2ms and 1cp: ˚m;g:typi pitgāmāk your (ms) word, your (ms)
words; an:l'qj' ḥaqlánā our field, our fields. Note also that the 2ms suffix has ˚A;
-āk with ā while the 2fs suffix has ˚A' -ak (or ykiA' -áki) with a.

8.3 The Plural Demonstratives

The plural forms of the demonstatives are:
these c. ˜yleyai ʔillen attributive: ˜yleyaih; hāʔillen
those m. ˜wnuyai ʔinnun ˜wnuyaih; hāʔinnun
f. ˜yniyai ʔinnin ˜yniyaih; hāʔinnin

Vocabulary 8
Verbs:
˜b'z} zǝban to buy, purchase.
çypen} nǝpeš to become numerous, widespread.
bykeç] šǝkeb to lie down.
jl'ç] šǝlaḥ to send, to send a message/messenger.
[m'ç] šǝmaʕ to hear.
Nouns:
ar;ta' ʔatrā (pl. -ayyā) place, site, location.
 LESSON EIGHT 21

ab;hd' dahbā gold.

an:m; mānā (also spelled an:am;; pl. -ayyā) vessel, utensil.
ay:bni } nǝbiyā (pl. -ayyā) prophet.
al;q; qālā (pl. -ayyā) voice, sound.

Other:
twjot] tǝḥot (prep.) under, beneath (with pl. suffixes; see §7.2).
˜a; ʔān (interrog. adv.) where?; ˜a;l] lǝ-ʔān whither?; ˜n:m] mǝnān whence?

Exercises
A.
1. tǝḥot ʔilānayyā hāʔinnun 2. mil-lǝwāt malkayyā hāʔinnun 3. ʕal ʕamǝmayyā hāʔillen
4. mim-maʕrǝbā lǝ-qirwayyā hāʔinnin 5. gamlayyā wa-ḥǝmārayyā

ay:l'mg" 5 ˜yniyaih; ay::w"rqil] ab;r][m'mi 4 ˜yleyaih; ay::m'm][' l[' 3 ˜wnuyaih; ay::k'lm' tw:lm] i 2 ˜wnuyaih; ay::n"l;yai twjot] 1
ay:r'm;j]w"

B.
aydb[ lkw athma lk µ[ 4 ˜ylyah ayrbg lk µy[ 3 ˜ynyah ayçn µdq ˜m 2 ˜ylyah ayrwfl jndmm 1
˜wnyah aymwyb 5

C.
1. Lā šǝmáʕnā yāt pitgāmehon. 2. Šǝkíbu tǝḥot ʔilānayyā bǝ-ʔatrā hāhuʔ. 3. Šǝlaḥ yāt
nǝbiyeh lǝ-kol qirwayyā u-l-kol ʕamǝmehen. 4. Zǝbánnā tammān yāt gamlayyā hāʔillen
bǝ-dahbā d-ihabt lánā. 5. U-npíšu ʕammā hāhuʔ bǝ-kol ʔarʕā hāhiʔ. 6. ʔǝbádu gubrayyā
di-šláḥit lǝ-ʔatrā hāhuʔ. 7. Mǝnān ʕǝráqā nǝšayyā hāʔillen? 8. ʔān zǝbantun yāt mānayyā
hāʔillen? 9. Man ʕǝbad yāt mānayyā hāʔinnun? 10. Lā yǝdáʕu ʔǝre šǝlaḥ malkǝhon yāt
ʕabdóhi lǝwāt nǝbiyā.

lkolwu ay:w"rqi lkol] hyyebin} ty: jl'ç] 3 awhuh; ar;ta'b] ay:n"l;yai twjot] wbuykiç] 2 ˜whoymeg:tpi ty: an:[m'ç] al; 1
ayhih; a[;ra' lkob] awhuh; am;[' wçuypinwu 5 an:l' tbh'ydi ab;hd'b] ˜yleyaih; ay:l'mg" ty: ˜m;t' an:b'z] 4 ˜yheymem]['
˜m' 9 ˜yleyaih; ay:n"am; ty: ˜wtunb'z] ˜a; 8 ˜yleyaih; ay:çn' } aq;r'[] ˜n:m] 7 awhuh; ar;ta'l] tyjil'çdi ay:r'bwgu wdub'a] 6
ay:bin} tw:l] yhiwdob[' ty: ˜whok]lm' jl'ç] yrea] w[ud;y] al; 10 ˜wnuyaih; ay:n"m; ty: db'[]

D.
˜wtjlç ˜al 4 ˜ydh artab aynlya ty bxn ˜m 3 ˜whyçd lk ty wjtp 2 anqr[w ˜whylq ty an[mç 1
twl fhrw hybrj ty dja 7 aylqj tyw aytb ty tytyry 6 wtal anl hytnb ty anbysn 5 abhd ty
awhh amwy lk tqpn alw htybb tbykç 10 ˚nbl trma am 9 ˜wkywrq lk adba am l[ 8 ayrbg
 LESSON NINE

9.l The Genitive (Construct) Chain

Possession or a genitive relationship is expressed in two principal ways: by simple

juxtaposition, as in ytiwmo µwyo yom moti the day of my death; or by the use of the preposition
d] dǝ-, as in ˜['n"kdi ak;lm' malkā di-Knáʕan the king of Canaan. We shall consider
juxtaposition first.
In the genitive construction N1 + N2 the first noun is in the construct state, or in
construct with the second noun. If the second noun is definite (cf. §2.2), so is the first. In
the vast majority of instances the construct is used with N2 semantically definite (i.e., in
the emphatic state, or with a pronominal suffix, or a proper noun); indefiniteness must be
made explicit by the use of the absolute form to be discussed in Lesson 16. In general, the
construct form of the singular noun is obtained by dropping the -ā of the emphatic form;
likewise for plurals in -ātā:
ak;lm' tybe bet malkā the house of the king
ak;lm' tn:b] bǝnāt malkā the daughters of the king.
Plurals in -ayyā replace -ayyā with -e:
ak;lm' yteb; bātte malkā the houses of the king
ak;lm' yneb] bǝne malkā the sons of the king
ak;lm' ymegt: pi pitgāme malkā the words of the king.
Some special problems arise in the formation of the construct singular of certain noun
types; these are taken up in §9.3, below.

9.2 Expression of the Genitive with d] dǝ-

The construct sequence is the normal way of expressing a genitive relationship when the
first member is a plural noun. When the first member is singular, however, there is a
curious mixing of construct usage and the employment of d] dǝ-. In terms of the texts
themselves, the situation may be described most simply as follows:
(a) There are some nouns whose construct forms are not used at all, or at most in a
lexically fixed expression; with these nouns, dǝ- is the only way to express a
genitive relationship. Examples include:
at;ma' ʔamtā, ak;lm' malkā, ad;b[' ʕabdā, at;rq' qartā, az:gwru rugzā.
(b) There are other nouns which almost exclusively favor the construct usage and
seldom, if ever, appear with dǝ-:
˜l;yai ʔilān, tt'yai ʔittat (at;t]yai ʔittǝtā), rb' bar (construct of ar;b] bǝrā), tb' bat (at;r'b]
bǝrattā), rb'g} gǝbar, lq'j] ḥǝqal, µwyo yom, yme me (ay:m' mayyā), µylew[u ʕulem, µg:typi
pitgām, µy:q] qǝyām, ˜y:nyqi qinyān, lq; qāl, [r't] tǝraʕ.
 LESSON NINE 23

(c) Most other nouns seem to range between these two extremes, being used either
with dǝ- or in the construct state with no clear difference in meaning.
The construct state is used in about two-thirds of the genitive constructions in Onqelos.
There are a few factors, however, that favor the use of dǝ-, namely, when the second
member of the construction is (a) a human being, as in aç;n:a]d' ab;li libbā da-ʔənāšā the
heart of humanity, bqo[]y"d] an:k]çm'b] bǝ-maškǝnā dǝ-Yaʕəqob in Jacob’s tent; (b) God,
including the divine name yy/ywy Y(w)y, as in ywyd' at;n}ygIk] kǝ-ginnǝtā da-Ywy like the garden
of the Lord; (c) a geographical location or ethnic group, as in µyIr'xmid] a[;ra' ʔarʕā dǝ-
Miṣráyim the land of Egypt; (d) a material, as in ab;hd'd] dǝ-dahbā of gold, golden; ap;sk'd]
dǝ-kaspā of silver; a[;a;d] dǝ-ʔāʕā of wood, wooden. But these factors may be overridden
by others. For example, as noted under (a), if the first member is plural, it is normally in
the construct, as in hytet]yai ymeg:tpi pigāme ʔittəteh the words of his wife. Kinship terms, such
as ‘son’, ‘daughter’, and ‘wife’, are usually in construct, as noted under (b), as in ˜r;h; rb'
bar Hārān the son of Haran; j'nO tt'ai ʔittat Noaḥ Noah’s wife.

9.3 The form of the Construct Singular

As indicated above, the construct singular noun is formed by dropping the final -ā of the
lexical form. Further adjustments must be made with the following types of nouns:
(a) Stems ending in -ǝC- replace ǝ with a full vowel, usually -a-:
ar;b] bǝrā rb' bar an:k]çm' maškǝna ˜k'çm' maškan
al;k]yhe hekǝlā lk'yhe hekal ar;ç]yme mešǝrā rç'yme mešar
ad;y} yǝdā dy' yad
(but note am;ç] šǝmā (name), construct µwço šom or µçe šem)
This includes all feminine stems in -ǝt-:
at;t]yai ʔittǝtā tt'yai ʔittat at;m]ylew[u ʕulemǝtā tm'ylew[u ʕulemat
at;n}ygi ginnǝtā tn"ygi ginnat at;r]wto torǝtā tr'wto torat
at;k]lm' malkǝtā tk'lm' malkat
(b) Stems ending in -C1C2- (two different consonants) exhibit a variety of forms,
either qǝtvl or qv́tvl in shape. These must be learned for each noun, though the
majority have the form qǝtal:
qǝtal:
a[;ra' ʔarʕā [r'a] ʔǝraʕ ap;sk; kaspā πs'k] kǝsap
ar;ta' ʔatrā rt'a] ʔǝtar ar;hn" nahrā rh'n} nǝhar
ar;bg" gabrā rb'g} gǝbar az:gwru rugzā zg"r] rǝgaz
ab;hd' dahbā bh'd] dǝhab a[;rt' tarʕā [r't] tǝraʕ
al;qj' ḥaqlā lq'j] ḥǝqal
qǝtel:
al;[b' baʕlā l[eb] bǝʕel am;jl' laḥmā µjel] lǝḥem
24 LESSON NINE

qátal:
ak;lm' malkā ˚l'm' málak ad;b[' ʕabdā db'[' ʕábad
(c) Stems ending in -C1C1- (doubled consonant) simplify the consonant, sometimes
with a change of vowel: e.g., ab;yli libbā (heart), construct bl' lab.
(d) The construct of at;r'b] bǝrattā is irregular: tb' bat.
There are other irregularities, especially with nouns from roots III–Weak. These will be
noted as required; see also Paradigm A.4, page 76.

9.4 Anticipatory Genitive Construction

There is a third type of genitive construction which makes use of an anticipatory posses-
sive suffix followed by dǝ-, as in
at;rq'd] hm'ç] šǝmah dǝ-qartā the name of the city.
This occurs only rarely in Onqelos and is restricted to particular lexical items and to spe-
cial compound constructions; both members of the construction are semantically definite.

Vocabulary 9
Verbs:
rs'a] ʔǝsar to bind, take captive.
qj'd]÷qyjed] dǝḥeq/dǝḥaq to press, urge; to oppress (yāt, bǝ-, lǝ-).
˚p'h] hǝpak to overthrow; to convert, change (x into y: yāt x lǝ-y).
rm'f] ṭǝmar to hide, conceal.
rb't] tǝbar to break, break down; to subdue.
Nouns:
ay:p'a' ʔappayyā (pl.) face, surface; most frequent in prep. phrases, esp. ypea' l[' ʕal
ʔappe (with pl. suffixes, §7.2) on the face/surface of; right up against, over
against
ar;b; bārā the outside (of a place); used mainly in fixed prepositional and
adverbial expressions: ar;bl; ] lǝ-bārā to the outside; ar;b;mi mib-bārā on the
outside (of: lǝ-); ar;b;mil] lǝ-mib-bārā to the outside (of: lǝ-); ˜mi rb; bār min
except, except for, other than.
ad;y} yǝdā (cstr. dy" yad; pl. -ayyā; f.; sing. with suffix: ydiy} yǝdi, ˚d;y} yǝdāk, hydey}
yǝdeh, etc., but ˜wkudy" yadkon; note forms with preceding w}, b], etc.: ad;ywI w-
idā, ad;ybi b-idā, ay:d'ywI w-idayyā, ay:d'ybi b-idayyā, etc.; with prep. ˜mi either ad;y}mi
miy-yǝdā or ad;ymi m-idā) hand; dy"b] bǝ-yad (or d] ad;ybi b-idā dǝ-) into the
hand/power/control of; through, by means of; hydeybi bysen} nǝseb b-ideh he
picked up.
yy÷ywy Ywy or Yy the usual writing of the divine name, presumably read ʔǝdonāy as
in Hebrew (hwhy).
 LESSON NINE 25

am;rk' karmā vineyard.

aj;b]dm' madbǝḥā (cstr. jb'dm' madbaḥ; pl. -ayyā) altar.
at;wkulm' malkutā (cstr. twkulm' malkut; pl. at;w:k]lm' malkǝwātā) kingdom, reign, rule.
ab;r;q] qǝrābā (pl. -ayyā) battle, war; ʕǝbad qǝrābā ʕim to wage war against.
am;ç] šǝmā (cstr. µwço šom or µçe šem; pl. at;h;m;ç] šǝmāhātā) name.

Exercises
A.
1. tǝraʕ qartǝhon 2. ʔilān ginnǝtā 3. qinyān bǝnóhi 4. baʕle bǝnāteh 5. ʔittat ʕabdāk 6.
ʕuleme malkā 7. nǝše malkā 8. ḥǝqal gabrayyā hāʔinnun 9. qǝyām ʕammánā 10.
ʔamhāt nǝšehon 11. mānayyā dǝ-dahbā 12. malkǝwātā dǝ-ʔarʕā 13. šom bǝreh 14.
šǝma da-Yy 15. madbaḥ hekǝlā 16. bar ʔAbrāhām 17. tǝraʕ maškǝneh 18. šom ʔamtah
19. malkā dǝ-qartā 20. malkā dǝ-Miṣráyim
ak;lm' yçen} 7 ak;lm' ymeylew[u 6 ˚d;b[' tt'yai 5 hyten:b] yle[b' 4 yhiwnob] ˜y:nqi 3 at;n}ygi ˜l;yai 2 ˜whot]rq' [r't] 1
hyreb] µwço 13 a[;ra'd] at;w:k]lm' 12 ab;hd'd] ay:n"m; 11 ˜whoyçen} th;ma' 10 an:m'[' µy:q] 9 ˜wnuyaih; ay:r'bg" lq'j] 8
at;rq'd] ak;lm' 19 ht'ma' µwço 18 hynek]çm' [r't] 17 µh;r;ba' rb' 16 al;k]yhe jb'dm' 15 yyd' am;ç] 14
µyir'xmid] ak;lm' 20
B.
anwrq ymm[ 7 ytta tmylw[ 6 ytyb [rt yçd 5 aklm tng 4 hytrb lq 3 arhn ym 2 aybn ymgtp 1
lk thmç 13 ˜wnyah ayklmd abrq 12 hytwklm ymwy 11 aybn tnb 10 atrq ytb 9 ˜whlkyh bhd 8
hrb lq 18 apskd anam 17 ayhh a[ra rhn 16 a[ra lk ypa l[ 15 ˜ydh arbgd amrk 14 yhwnb
hyttad atma 20 ajbdm rta 19

C.
1. Hǝpak yāt kol qirwehon. 2. Dǝḥáqit yātǝhon u-npáqu ʕimmi. 3. Tǝbáru yāt dašše
beteh, wa-ʔǝḥádu yāteh u-qṭálu yāteh. 4. Ṭǝmárat yāt gabrayyā bǝ-betah. 5. ʔǝḥádu yāt
bǝnóhi wa-ʔǝsáru yātǝhon. 6. Zǝbánit yāt kol mānehon bār min mānā hāhuʔ dǝ-dahbā. 7.
Nǝṣábu yāt ʔilānayyā mib-bārā lǝ-ginnǝtā. 8. Nǝpáqu u-npíšu ʕal ʔappe kol ʔarʕā. 9. ʔān
ṭǝmartun yāt mānayyā dǝ-kaspā? 10. ʔillen šǝmāhāt gabrayyā di-šláḥnā lǝ-Miṣráyim.

hytey: wluf'qwu hytey: wduj'a]w" hyteybe yçed' ty: wrub't] 3 ymi[i wqup'nwu ˜whot]y: tyqij'd] 2 ˜whoywerqi lko ty: ˚p'h] 1
awhuh; an:m; ˜mi rb; ˜whoynem; lko ty: tynib'z] 6 ˜whot]y: wrus'a]w" yhiwnob] ty: wduj'a] 5 ht'ybeb] ay:r'bg" ty: tr'm'f] 4
ay:n"m; ty: ˜wturm'f] ˜a; 9 a[;ra' lko ypea' l[' wçuypinwu wqupn' } 8 at;n}gIl] ar;b;mi ay:n"l;yai ty: wbuxn' } 7 ab;hd'd]
µyir'xmil] an:jl'çdi ay:r'bg" th;m;ç] ˜yleyai 10 ap;sk'd]

D.
ynm rb aymylw[ lk ty wrsa 3 hytwklm ymwy lk ayhh atrqb byty 2 yhwnb ˜m rb ayrbg lk wlza 1
aml 7 adh atrq ˜m rb a[ra lk ty ankph 6 ajbdm ˜mt db[w 5 tyqr[w abrq lq ty ty[mç 4
azgwr πyqt 10 hty rbtw hydyb abrj ty bysn 9 aklmd adyb aybn ty wrsm 8 ˜whty ˜wtqyjd al
yhwdb[b aklmd
 LESSON TEN
10.1 The G Perfect: Roots III–Weak
an:b] bǝnā he built wnob] bǝno they (m) built
tn:b] bǝnāt she built ha;n"b] bǝnáʔā they (f) built
(at;yneb)] tyneb] bǝnet (bǝnétā) you (ms) built ˜wtoyneb] bǝneton you (mp) built
tyneb] bǝnet you (fs) built ˜yteyneb] bǝneten you (fp) built
(ytiyneb)] tyneb] bǝnet (bǝnéti) I built an:yneb] bǝnénā we built
In contrast to the paradigm of kǝtab, note the alternate form with -i in the 1st person sing.
(bǝnet or bǝnéti) and the 2nd person pl. endings -ton/-ten corresponding to -tun/-tin.
The verb hw:h] hǝwāh ‘to be’ has final h rather than a in the 3ms but is otherwise like
bǝnā:
hw:h] hǝwāh he was wwoh] hǝwo they (m) were
tw:h] hǝwāt she was ha'w"h] hǝwáʔā they (f) were
(at;yweh)] tyweh] hǝwet (hǝwétā) you (ms) were ˜wtoyweh] hǝweton you (mp) were
tyweh] hǝwet you (fs) were ˜yteyweh] hǝweten you (fp) were
(ytiyweh)] tyweh] hǝwet (hǝwéti) I was an:yweh] hǝwénā we were

Bǝnā represents the normal type. There is also a less frequent stative type, inflected
as follows (ydij] ḥǝdi to rejoice):
ydij] ḥǝdi wauydij] ḥǝdíʔu (or wyuydij] ḥǝdíyu)
ta'ydij] ḥǝdíʔat ha;ydij] ḥǝdíʔā
(at;ydij)] tydij] ḥǝdit (ḥǝdítā) ˜wtuydij] ḥǝditun
tydij] ḥǝdit ˜ytiydij] ḥǝditin
(ytiydij)] tydij] ḥǝdit(ḥǝdíti) an:ydij] ḥǝdínā
Note that the 2nd person pl. forms here have the usual endings (-tun/-tin).

10.2 Sentences with Adverbial Predicate

Simple juxtaposition is used to form a sentence having a prepositional phrase or adverb
as its predicate:
al;k]yheb] ak;lm' Malkā bǝ-hekǝlā. The King is in the palace.
˜m;t' hyreb] Bǝreh tammān. His son is there.
As these stand, they are not marked for tense. In isolation they are translated by the
English present; in a given context, however, a past or future is often required. Such
sentences may be made explicitly past tense by using the verb hw:h] hǝwāh to be:
al'k]yheb] ak;lm' hw:h] Hǝwāh malkā bǝ-hekǝlā. The king was in the palace.
˜m;t' hyreb] hw:h] Hǝwāh bǝreh tammān. His son was there.
at;rq'b] hyter'b] tw:h] Hǝwāt bǝratteh bǝ-qartā. His daughter was in the city.
 LESSON TEN 27

Vocabulary 10
Verbs:
at;a] ʔǝtā to come.
an:b] bǝnā to build.
hw:h] hǝwāh to be; with lǝ-, to become: Hǝwāh Šāʔul lǝ-malkā Saul became king;
note also Hǝwāh leh qinyānā He had property.
ydij] ḥǝdi to rejoice (ʕal over).
az:j] ḥǝzā to see.
an:m] mǝnā to count.
an:q] qǝnā to acquire, purchase.
ar;q] qǝrā to call, summon (lǝ-); to name (x y: yāt šom/šem x y; e.g., hyreb] µwço ty: ar;q]
qj;xyI qǝrā yāt šom bǝreh Yiṣḥāq he named his son Isaac).
a[;r] rǝʕā to pasture, tend.
ytiç] šǝti to drink.

Name:
qj;xyI Yiṣḥāq Isaac.

Exercises
A.
1. ʔǝto lǝ-karmánā. 2. Qǝráʔā lǝ-ʕabdehen. 3. ʔān rǝʕet yāt ʕānāk? 4. Qǝnénā yāt
mānayyā tammān. 5. Mā qǝno bǝnóhi bǝ-Miṣráyim? 6. Ḥǝdíʔu ʕal qinyānā di-qno
tammān. 7. Šǝtínā yāt mayyā d-ihábat lánā. 8. Ḥǝzéti yāt madbǝḥā di-bnet tammān. 9.
Qǝnéti karmā mim-madnaḥ lǝ-qartā. 10. Lā šǝtíʔu mim-me nahrā hāhuʔ.

µyir'xmib] yhiwnob] wnoq] am; 5 ˜m;t' ay:n"m; ty: an:yneq] 4 ˚n:[; ty: ty[er] ˜a; 3 ˜yheydeb['l] ha;r'q] 2 an:m'rk'l] wtoa] 1
ytiyneq] 9 ˜m;t' tynebdi aj;bd] m' ty: ytiyzej] 8 an:l' tb'h'ydi ay:m' ty: an:ytiç] 7 ˜m;t' wnoqdi an:y:nqi l[' wauydij] 6
awhuh; ar;hn" ymemi wauytiç] al; 10 at;rq'l] jn"dm'mi am;rk'

B.
atrql arbm ˜wtyzj am 4 arçymb ˜whry[b ty w[r 3 qjxy yrb µwç ty ytyrq 2 ˜wtyta ˜nm 1
ty wnm 8 ˜ylyah aytb ty anb ˜m 7 ata alw aybnl aklm arq 6 hy[rt ty wrbtw hytybl wta 5
amrk ˜mt bxnw a[rab byty 10 ahnb wdb[d aynm ty tnm 9 atngb wbxnd aynlya

C.
1. Hǝwāh Šāʔul lǝ-malkā ʕal ʕammánā. 2. Lā hǝwāt bǝratteh mib-bārā lǝ-betā. 3. Lā
hǝwo bǝnóhi bǝgo gabrayyā hāʔinnun. 4. ʔān hǝwet bǝ-yomā hāhuʔ? 5. Kol
qirwehon mim-maʕarbā lǝ-ṭurayyā. 6. Qǝret li-bnay, wǝ-lā ʔǝto lǝwāti. 7. Nǝpálu kol
bǝnáhā bi-qrābā hāhuʔ. 8. Malkuti miṣ-ṣippunā lǝ-nahrā. 9. Qǝro lánā wǝ-lā dǝḥáqu
bánā. 10. Pǝláḥu yāteh kol yome malkuteh.

˜wnuyaih' ay:r'bg" wgob] yhiwnob] wwoh] al; 3 at;ybel] ar;b;mi hyter'b] tw:h] al; 2 an:m'[' l[' ak;lm'l] lwauç; hw:h] 1
28 LESSON TEN

ah;n"b] lko wlup'n} 7 ytiw:l] wtoa] al;w] yn"bli tyreq] 6 ay:r'wful] ab;r['m'mi ˜whoywerqi lko 5 awhuh; am;wyob] tyweh] ˜a; 4
hytewkulm' ymewyo lko hytey: wjul'p] 10 an:b' wquj'd] al;w] an:l' wroq] 9 ar;hn"l] an:wpuyximi ytiwkulm' 8 awhuh; ab;r;qbi

D.
al 3 hyb hyty trmfw hnkçml awhh arbg ata 2 ˜whklmd adyb am[ ty wrsmw atrq ty wkph 1
˜whl harq 5 yhwmdq adygsw hytwl atrq yçn hata 4 ajbdm ty ˜mt anbd arta ty anyzj
am[ lk wdbaw a[rab anpk hwh 7 alkyhb wwhd aynm ty wbysn 6 ˜yhtwl wta alw ˜whthma
ylqjb ˚trwt 10 ˜ydh arwt ty atynq ˜mm 9 arwf ypa l[ ann[ ty any[r 8
 LESSON ELEVEN

11.1 The G Perfect: Hollow and Geminate Roots

Verbs from both of these types of roots are inflected in the same way in the Perfect. The
absence of accurate marking for consonant gemination in our texts prevents us from
knowing whether the double consonant expected in the forms from geminate roots was
preserved or not; our transcription assumes that it was.
(a) Hollow roots: µq; qām to arise
µq; qām wmuq;÷wmuq' qámu/qā́ mu
tm'q' qámat am;q;÷am;q' qámā/qā́ mā
(at;mq') tmq' qamt (qámtā) ˜wtumq' qamtun
tmq' qamt ˜ytimq' qamtin
tymiq' qámit an:mq' qámnā
(b) Geminate roots: l[;÷l[' ʕal/ʕāl to enter
l[;÷l[' ʕal/ʕāl wlu[;÷wlu[' ʕállu/ʕā́ lu
tl'[' ʕállat al;[;÷al;[' ʕállā/ʕā́ lā
(at;l[') tl[' ʕalt (ʕáltā) ˜wtul[' ʕaltun
tl[' ʕalt ˜ytil[' ʕaltin
tyli[' ʕállit an:l[' ʕálnā

11.2 Stative Hollow Roots

A rare stative type from Hollow roots is represented by tymi mit to die; attested forms:
tymi mit he died wtuymi mítu they (m) died
tt'ymi mítat she died an:tymi mítnā we died
The verb bysi sib (to grow old) has these forms attested:
byse÷bysi sib/seb he grew old wbuyse sébu they (m) grew old
tb'yse sébat she grew old
tybiyse sébit I grew old

11.3 Temporal Clauses with hw:hw" wa-hwāh

In imitation of Hebrew constructions with yhiy“w" wa-yhî, a temporal clause or phrase may be
inserted into a past tense narrative with hw:hw" wa-hwāh:
... qp'nwu ar;px'b] hw:hw" wa-hwāh bǝ-ṣaprā u-npaq ...
and in the morning he went forth ...
... ydij]w" hyreb] lq; ty: [m'ç] dk' hw:hw" wa-hwāh kad šǝmaʕ yāt qāl bǝreh wa-ḥǝdi...
and when he heard his son’s voice, he rejoiced ...
Note the obligatory wǝ- introducing the second clause in these examples; it has no trans-
lation value in English.
30 LESSON ELEVEN

Vocabulary 11
Verbs:
˜d; dān to judge.
rd; dār to sojourn.
tymi mit to die.
byse÷bysi sib/seb to grow old.
l[;÷l[' ʕal/ʕāl to enter (a place: lǝ-).
µq; qām to arise, stand, stop.
ar;ç] šǝrā to come to a stop, set up camp, settle down.
bt; tāb to return, go/come back.

Nouns:
am;yai ʔimmā (pl. at;h;m;yai ʔimmāhātā; f.) mother. Note that am;ya ʔimmā is used instead
of ʔimmi for ‘my mother’.
ar;ybe berā (pl. -ayyā; f.) well, pit.
ab;k]wko kokǝbā (pl. -ayyā) star.
at;l]mi millǝtā (pl. ay:l'mi millayyā; f.) word.
ay:m'ç] šǝmayyā (m. pl.) heaven, the sky.

Other:
˜ybe ben (prep.; with pl. suffixes; see §7.2) between; ben x u-ben y (or) ben x lǝ-y
between x and y.
rf'sbi bi-sṭar (prep.; with suffixes, hyrefsib] bǝ-siṭreh, etc.) beside, near.
d] rt'b; bātar dǝ- (conj.) after.
dk' kad (conj.) when.

Exercises
A.
1. Tā́ bu lǝ-qartǝhon. 2. Dān Šǝmuʔel yāt ʕammā. 3. ʕal lǝ-hekǝlā wǝ-qām qǝdām malkā.
4. Dárnā bǝ-gawwǝhon. 5. ʔǝtā lǝ-mešǝrā u-šrā beh, huʔ wǝ-ʔittǝteh u-bnóhi wǝ-kol
beteh. 6. Sib malkǝhon u-mit. 7. Šǝro bi-sṭar nahrā. 8. Tábat ʔittǝtā lǝ-bet baʕlah. 9. ʔān
šǝreton bǝ-lelǝyā hāhuʔ? 10. Mā ʕǝbadtun kad mit malkǝkon?

at;a] 5 ˜whow]g"b] an:rd' 4 ak;lm' µd;q] µq;w] al;k]yhel] l[' 3 am;[' ty: laewmuç] ˜d; 2 ˜whot]rq'l] wbut; 1
tb't' 8 ar;hn" rf'sbi wroç] 7 tymiwu ˜whok]lm' bysi 6 hyteybe lkow] yhiwnobwu hytet]aiw] awhu hybe ar;çwu ar;ç]ymel]
˜wkok]lm' tymi dk' ˜wtudb'[] am; 10 awhuh; ay:l]yleb] ˜wtoyreç] ˜a; 9 hl'[b' tybel] at;t]ai

B.
˜mt tyrdw abr[m d[ tylfn 4 atrqm wqpnw aylylb wmq 3 ayrbg ty ˜d ˜m 2 ym[l tybt al 1
açmrb hyma tbt al 8 hymylw[l arqw arpxb µq 7 yhwnb wtym ˜a 6 aybn ty wlfqw antrql wl[ 5
hyty lfqw yhwl[ µqw hyrbb hyzgwr πyqt 10 ˜whynybw annyb abrq hwh 9
 LESSON ELEVEN 31

C.
1. kokǝbe šǝmayyā 2. kol kokǝbayyā hāʔillen 3. mille nǝbiyā 4. mib-bārā lǝ-ʔatrā
hāden. 5. bi-sṭar madbǝḥā hāhuʔ 6. kol malkutāk 7. šom ʔimmǝkon

awhuh; aj;b]dm' rf'sbi 5 ˜ydeh; ar;ta'l] ar;b;mi 4 ay:bni } yleymi 3 ˜yleyaih; ay::b'k]wko lko 2 ay:m'ç] ybek]wko 1
˜wkom]ai µwço 7 ˚t;wkulm' lko 6

D.
˜whmrk wgb 5 ayhh aryb ym 4 adh aryb rfsb 3 yhwmylw[ ˜ybl ymylw[ ˜yb 2 aymç ypa l[ 1
hymyad atma 7 amya ylym 6

E.
1. Wa-hwāh kad ʕal lǝ-betā, wa-ʔǝḥad yāt daššā bātǝróhi. 2. Wa-hwāh kad ʔǝto lǝ-ṭurā, u-
bno tammān qartā, w-itíbu bah. 3. Wa-hwāh bǝ-yomayyā hāʔinnun, wa-ʕǝbad malkā
hāhuʔ qǝrābā ʕimmánā.

hb' wbuytiywi at;rq' ˜m;t' wnobwu ar;wful] wtoa] dk' hw:hw" 2 yhiwrot]b; aç;d' ty: dj'a]w" at;ybel] l[' dk' hw:hw" 1
an:m'[i ab;r;q] awhuh; ak;lm' db'[]w" ˜wnuyaih; ay:m'wyob] hw:hw" 3

F.
tbtw antrqm tqpnw hl[b tymd rtb hwhw 2 yhwmdq wmqw hytwl wbyrqw yhwnbl arq dk hwhw 1
˜whm[ abrq andb[w ˜whb anzgwr πyqtw ˜whm[ anrzgd amyq ymgtyp ty wrfn al dk hwhw 3 hm[l
 LESSON TWELVE

12.1 The Infinitive of G Verbs

The basic pattern of the G infinitive is miqṭal (written lf'qymi or lf'qmi):
bt'k] kǝtab, infin. bt'kymi miktab;
[m'ç] šǝmaʕ, infin. [m'çymi mišmaʕ;
µyjer] rǝḥem, infin. µj'rymi mirḥam;
dyges] sǝged, infin. dg"symi misgad.
Various adjustments must be made for the different root types:
(a) I–n: the -n- is assimilated completely to the following consonant, which is then
doubled:
qp'n} nǝpaq, infin. qp'ymi mippaq.
Note the doubly irregular infinitive of
tj'n} nǝḥat, infin. tj'yme meḥat.
Also irregular is
qyles] sǝleq, infin. qs'ymi missaq, as though from qsn rather than qls.
(b) I–ʔaleph: the -ʔ- is lost completely and the prefix is me-:
lk'a] ʔǝkal, infin. lk'yme mekal;
rm'a] ʔǝmar, infin. rm'yme memar;
lz"a] ʔǝzal, infin. lz"yme mezal.
(c) I–ʕayin: several of these verbs show irregularities:
db'[] ʕǝbad, infin. db'[m' maʕbad (note a in the prefix);
rb'[] ʕǝbar, infin. rb'[ymi miʕbar or rb'[iymi miʕibar;
qr'[] ʕǝraq, infin. qr'[ymi miʕraq.
(d) I–y: this is a very irregular group, some like I–n, others like I–ʔ:
bytey} yǝteb, infin. bt'ymi mittab;
[d'y} yǝdaʕ, infin. [d'ymi middaʕ or [d'yme medaʕ;
dl'y} yǝlad, infin. dl'yme melad;
tyrey} yǝret, infin. tr'yme merat.
The infinitive of bh'y} yǝhab is based on the root n-t-n: ˜t'ymi mittan.
(e) III–Weak: one type only:
an:b] bǝnā, infin. ynebymi mibne;
ydij] ḥǝdi, infin. ydejymi miḥde.
(f) Hollow: one type only:
µq; qām, infin. µq;m] mǝqām;
 LESSON TWELVE 33

tymi mit, infin. tm;m] mǝmāt.

Note especially the distinction between bt'ymi/bt'mi mittab to sit (bty) and bt;m]
mǝtāb to return (bwt).
(g) Geminate: rare, except for the verb
l[' ʕal, infin. l['yme meʕal.
(h) Combining several root types are
at;a] ʔǝtā, infin. yteyme mete;
hw:h] hǝwāh, infin. ywehmi mihwe.

12.2 Suffixes on the Infinitive

The infinitive may take pronominal suffixes; on most infinitives the suffixes are those
that appear on sing. nouns:
˚b;t]ymi mittǝbāk your (ms) sitting;
˜whoqp'ymi mippaqhon their (m) going forth.
III–weak infinitives take suffixes as on a pl. noun:
yhiwnObmi mibnóhi his building (something);
˜whoywEhmi mihwehon their being (present);
except 1 sg. an"bmi mibna my building (something),
3fs hn"bmi mibnah her building (something).
Note that with transitive verbs, the pronominal suffix may be subjective or objective:
˚l;f]qymi miqṭǝlāk killing you, or, your killing (someone).

12.3 Uses of the Infinitive

The most frequent uses of the infinitive are
(a) to express purpose, after any appropriate verb, with l] lǝ-:
yhiwmod;q] dg"smil] wtoa] ʔǝto lǝ-misgad qǝdāmóhi. They (m) came in order to bow down
before him.
lk'ymel] ab;ytiy] Yǝtíbā lǝ-mekal. They (f) sat down to eat.
(b) as a complement with such verbs as lykey} yǝkel to be able, [n"m] mǝnaʕ to prevent, qb'ç]
šǝbaq to allow, l] byreq] qǝreb to be about to. Some typical constructions:
ad;jk' bt'ymil] wluykiy} al; Lā yǝkílu lǝ-mittab kaḥdā. They (m) were not able to dwell
together.
lz"ymel]mi ˜yhet]y: [n"m] Mǝnaʕ yātǝhen mil-lǝ-mezal. He prevented them (f) from going.
qp'ymil] ˜whot]y: qb'ç] Šǝbaq yātǝhon lǝ-mippaq. He allowed them (m) to leave.
µyIr'xmil] l['ymel] byreq] qǝreb lǝ-meʕal lə-Miṣrayim He was about to enter Egypt.
(c) in imitation of Hebrew infinitive construct after yhiy“w" wa-yhî:
Hebrew µ[;s]n:B] yhiy“w" wa-yhî bǝ-nosʕām ‘As they traveled ...’ > Onq. ˜wholf'ymib] hw:hw"
34 LESSON TWELVE

wa-hwāh bǝ-miṭṭalhon (Gen. 11:2).

More often, however, dk' kad plus a finite verb is used: Hebrew hv,mo td,r,B] yhiy“w"
wa-yhî bǝ-rédet Moše ‘As Moses came down ...’ > Onq. hç'mo tj'n} dk' hw:hw"
wa-hwāh kad nǝḥat Mošah (Exod. 34:29).
(d) as nouns (see the Vocabulary);
(e) in some traditions, in the form bt;kymi miktāb, with -ā- (also in III–weak: an:bymi mibnā,
at;yme metā), to render the Hebrew infinitive absolute.

Vocabulary 12
Verbs:
lykey} yǝkel (infin. lk'ymi mikkal or lk'yme mekal) to be able (see §12.2, above).
[n"m] mǝnaʕ to prevent, hinder (see §12.2, above).

Nouns:
al;k]yme mekǝlā (infin. as noun) food.
ar;m]yme memǝrā (infin. as noun; cstr. memar) word, utterance; yyd' ar;m]yme memǝrā da-Yy
the Word of the Lord, the most frequent circumlocution for God; rm'ymel] lǝ-
memar is used, like Hebrew rmoale lēʔmōr, to introduce a direct quotation.

Other:
ak;h; hākā (adv.) here; ak;l]h; hālǝkā hither, to this place; ak;mi mik-kā from here,
hence.
ad;jk' kaḥdā (adv.) together, as one.
ad;jl' laḥdā (adv.) very much, greatly.

Names:
˜['n"k] Kǝnáʕan Canaan.

Exercises
A.
1. Lā yǝkílu lǝ-miḥze. 2. Mǝnáʕu yāti mil-lǝ-mibne betā. 3. ʔǝto hālǝkā lǝ-miqne bǝʕirā.
4. Lā yǝkélit li-mdān yātǝhon. 5. Lǝmā mǝnaʕt yāti mil-lǝ-mište yāt mayyā? 6. Nǝḥátu
lǝ-Miṣráyim lǝ-miqne mekǝlā tammān. 7. Yǝkélat lǝ-miṭmar yāt bǝrah. 8. Šǝbáqit yātāk
lǝ-mittab hākā. 9. Lā yǝkélit lǝ-mizban yāt karmā. 10. Nǝpáqu lǝ-maʕbad qǝrābā ʕim
malkā hāhuʔ. 11. ʕállit lǝ-betā lǝ-mittan yāt kaspā lǝ-ʔimmā. 12. Yǝteb tammān lǝ-miṭṭar
yāt qinyānā. 13. Wa-hwāh bǝ-mittǝbeh tammān, u-tqep laḥdā bi-bʕirā u-b-kaspā. 14. Wa-
hwāh bǝ-miʕrǝqah mil-lǝwāt baʕlah, u-rháṭat lǝ-bet bǝrah.

˜d;mli tyliykey} al; 4 ar;y[ib] yneqymil] ak;l]h; wtoa] 3 at;ybe ynebmil]mi ytiy: w[un"m] 2 yzejymil] wluykiy} al; 1
hr'b] ty: rm'fymil] tl'ykey} 7 ˜m;t' al;k]yme yneqymil] µyir'xmil] wtujn" } 6 ay:m' ty: yteçymil]mi ytiy: t[n"m] am;l] 5 ˜whot]y:
awhuh; ak;lm' µ[i ab;r;q] db'[m'l] wqupn' } 10 am;rk' ty: ˜b'zmil] tyliykey} al; 9 ak;h; bt'ymil] ˚t;y: tyqib'ç] 8
 LESSON TWELVE 35

πyqetwu ˜m;t' hybet]ymib] hw:hw" 13 an:y:nqi ty: rf'ymil] ˜m;t' bytey} 12 am;yail] ap;sk' ty: ˜t'ymil] at;ybel] tyli[' 11
hr'b] tybel] tf'h'rwu hl'[b' tw:lm] i hq'r][ymib] hw:hw" 14 ap;sk'bwu ar;y[ibbi ad;jl'

B.
˜whty qbç 4 µyrxml l[yml wbyrq 3 aybkwk ty ynmyml lyky al 2 ˜mt rdml anlyky al 1
arçymb yrçyml anty wqbç al 6 adjl wçypn yra adjk btyml wlyky al 5 ˜whtrql btmyl
a[rt ty jtpymlm yty [nm 9 amylw[ ty rsyml wmq 8 ˜whtrq ty ˚phyml lyky al 7 awhh
µyrxml tjyml wlyky al 12 anmy[ µyq rzgml antwl wbyrq 11 hy[ra ty rb[yml anty qbç 10
˜[nkd a[ral wtaw ˜[nkd a[ral lzyml wqpn 14 a[rad amwrdl lfnw µyrxmm hyqsymb hwhw 13
 LESSON THIRTEEN

13.1 D (Pael) Verbs: the Perfect

All the verbs introduced up to this point have been G (Peal) verbs, consisting of the plain
root plus the vowel pattern appropriate to the stem of the Perfect. There is a second type
of verb, traditionally known as the Pael, characterized by the doubling of the middle
radical. The Perfect of D verbs, as we shall designate them, is formed with the vowel
pattern lyfeq' qaṭṭel. This is subject to modification with certain root types:
Sound roots: dyqep' paqqed to command
lybeq' qabbel to receive
III–Guttural jb'ç' šabbaḥ to praise
and III–r: rb't' tabbar to shatter
III–Weak: ynIm' manni to appoint
ywIç' šawwi to place.
D verbs from roots II–Guttural are infrequent and usually have normal patterning (e.g.,
≈y[ed' daʕ(ʕ)eṣ he inserted), implying that the guttural was actually doubled (or, as the
Hebrew grammars say, virtually doubled). Roots II–r are an exception: here one regularly
finds simple -r- with the lengthening of the preceding -a- to -ā-:
˚yreb; bārek to bless
byreq; qāreb to bring near, offer
yriç; šāri to begin.
Inflection of all these verbs in the Perfect is the same as that of a phonetically similar G
verb; thus, e.g.,
(a) qabbel and bārek are inflected like sǝleq:
lybeq' qabbel wluybiq' qabbílu ˚yreb; bārek wkuyrib; bāríku
tl'ybeq' qabbélat al;ybiq' qabbílā tk'yreb; bārékat ak;yrib; bāríkā
at;lybeq/' tlybeq' qabbélt(ā) ˜wtulybeq' qabbeltun at;kyreb/; tkyreb; bārékt(ā) ˜wtukyreb; bārektun
tlybeq' qabbelt ˜ytilybeq' qabbeltin tkyreb; bārekt ˜ytikyreb; bārektin
tyliybeq' qabbélit an:lybeq' qabbélnā tykiyreb; bārékit an:kyreb; bāréknā
(b) šabbaḥ and tabbar are inflected like kǝtab:
jb'ç' šabbaḥ wjub'ç' šabbáḥu
tj'b'ç' šabbáḥat aj;b'ç' šabbáḥā
(c) manni and šāri are inflected like ḥǝdi:
ynIm' manni wauynIm' manníʔu (or wyUynIm' manníyu)
ta'ynIm' manníʔat ha;ynIm' manníʔā
at;ynIm/' tynIm' mannít(ā) ˜wtuynIm' mannitun
tynIm' mannit ˜ytiynIm' mannitin
ytiynIm/' tynIm' mannít(i) an:ynIm' mannínā
 LESSON THIRTEEN 37

13.2 The Infinitive of D Verbs

The basic pattern of the D Infinitive is al;f;q' qaṭṭālā:
lybeq' qabbel, infin. al;b;q' qabbālā
jb'ç' šabbaḥ, infin. aj;b;ç' šabbāḥā
˚yreb; bārek, infin. ak;r;b; bārākā
ynIm' manni, infin. ha;n:m' mannāʔā
yriç; šāri, infin. ha;r;ç; šārāʔā
When suffixes (with subject or object sense) are added to this form, or when the infinitive
stands in construct relationship with a following noun (usually in a subject sense), the
final -ā is replaced by -ut-:
ytiwlub;q' qabbāluti my receiving
yy twlub;j' ḥabbālut Yy the Lord’s destroying (something).
In roots III–weak, both twaun:m' mannāʔut and twyUn:m' mannāyut are found.
(A rare alternate form of the D infinitive is ylewfoq' qaṭṭole.)

13.3 The Meaning of D Verbs

As in Hebrew, and as can be seen from the glosses of the verbs presented in the preceding
sections, the D stem has several semantic functions:
(a) Intensive, as in G rb't] tǝbar to break, D rb't' tabbar to break up, break into pieces.
(b) Transitive, as in G byreq] qǝreb to draw near, D byreq; qāreb to bring near, offer.
(c) Denominal, as in D lylem' mallel to speak; cf. at;l]ymi millǝtā word.
(d) Other: Some verbs have quite different meanings in the G and D; e.g., G ar;ç] šǝrā to
stop, camp, D yriç; šāri to begin; G an:m] mǝnā to count, D ynIm' manni to appoint. Still other D
verbs have no corresponding G, such as ˚yret; tārek to drive out.

Vocabulary 13
Verbs:
˚yreb; bārek D to bless.
˜ybez" zabben D to sell.
lybej' ḥabbel D to destroy.
lylem' mallel D to speak (with: ʕim).
ylix' ṣalli D to pray.
lybeq' qabbel D to receive, accept; qabbel lǝ-memar X to heed, obey X (lit., to accept
the word of X); qabbel ṣǝlotā to hear a prayer; qabbel min to obey.
byreq; qāreb D to bring, present, offer.
jb'ç' šabbaḥ D to praise.
ywIç' šawwi D to put, place, set, set up, make.
yriç; šāri D to begin (+ infin. or participle).
38 LESSON THIRTEEN

˚yret; tārek D to drive out, expel.

Nouns:
at;k]rbi birkǝtā (pl. at;k;rbi birkātā) blessing.
at;wlox] ṣǝlotā (see Paradigm A.3, end) prayer.
an:b;rwqu qurbānā (pl. -ayyā) offering.
Prepositions:
twmud;q'l] lǝ-qaddāmut (out) to meet.
rf's]mi mis-sǝṭar (with suffixes, hyrefsimi mis-siṭreh, etc.) from beside.

Exercises
A.
1. Qabbélat lǝ-memar baʕlah. 2. ʕal mā ḥabbeltun yāt bāttánā? 3. Mallélit ʕimmeh
tammān. 4. Bǝ-yad man zabbínu yāt ʕulemā? 5. Šabbáḥu yāt ʔittǝtā lǝ-malkā. 6. Bārek
yāt bǝnóhi. 7. Qāríbu yāt qurbānehon. 8. Šawwíʔu yāteh malkā ʕǝlehon. 9. Lā qabbel Yy
yāt qurbāneh. 10. Ṣalli tammān bi-šmā da-Yy.

am;ylew[u ty: wnuybiz" ˜m' dy'b] 4 ˜m;t' hyme[i tyliylem' 3 an:t'b; ty: ˜wtulybej' am; l[' 2 hl'[b' rm'ymel] tl'ybeq' 1
al; 9 ˜whoyle[] ak;lm' hytey: wauywiç' 8 ˜whoynEb;rwqu ty: wbuyriq; 7 yhiwnob] ty: ˚yreb; 6 ak;lm'l] at;t]yai ty: wjub'ç' 5
yyd' am;çbi ˜m;t' ylix' 10 hynebr; wqu ty: yy lybeq'

B.
˜whma ˜m wlybq 4 hyty ˜wtjbç al am l[ 3 aryb rfsm ˜whty ˚yrt 2 ˚ytrb µy[ tlylm ˜a 1
ty anybz 8 alkyhl hrb ty tbyrq 7 arçym ywrq ty yy lybj 6 ahnb µdq amjl ty taywç 5
hytwlx ty yy lybq al 10 ˚rb ty tkyrb al aml 9 anry[b

C.
1. Nǝpaq Yiṣḥāq lǝ-ṣallāʔā bǝ-ḥaqlā. 2. ʔǝzal nǝbiyā lǝ-qaddāmut malkā. 3. Dā birkǝtā d-
ihab lǝ-ʕammeh. 4. Wǝ-qabbel yāt ṣǝlotah dǝ-ʔamtā. 5. Lā qabbílu ʕammā lǝ-memar
nǝbiyā. 6. Šāríʔu lǝ-mibne madbǝḥā. 7. ʔillen mille ṣǝlotā dǝ-ṣalli bǝ-yomā hāhuʔ. 8.
Mǝnáʕit yātǝhon mil-lǝ-ḥabbālā yāt qartánā. 9. Tārékit yāt gabrā mil-lǝwāti. 10. Lā yǝkílu
lǝ-tārākuteh. 11. Wa-hwāh bātar dǝ-bārek yātǝhon, u-mit.

ty: lybeq'w} 4 hyme['l] bh'ydi at;k]rybi ad; 3 ak;lm' twmud;ql' ] ay:bni } lz"a] 2 al;qj'b] ha;l;x'l] qj;xyi qp'n} 1
ylix'd] at;wlox] yleymi ˜yleyai 7 aj;b]dm' ynebmil] wauyriç; 6 ay:bni } rm'ymel] am;[' wluybiq' al; 5 at;ma'd] ht'wlox]
hytewkur;t;l] wluykiy} al; 10 ytiw:l]mi ar;bg" ty: tykiyret; 9 an:t'rq' ty: al;b;j'l]mi ˜whot]y: ty[in"m] 8 awhuh; am;wyob]
tymiwu ˜whot]y: ˚yreb;d] rt'b; hw:hw" 11

D.
hyty tywçw apsk ty tylfn 3 ˜whm[ allml ytyrç 2 ˜ynyah aywryq ty yy twlbj µdq ˜mt arç 1
al aml 7 arhn ˜ybw arwf ˜yb yrçml yrç 6 ˜whynkçm ty srpml wayrç 5 antwmdql tyjn 4 ytybb
ty wbysn 10 hylqj rfsb btml ˜whty qbç 9 ytkrb ty tbysn aml 8 ˚db[d atwlx ty tlybq
˜wkl hyty wnybzw annynq
 LESSON FOURTEEN

14.1 C (Aphel) Verbs: the Perfect

A third type of verb is characterized in the Perfect by a prefixed ʔa-. These verbs,
traditionally known as Aphel verbs, usually stand in a causative (hence C) relationship to
a corresponding G verb (if it is attested); e.g., G çybel] lǝbeš to wear, put on (clothing) →
C çybela' ʔalbeš to cause to wear, clothe. Transitive G verbs may thus become doubly
transitive C verbs, requiring two direct objects (e.g., cause someone to wear something).
In practice, however, this is not too common, the C verb being construed usually as
singly transitive. Various idiomatic uses will be indicated in the vocabularies as required.
The basic pattern of the C Perfect is lyfeqa' ʔaqṭel:
çyrepa' ʔapreš to divide;
çybela' ʔalbeš to clothe.
As in D verbs, roots III–Guttural or III–r have -a- instead of -e- in the second syllable:
[m'ça' ʔašmaʕ to cause to hear;
rb'[a' ʔaʕbar to lead across.
Also as in D verbs, C verbs from roots III–Weak have final -i:
yzIja' ʔaḥzi to show;
ywIla' ʔalwi to accompany.
Inflection of these three types is exactly as expected from G and D parallels:
çyrepa' ʔapreš wçuyripa'' ʔapríšu [m'ça' ʔašmaʕ w[um'ça' ʔašmáʕu
tç'yrepa'' ʔapréšat aç;yripa' ʔapríšā t['m'ça' ʔašmáʕat a[;m'ça' ʔašmáʕā
at;çyrepa'/' tçyrepa' ʔapréšt(ā) ˜wtuçyrepa' ʔapreštun at;[m'ça'/t[m'ça' ʔašmáʕt(ā) ˜wtu[m'ça' ʔašmaʕtun
tçyrepa'' ʔaprešt ˜ytiçyrepa' ʔapreštin t[m'ça' ʔašmaʕt ˜yti[m'ça' ʔašmaʕtin
tyçiyrepa' ʔapréšit an:çyrepa' ʔapréšnā ty[im'ça' ʔašmáʕit an:[m'ça' ʔašmáʕnā

yzIja' ʔaḥzi wauyzIja' ʔaḥzíʔu (or wyUyzIja' ʔaḥzíyu)

ta'yzIja' ʔaḥzíʔat ha;yzIja' ʔaḥzíʔā
at;yzIja'/tyzIja' ʔaḥzít(ā) ˜wtuuyzIja' ʔaḥzitun
tyzIja' ʔaḥzit ˜ytiyzIja' ʔaḥzitin
ytiyzIja'/tyzIja' ʔaḥzít(i) an:yzIja' ʔaḥzínā

14.2 C Verbs: the Infinitive

The basic form of the C Infinitive is al;f;qa' ʔaqṭālā:
aç;r;pa' ʔaprāšā a[;m;ça' ʔašmāʕā ha;z:ja' ʔaḥzāʔā.
As in the D Infinitive, construct forms and presuffixal forms require -ut- in the place of
the final -ā: e.g., hytewçur;pa' ʔaprāšuteh; ytiw[um;ça' ʔašmāʕuti; in roots III–weak, both twauz:ja'
ʔaḥzāʔut and twyuz:ja' ʔaḥzāyut occur. (A rare alternative C Infin. form is ylewfoqa' ʔaqṭole.)
40 LESSON FOURTEEN

14.3 The Interrogative h] hǝ-

Clauses may be converted to question form by prefixing the particle h] hǝ-. Forms:
(a) ha- before consonant + ǝ: bt'k]h' ha-kǝtab did he write?; lz"a]h' ha-ʔǝzal did he go?
The ǝ may be lost (but never after Gutturals): bt'kh' ha-ktab did he write?
(b) hǝ- elsewhere: ˚yreb;h] hǝ-bārek did he bless?

14.4 The Inflection of ba' ʔab and ja' ʔaḥ

The nouns ba' ʔab (father) and ja' ʔaḥ (brother) have the following singular forms with
the pronominal suffixes:
ab;a' ʔabbā an:wbua] ʔǝbúnā yjia/' yjia] ʔǝḥi/ˀaḥi an:wjua] ʔǝḥúnā
˚wbua] ʔǝbuk ˜wkowbua] ʔǝbukon ˚wjua] ʔǝḥuk ˜wkowjua] ʔǝḥukon
˚yIwbua] ʔǝbúyik ˜ykewbua] ʔǝbuken ˚yIwjua] ʔǝḥúyik ˜ykewjua] ʔǝḥuken
yhiwbua] ʔǝbúhi ˜whowbua] ʔǝbuhon yhiwjua] ʔǝḥúhi ˜whowjua] ʔǝḥuhon
ah;wbua] ʔǝbúhā ˜yhewbua] ʔǝbuhen ah;wjua] ʔǝḥúhā ˜yhewjua] ʔǝḥuhen
The construct form of these two nouns is not normally used; ‘the father of Abraham’,
for example, is expressed as µh;r;ba'd] yhiwbua] ʔǝbúhi dǝ-ʔabrāhām, using the construction
mentioned in §9.4; this same construction is also used for ja' ʔaḥ.
The plural of ba' ʔab is at;h;b;a] ʔǝbāhātā, inflected normally (e.g., ytiih;b;a] ʔǝbāhāti my
fathers).
The plural of ja' ʔaḥ is ay:j'a' ʔaḥayyā (with virtually doubled ḥ); it shows the same
irregularities with pronominal suffixes as are found in Hebrew:
yj'a/] yj'a' ʔaḥay/ʔǝḥay an:j'a/] an:j'a' ʔaḥánā/ʔǝḥánā
˚j;a/] ˚j;a' ʔaḥāk/ʔǝḥāk ˜wkoyjea] ʔǝḥekon
˚j'a' ʔaḥak ˜ykeyjea] ʔǝḥeken
yhiwjoa/' yhiwjoa] ʔǝḥóhi/ʔaḥóhi ˜whoyjea] ʔǝḥehon
ah;j'a' ʔaḥáhā ˜yheyjea] ʔǝḥehen

Vocabulary 14
Verbs:
yzija' ʔaḥzi C to show, cause to see.
˜yseja' ʔaḥsen C to take possession of (usually: the land); to bequeath, hand on (X to
Y: yāt X lǝ-Y or yāt Y yāt X).
ywila' ʔalwi C to accompany.
rb'[a' ʔaʕbar (also written rb'[]a' ʔaʕǝbar) C to lead/take across.
jl'pa' ʔaplaḥ C make (someone) work, reduce to servitude.
çyrepa' ʔapreš C to divide, separate.
µydeqa' ʔaqdem C to do something early or first (usually + bǝ-ṣaprā, followed by a
second coordinate verb: e.g., qp'nwu ar;px'b] µydeqa'w} wǝ-ʔaqdem bǝ-ṣaprā u-
 LESSON FOURTEEN 41

npaq and he went forth early in the morning); the verb alone may mean ‘to
go early’.
jk'ça' ʔaškaḥ C to find, come upon.
[m'ça' ʔašmaʕ C to cause to hear/obey, to announce, proclaim.
yqiça' ʔašqi C to cause to drink; to water (e.g., animals).
a[;f] ṭǝʕā G to wander, go astray; y[ifa' ʔaṭʕi C to lead astray.

Nouns:
at;n}s;ja' ʔaḥsānǝtā possession, inheritance.
ar;mj' ḥamrā (cstr. rm'j] ḥǝmar) wine.
ak;wçoj] ḥǝšokā darkness.
am;m;y} yǝmāmā daylight.
ar;whon} nǝhorā light.

Exercises
A.
1. Rǝdap bātar ʔǝbúhi. 2. ha-ʔǝkalt yāt mekal ʔǝḥúyik? 3. Nǝṭáru yāt dǝhab ʔǝbuhon. 4.
Rǝháṭat lǝ-qaddāmut ʔǝbúhā. 5. ʔillen pitgāme ʔǝbāhātánā.

ah;wbua] twmud;q'l] tf'h'r] 4 ˜whowbua] bh'd] ty: wrufn' } 3 ˚yiwjua] lk'yme ty: tlk'a]h' 2 yhiwbua] rt'b; πd'r] 1
an:t'h;b;a] ymeg:tpi ˜yleyai 5

B.
yja µdq ˜m adjl tylyjd 4 ˜wkwja ty ˜wtqbçh 3 yhwja µ[ µyq tyrzg 2 ˜whwja ty wrsm 1
˚wbad yhwja rb ty tlfq aml 5

C.
1. ʔǝténā lǝ-ʔaḥsānā yāt ʔarʕā. 2. ʔaqdímu wa-ʔǝzálu lǝ-hekǝlā. 3. ʔapreš Yy ben ḥǝšokā
u-ben nǝhorā. 4. ʔapláḥu yāt bǝne Yiśrāʔel. 5. Lā yǝkélit lǝ-ʔaškāḥā yāt ḥamrā. 6. ʔaʕbar
yāt ʕammā yāt nahrā. 7. ʔaḥzi yāteh yāt kokǝbe šǝmayyā. 8. ʔalwíʔu yātǝhon ʕad nahrā.
9. Qǝrā Yy li-nhorā yǝmāmā wǝ-la-ḥšokā qǝrā lelǝyā. 10. ʔašqíʔā yāt ʔǝbuhen yāt ḥamrā.
11. Ṭǝʕāt ʔamtah bǝ-madbǝrā. 12. Lǝmā ʔaṭʕit yāt ʕammi? 13. ʔaqdémit bǝ-ṣaprā u-
mallélit ʕim ʔabbā.

wjul'pa' 4 ar;whon} ˜ybewU ak;wçoj] ˜ybe yy çyrepa' 3 al;k]yhel] wluz"a]w" wmuydiqa' 2 a[;ra' ty: an:s;ja'l] an:ytea] 1
ybek]wko ty: hytey: yzija' 7 ar;hn" ty: am;[' ty: rb'[a' 6 ar;mj' ty: aj;k;ça'l] tyliykey} al; 5 laer;çyi ynEb] ty:
ty: ha;yqiça' 10 ay:l]yle ar;q] ak;wçojl'w} am;m;y} ar;whonli yy ar;q] 9 ar;hn" d[' ˜whot]y: wauywila' 8 ay:mç ' ]
tyliylem'wU ar;px'b] tymiydeqa' 13 ymi[' ty: ty[ifa' am;l] 12 ar;b]dm'b] ht'ma' t[;f] 11 ar;mj' ty: ˜yhewbua]
ab;a' µ[i
42 LESSON FOURTEEN

D.
arhn ty rb[ml wlyky al 3 ˚wjal ˜ydh armj ty tynybz 2 ˜wkwba tnsja ty ˜wtlybj aml 1
˜whylmg ty haqçal wayrç 6 hym[ ty ˜wtjlpa aml 5 a[rab ˜wkty rb[a ˜m 4 akwçjb
˜wknbrwq ty ˜wtbyrq al am l[ 9 hytkrb ylym ty ˜whty [mça 8 ˜mt ywçd ajbdm ty anjkça 7
yn[ ty haqçalm yty w[nm 12 ˜wktwawlal anty qbç al 11 awhh amwyb aklm ylxd atwlx adw 10
 LESSON FIFTEEN

15.1 C Verbs: the Perfect (continued)

Further modifications for various root types:

(a) Verbs from roots I–n show regular assimilation of the n:
G qp'n} nǝpaq → C qypea' ʔappeq to bring/lead/send/take forth.
Also to this group belongs
G qyles] sǝleq → C qysea' ʔasseq to bring/lead/send/take up.
The C verb corresponding to G tj'n} nǝḥat (with II–Guttural) has alternate forms:
C tyjea' ʔaḥet (with ḥ virtually doubled) or C tyjea] ʔǝḥet (inflected like Hollow
roots; see c, below) to bring/lead/send/take down.
(b) C verbs from most roots I–ʔ and I–y have initial ʔo-:
G lk'a] ʔǝkal → C lykewao ʔokel to cause to eat, feed;
G bytey} yǝteb → C bytewao ʔoteb to cause to dwell, settle.
The C verb corresponding to G [d'y} yǝdaʕ is regularly [d'who hodaʕ (to inform, cause to
know), but [d'wao ʔodaʕ is also found.
From a root I–y and III–Weak there is yjiwao ʔoḥi to hurry, hasten.
The C verb corresponding to G at;a] ʔǝtā varies in form from text to text: ytiya' ʔayti or
ytiyae ʔeti to bring.
(c) C verbs from Hollow roots have the following forms:
G tymi mit → C tymea'÷tymea] ʔǝmet/ʔamet to put to death, kill;
G µq; qām → C µyqea'÷µyqea] ʔǝqem/ʔaqem to establish;
G bt; tāb → C bytea'÷bytea] ʔǝteb/ʔateb to bring/lead/send/take back.
(d) The C verb from the Geminate root l[' ʕal (to enter) varies between ly[ea' ʔaʕel (with
ʕ virtually doubled) and ly[ea] ʔǝʕel (Hollow root type) to bring/lead/send/take in.

None of these forms offers any difficulty in inflection, which is determined by the final
stem syllable:
like çyrepa' ʔapreš: qypea' ʔappeq, qysea' ʔasseq, tyjea/] tyjea' ʔaḥet/ʔǝḥet, lykewao ʔokel, bytewao
ʔoteb, tymea] ʔǝmet, µyqea] ʔǝqem, bytea] ʔǝteb, ly[ea]/ly[ea' ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel;
like [m'ça' ʔašmaʕ: [d'wao/[d'who hodaʕ/ʔodaʕ;
like yzIja' ʔaḥzi: yjiwao ʔoḥi, ytiyae/ytiya' ʔayti/ʔeti.

The infinitives of the preceding types are as follows:

I–n: qypea' ʔappeq aq;p;a' ʔappāqā
qysea' ʔasseq aq;s;a' ʔassāqā
tyjea' ʔaḥet at;j;a' ʔaḥātā
44 LESSON FIFTEEN

I–ʔ: lykewao ʔokel al;k;wao ʔokālā

I–y: bytewao ʔoteb ab;t;wao ʔotābā
[d'who hodaʕ a[;d;who hodāʕā
yjiwao ʔoḥi ha;j;wao ʔoḥāʔā
ytiya' ʔayti ha;t;ya' ʔaytāʔā
Hollow: tymea] ʔǝmet at;m;a/; at;m;a] ʔǝmātā/ʔāmātā
µyqea] ʔǝqem am;q;a/; am;q;a] ʔǝqāmā/ʔāqāmā
bytea] ʔǝteb ab;t;a/; ab;t;a] ʔǝtābā/ʔātābā
Geminate: ly[ea' ʔaʕel al;[;a' ʔaʕālā

Vocabulary 15
Verbs:
yjiwao ʔoḥi C to hurry, go hurriedly; to hurry (to do: lǝ- + infinitive).
bytewao ʔoteb C to cause to dwell, settle.
tyjea]÷tyjea' ʔaḥet/ʔǝḥet C to bring/lead/send/take down.
ytiyae/ytiya' ʔayti/ʔeti C to cause to come, to bring.
tymea'÷tymea] ʔǝmet/ʔamet C to cause to die, put to death.
qysea' ʔasseq C to bring/lead/send/take up.
ly[ea]÷ly[ea' ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel C to cause to enter; to bring/lead/send/take in.
qypea' ʔappeq C to bring/lead/send/take forth; to produce.
µyqea'÷µyqea] ʔǝqem/ʔaqem C to cause to stand, station; to set up, establish.
bytea'÷bytea] ʔǝteb/ʔateb C to bring/lead/send/take back; to answer (a person: yāt).
[d'wao/[d'who hodaʕ/ʔodaʕ C to cause to know, inform (someone: yāt) of/about (something:
yāt).

Nouns:
ad;g"zai ʔizgaddā (pl. -ayyā) (ordinary) messenger.
aç;t;km' maktāšā (cstr. çt;km' maktāš; pl. -ayyā) plague, affliction.
ak;a]lm' malʔǝkā (pl. -ayyā) angel, divine messenger.

Exercises
A.
1. ʔappíqu yāteh lǝ-mib-bārā lǝ-qartā wa-ʔǝmítu yāteh tammān. 2. Wa-ʔǝqem yāt
gubrayyā tammān lǝ-miṭṭar yāt qinyānā. 3. Wa-hwāh bātar di-tqep kapnā, wǝ-ʔaḥet yāt
bǝnóhi lǝ-Miṣráyim lǝ-mizban mekǝlā mit-tammān. 4. Wa-ʔǝteb yāt ʔǝbúhi wa-ʔǝmar: Lā
ʔaṭʕíti yāt ʔaḥay. 5. Wa-ʔǝtíbā yāt bǝnehen lǝ-qartā. 6. ʔasseq Yy yātánā me-ʔarʕā dǝ-
Miṣráyim wǝ-ʔoteb yātánā bǝ-ʔarʕā hādā. 7. ʔoḥi ʔizgaddā lǝ-hodāʕā yāt malkā yāt
pitgāmā hāden. 8. lǝmā ʔaytitun yāt maktāšā hāden ʕǝlánā? 9. ʔaʕel yātǝhon lǝ-hekǝlā
wa-ʔǝqem yātǝhon qǝdām malkā. 10. ʔoḥíʔat ʔittǝteh lǝ-maʕbad yāt mekǝlā. 11. Dā́ nu yāt
 LESSON FIFTEEN 45

ʕulemā wa-ʔǝmítu yāteh. 12. ʔappéqit yāt ʕabdi mib-betā. 13. Lǝmā ʔaʕeltun yāt
ʔizgaddayyā hāʔillen lǝ-qartánā? 14. ʔoteb yāt ʕammā bǝ-qirwe mešǝrā. 15. ʔoḥit lǝ-
mezal lǝ-mib-bārā lǝ-qaddāmutǝhon. 16. Yǝhábit lǝkon yāt ʔarʕā hādā lǝ-ʔaḥsānutah. 17.
Šǝmaʕ yāt pitgāmay wǝ-lā ʔǝteb yāti. 18. ʔǝqem Yy yāt qǝyāmā hāden ʕimmánā wǝ-ʕim
bǝnánā. 19. ʔaqdémat bǝ-ṣaprā wǝ-ʔoḥíʔat lǝ-ʔaškāḥā yāt baʕlah. 20. Wa-hwāh kad tǝqep
maktāšā u-mítu kol ʕammā.

rt'b; hw:hw" 3 an:y:nqi ty: rf'mil] ˜m;t' ay:r'bwgu ty: µyqeaw] " 2 ˜m;t' hytey: wtuymia]w" at;rq'l] ar;b;mil] hytey: wquypia' 1
yj'a' ty: ytiy[ifa' al; rm'a]w" yhiwbua] ty: bytea]w" 4 ˜m;t'mi al;k]yme ˜b'zmil] µyir'xmil] yhiwnob] ty: tyjea'w} an:pk' πyqetdi
ad;g"zai yjiwao 7 ad;h; a[;ra'b] an:t'y: bytewaow} µyir'xmid] a[;ra'me an:ty' : yy qysea' 6 at;rq'l] ˜yheyneb] ty: ab;ytia]w" 5
al;k]yhel] ˜whot]y: ly[ea' 9 an:l[' ] ˜ydeh; aç;t;km' ty: ˜wtuytiya' am;l] 8 ˜ydeh; am;g:tpi ty: ak;lm' ty: a[;d;whol]
hytey: wtuymia]w" am;ylew[u ty: wnud; 11 al;k]yme ty: db'[m'l] hytet]ai ta'yjiwao 10 ak;lm' µd;q] ˜whot]y: µyqea]w"
ywerqib] am;[' ty: bytewao 14 an:t'rq'l] ˜yleyaih; ay:d'g"zai ty: ˜wtuly[ea' am;l] 13 at;ybemi ydib[' ty: tyqiypea' 12
ty: [m'ç] 17 ht'wnus;ja'l] ad;h; a[;ra' ty: ˜wkol] tybih'y} 16 ˜whot]wmud;q'l] ar;b;mil] lz"ymel] tyjiwao 15 ar;ç]yme
aj;k;ça'l] ta'yjiwaow} ar;px'b] tm'ydeqa' 19 an:n"b] µ[iw} an:m'[i ˜ydeh; am;y:q] ty: yy µyqea] 18 ytiy: bytea] al;w} ym'g:tpi
am;[' lko wtuymiwu aç;t;km' πyqet] dk' hw:hw" 20 hl'[b' ty:

B.
lyky alw adjl bys 3 atrql arbml aykalm hyty waywlaw 2 amwrdm ˜ydh armj ty waytya 1
awhh aklm ydgza ty tyma aml 5 yhwja µ[ ˜mtm hyty wqysa 4 hajwal
 LESSON SIXTEEN

16.1 The Absolute State

Summary table of nouns states:

Masculine Feminine Fem. Abstract

Singular Absolute µg:tpi pitgām ak;lm' malkā wkulm' malku
Construct µg:tpi pitgām tk'lm' malkat twkulm' malkut
Emphatic am;g:tpi pitgāmā at;k]lm' malkǝtā at;wkulm' malkutā

Plural Absolute ˜ymig:tpi pitgāmin ˜k;lm' malkān

Construct ymeg:tpi pitgāme tk;lm' malkāt
Emphatic ay:m'g:tpi pitgāmayyā at;k;lm' malkātā

Note the following features of the form of the absolute state:

Masc. sing.: the -ā of the emphatic form is dropped. The absolute form is therefore
identical to the construct form, including the irregularities discussed in §9.3.
Masc. pl.: the -ayyā of the emphatic form is replaced by -in.
Fem. sing.: the -(ǝ)tā of the emphatic is replaced by -ā. Feminine nouns in -utā, -itā, and
-otā simply drop the -tā: at;wkulm' malkutā → wkulm' malku; at;wlox] ṣǝlotā → wlox]
ṣǝlo. Cf. the forms wtuyai ʔittu and whuma' ʔamhu already introduced.
Fem. pl.: the -ātā of the emphatic form is replaced by -ān.

The distinction between the use of the emphatic and absolute forms is a difficult
problem. In general, the following rules will account for the majority of occurrences:
(a) In the plural, emphatic and absolute correspond to definite and indefinite respective-
ly in English: ay:m'g:tpi pitgāmayyā the words; ˜ymig:tpi pitgāmin words.
(b) In the singular the situation is much more complicated:
(1) Collective nouns, singular in form but plural in meaning, imitate the use of the
plural: am;[' ʕammā the people, the nation; µ[' ʕam a people, a nation.
(2) Nouns used in a generic sense usually occur only in the emphatic form: ar;whon}
nǝhorā light; ak;wçoj] ḥǝšokā darkness.
(3) Otherwise—and this includes the majority of nouns—the emphatic form is used
for both the definite and the indefinite noun, providing that by indefinite we mean ‘a
single, specific, previously unmentioned X’. Thus, am;g:tpi pitgāmā the word, a word;
aj;b]dm' madbǝḥā the altar, an altar.
Fem. sing. nouns are nearly always in the emphatic form. But with masc. sg.
nouns, the absolute form may be used for the indefinite, especially if the sense is ‘any,
 LESSON SIXTEEN 47

any . . . at all’. It thus tends to occur commonly with certain classes of words (e.g., rb'g}
gǝbar any man = anyone) and in certain types of constructions, especially lists, negations,
and adverbial phrases (e.g., wloxbi bi-ṣlo in prayer). Indefinite nouns with an attributive
adjective also tend to be in the absolute form: πyqit' ˚l'm' málak taqqip a strong king.
The foregoing rules are subject to exceptions, usually idiomatic with given lexical
items. Also, the distinction between the generic and collective uses of a noun is often
blurred, with resulting inconsistency in usage.

16.2 The Cardinal Numbers

The cardinal numbers from one to ten have separate forms for modifying masculine and
feminine nouns:
With Masculine Nouns With Feminine Nouns
one dj' ḥad ad;j] ḥǝdā
two ˜yret] tǝren ˜ytert' tarten
three ht;l;t] tǝlātāh tl;t] tǝlāt
four h[;b]ra' ʔarbǝʕāh [b'ra' ʔarbaʕ
five hç;mj' ḥamšāh çymej] ḥǝmeš
six ht;yçi šittāh tyçe šet
seven h[;bçi/h[;bç' šabʕāh/šibʕāh [b'ç] šǝbaʕ
eight hy:n}m;t] tǝmānǝyāh ynem;t] tǝmāne (usu. written ynemt' tamne)
nine h[;çti tišʕāh [ç't] tǝšaʕ
ten hr'ç['÷hr;s[' ʕasrāh rç'[]÷rs'[] ʕǝsar

The forms that modify masc. nouns are normally spelled with final h (rather than a), a
relic of an older orthography. The forms of ‘ten’ are usually written with s, less often
with ç.
The numbers from ‘two’ onward are usually followed by the absolute plural form of the
noun
˜yribg" hç;mj' ḥamšāh gabrin five men;
˜yçin} çymej] ḥǝmeš nǝšin five women;
˜r;wto çymej] ḥǝmeš torān five cows.
The emphatic form is used, however, when a definite sense is required:
ay:r'bg" hç;mj' ḥamšāh gabrayyā the five men;
ay:ç'n} çymej] ḥǝmeš nǝšayyā the five women.
The number ‘one’ follows its noun, which usually stands in the emphatic form (but the
absolute form of the noun is occasionally also found):
ad;j] at;rq' qartā ḥǝdā one city;
dj' al;mg" gamlā ḥad one camel.
48 LESSON SIXTEEN

For reference, the first few ‘teens’ are:

With Masculine Nouns With Feminine Nouns
eleven rs'[] dj' ḥad ʕəsar yres[' ad;j] ḥǝdā ʕasre
twelve rs'[] yret] tǝre ʕəsar yres[' at'rt' tarta ʕasre
thirteen rs'[] tl;t] tǝlāt ʕəsar yres[' tl;t] tǝlāt ʕasre
fourteen rs'[] t['b]ra' ʔarbəʕat ʕəsar yres[' [b'ra' ʔarbaʕ ʕasre

These are also usually followed by plural nouns: ay:f'bçi rs'[] yretli ˜m;q; yres[' at'rt' tarta ʕasre
qāmān li-tre ʕəsar šibṭayyā twelve pillars (fem. pl. abs.) for the twelve tribes (masc. pl.
emph.) (Exod 24:4).

Vocabulary 16
Verb:
dyley} yǝled (infin. dl'yme melad) G to bear (a child); dylewao ʔoled C to beget.

Noun:
ay:lyle lelǝyā night (Vocabulary 7); note the pl. abs. ˜w:l;yle lelāwān.
at;ç' šattā (f.; abs. an:ç] šǝnā; pl. abs. ˜ynIç] šǝnin; emph. ay:n"ç] šǝnayyā) year.

Exercises
A.
˜ykalm htlt 6 ˜yçtkm h[bç 5 ˜ywrq ˜ytrt 4 ˜ydgza ˜yrt 3 adj atrbw dj arb 2 adj atç 1
˜ybkwk hrs[ 12 ˜ymwy h[bra 11 ayryb tlt 10 ˜krb ˜ytrt 9 ˜yja hynmt 8 ˜yrwhn ˜yrt 7
˜rwt [çt 18 ˜ynç ynmt 17 ˜yçn [bç 16 ˜mylw[ çymj 15 ˜ymylw[ hçmj 14 ˜ylqj hçmj 13
˜wlyl htlt 21 ˜nta tyç 20 ˜hmç htyç 19
B.
1. Hǝwo lǝ-ʔabrām ʕān wǝ-torin wa-ḥmārin wǝ-ʕabdin wǝ-ʔamhān wa-ʔǝtānān wǝ-
gamlin. 2. Šǝlaḥ lǝwāteh ʔizgaddin. 3. ʔoled bǝnin u-bnān. 4. Lā ʔǝmítu gǝbar bǝ-šattā
hāhiʔ. 5. Lā ʔǝmárit leh pitgāmā ḥad. 6. ʔǝqímu gabrin ʕǝlóhi lǝ-miṭṭar yāteh. 7. Šǝlaḥ
maktāšin ʕǝlehon. 8. Ḥǝdi kad ḥǝzā yāt bǝrā d-ilédat leh ʔittǝteh. 9. ʔaytit leh ʕabdin wǝ-
gamlin. 10. ʔaḥet tǝren ʕulemin lǝ-nahrā la-ʔǝtābā mayyā mit-tammān. 11. ʔapreš benánā
u-benehon, wǝ-ʔoteb yātǝhon tammān. 12. Mǝnaʕ yātǝhen mil-lǝ-qārābā qurbānin. 13.
Ḥabbélnā yāt ḥǝmeš qirwayyā. 14. Zabbénit tǝren torin la-ʔǝḥúhi da-ʔǝbúhi. 15. Bǝno
tammān tǝlātāh madbǝḥin. 16. Yǝtíbu tammān ʕǝsar šǝnin.

al; 4 ˜n:bwu ˜ynib] dylewao 3 ˜ydig"zai hytewl: ] jl'ç] 2 ˜ylimg"w} ˜n:t;a]w" ˜h;ma'w} ˜ydib['w} ˜yrim;jw' ˜yriwtow} ˜[; µr;ba'l] wwoh] 1
jl'ç] 7 hytey: rf'ymil] yhiwlo[] ˜yribg' wmuyqia] 6 dj' am;g:tpi hyle tyrim'a] al; 5 ayhih; at;ç'b] rb'g} wtuymia]
˜yret] tyjea' 10 ˜ylimg"w} ˜ydib[' hyle tytiya' 9 hytet]ai hyle td'yleydi ar;b] ty: az:j] dk' ydij] 8 ˜whoyle[] ˜yçit;km'
ab;rq; ;l]mi ˜yhet]y: [n"m] 12 ˜m;t' ˜whot]y: bytewaow} ˜whoyneybewu an:n"ybe çyrepa' 11 ˜m;t'mi ay:m' ab;t;a]l' ar;hn"l] ˜ymiylew[u
˜yjib]dm' ht;l;t] ˜m;t' wnob] 15 yhiwbua]d' yhiwjua]l' ˜yriwto ˜yret] tyniybez" 14 ay:w"rqi çymej] ty: an:lybej' 13 ˜ynib;rwqu
˜yniç] rs'[] ˜m;t' wbuytiy} 16
 LESSON SEVENTEEN

17.1 Adjectives
Adjectives occur in all three states, masculine and feminine. Thus, for rypiç' šappir- (good,
beautiful):
Masculine Feminine
Singular Plural Singular Plural
Absolute rypiç' šappir ˜yriypiç' šappirin ar;ypiç' šappirā ˜r;ypiç' šappirān
Construct rypiç' šappir yreypiç' šappire tr'ypiç' šappirat tr;ypiç' šappirāt
Emphatic ar;ypiç' šappirā ay:r'ypiç' šappirayyā at;r]ypiç' šappirǝtā at;r;ypiç' šappirātā

An attributive, or modifying, adjective follows its noun and agrees with it in number,
gender, and state (except for the construct; see below).
ar;ypiç' am;ylew[u ʕulemā šappirā the handsome boy;
at;r]ypiç' at;m]ylew[u ʕulemǝtā šappirǝtā the beautiful girl;
ha;ygis' am;[' ʕammā saggiʔā the numerous people;
ygis' µ[' ʕam saggi a numerous people;
at;b;f; ay:çn' } nǝšayyā ṭābātā the good women;
ay:b'f; ay:r'bg" gabrayyā ṭābayyā the good men.
A predicate adjective always stands in the absolute state and agrees with its noun in
number and gender:
bf; ak;lm' Malkā ṭāb. The king is good.
ab;f; at;k]lm' Malkǝtā ṭābā. The queen is good.
An attributive adjective modifying either noun in a construct phrase must stand after the
whole phrase:
aç;ybi ak;lm' ydeb[' ʕabde malkā bišā the servants of the wicked king;
ay:ç'ybi ak;lm' ydeb[' ʕabde malkā bišayyā the wicked servants of the king.
The construct state of adjectives is used only with a following qualifying noun, as in
wzUje tr'ypiç' at;t]yai ʔittǝtā šappirat ḥézu a woman beautiful in appearance.
Many adjectives have corresponding stative G verbs; the more important of these are
noted in the vocabularies.

17.2 The Existential Particles tyai ʔit and tyle let

The existential particle tyai ‘(there) is, are’ corresponds to BH vyE yēš:
ydiybi al;yje tyai ʔit ḥelā b-idi there is power in my hand.
With l], it may be translated ‘to have’:
50 LESSON SEVENTEEN

ygIs' yli tyaii ʔit li saggi I have much (lit.: there is to me much).
tyaii may take the pronominal suffixes that appear on plural nouns: yhwtoyaii ʔitóhi he is,
˜wkoyteyaii ʔitekon you (mp) are.
The negative is tyle let (there) is/are not, corresponding to BH ˜yae ʔên:
an:m'[i çn:a] tyle let ʔǝnāš ʕimmánā there is no man with us.
With a pronominal suffix, the form is Aty}l; lāyǝt-: yhiwtoy}l; am;ylew[u ʕulemā lāyǝtóhi the boy is
not (here).

Vocabulary 17
Noun:
an:y[e ʕenā (f.; pl. ay:n"y[e ʕenayyā) eye; well, spring; yney[eb] bǝ-ʕene in the eyes of, in the
opinion of.

Adjectives:
çybi biš bad, evil, wicked; çyaeb] bǝʔeš G to be/become/seem bad.
ry[ez} zǝʕer small.
td'j] ḥǝdat new (f. abs. at;dj' ḥadtā; emph. m. at;dj' ḥadtā, f. at;d'j] ḥǝdattā).
by:j' ḥayyāb wicked, evil, guilty of crime.
µykij' ḥakkim wise, clever.
bf; ṭāb good, just, pleasant.
ygis' saggi many, much, numerous; note: a final a reappears when any ending is
added, e.g., ms emph. ha;ygis' saggiʔā, mp abs. ˜yaiygis' saggiʔin; ygis] sǝgi G (conju-
gated like ydij] ḥǝdi) to be/become numerous.
ryti[' ʕattir rich; rt'[] ʕǝtar G to be/become rich.
br' rab great, big, important (sing. abs. f. ab;r' rabbā; emph. m. ab;r' rabbā, f. at;b]r'
rabbǝtā; pl. emph. m. ay:b'r]br' rabrǝbayyā, f. at;b;r]br' rabrǝbātā; abs. m. ˜ybir]br'
rabrǝbin, f. ˜b;r]br' rabrǝbān). As a noun ab;r' rabbā (pl. ay:b'r]br' rabrǝbayyā)
means ‘leader, prince, high official’.
rypiç' šappir beautiful, handsome, excellent; rp'ç] šǝpar G to be/become good.

Other:
tyai ʔit (there) is, are; with suffix yhwtoyaii ʔitóhi he is, etc.
tyle let (there) is/are not; with suffix yhitoy}l; lāyǝtóhi he is not, etc.

Exercises
A.
1. šattā ṭābǝtā 2. birkǝtā rabbǝtā 3. qartā ḥǝdattā 4. šǝbaʕ šǝnin ṭābān 5. nǝhorayyā
rabrǝbayyā 6. memǝrā bišā 7. maktāšā rabbā 8. berā zǝʕerǝtā 9. kokǝbā šappirā 10.
qurbānin saggiʔin.
aç;ybi ar;m]yme 6 ay:b'r]br' ay:rw' hon} 5 ˜b;f; ˜yniç] [b'ç] 4 at;d'j] at;rq' 3 at;b]r' at;k]rbi 2 at;b]f; at;ç' 1
˜yaiygis' ˜ynib;rwqu 10 ar;ypiç' ab;k]wko 9 at;ry] [ez} ar;ybe 8 ab;r' aç;t;km' 7
 LESSON SEVENTEEN 51

B.
˜ybrbr ˜hmç 6 atdj armj 5 ˜yaygs ˜yçtkm 4 ary[z amrk 3 atdj ajbdm 2 aybrbr aybrq 1
atbr atwklm 10 ˜rypç ˜nb 9 ˜yrypç ˜ynm 8 açyb arta 7

C.
1. ʕálnā lǝ-tarʕā rabbā dǝ-qartā. 2. Man ʕǝbad yāt mānā šappirā hāden? 3. Bǝʔeš pitgām
nǝbiyā bǝ-ʕene malkā. 4. Millekon ṭābān laḥdā. 5. Gǝzar qǝyām ḥǝdat ʕimmǝhon. 6.
Šǝpar memar ʔizgaddā bǝ-ʕene malkǝtā. 7. ʔǝmítu yāt ʔizgaddayyā ḥayyābayyā. 8. ʔǝteb
wa-ʔǝmar: Šappirin pitgāmak bǝ-ʕenay. 9. ʔǝqémat yāt ʕulemā bišā qǝdām ʔǝbúhi. 10.
ʔappíqu yāt gabrayyā bišayyā mig-gawwǝhon. 11. ʔaytíʔat yāt ʕulemā zǝʕerā lǝwāt
nǝbiyā bǝ-hekǝlā. 12. ʔapréšit ben ṭābayyā u-ben bišayyā. 13. ʔaḥzi yātǝhon yāt ʔarʕā
šappirǝtā. 14. Šawwi yātánā ʕam saggi bǝ-ʔarʕā. 15. ʔoteb yātǝhon bǝ-qirwin ḥadtān. 16.
Qǝnéti ḥǝmeš torān šappirān. 17. ʔaškáḥu yāt ʕabdā ḥayyābā bi-sṭar berā. 18. Yǝhab
gabrā ʕattirā yāt kol qinyāneh lǝ-malkā. 19. ʔit tišʕāh gubrin bǝ-qartā. 20. let beh mayyā.
˜wkoylemi 4 ak;lm' yney[eb] ay:bin} µg:tpi çyaeb] 3 ˜ydeh; ar;ypiç' an:m; ty: db'[] ˜m' 2 at;rq'd] ab;r' a[;rt'l] an:l[' 1
ay:b'y:j' ay:d'g"zai ty: wtuymia] 7 at;k]lm' ynEy[eb] ad;g"zyai rm'yme rp'ç] 6 ˜whom][i td'j] µy:q] rz"g} 5 ad;jl' ˜b;f;
ay:ç'ybi ay:r'bg" ty: wquypia' 10 yhiwbua] µd;q] aç;ybi am;ylew[u ty: tm'yqea] 9 yn"y[eb] ˚m'g:tpi ˜yriypiç' rm'a]w" bytea] 8
yzIja' 13 ay:ç'ybi ˜ybewU ay:b'f; ˜ybe tyçirepa' 12 al;k]yheb] ay:bin} tw:l] ar;y[ez} am;ylew[u ty: ta'ytiya' 11 ˜whow}g"mi
çymej] ytiyneq] 16 ˜t;dj' ˜ywirqib] ˜whot]y: bytewao 15 a[;ra'b] ygis' µ[' an:t'y: ywiç' 14 at;ry] piç' a[;ra' ty: ˜whot]y:
ak;lm'l] hynEy:nqi lko ty: ar;yti[' ar;bg' bh'y} 18 ar;ybe rf'sbi ab;yj: ' ad;b[' ty: wjuk'ça' 17 ˜r;ypiç' ˜r;wto
ay:m' hybe tyle 20 at;rq' wgOb] ˜yribwgu h[;çti tyai 19

D.
˜ybyj anywh 4 amykj aybn atrqb hwh 3 ˜wnyah aymwyb ryt[ ytywh al 2 ˜ydh amylw[ adjl µykj 1
hynynq lk ty hyrb tyryw aryt[ tym 6 ˜ymykjw ˜yrypç yhwnb wwh 5 am[ yny[b
 LESSON EIGHTEEN

18.1 G Verbs: the Active Participle

Participles are adjectives and, like other adjectives, they occur in all three states, mascu-
line and feminine. Thus, for bytek; kāteb (writing):
Masculine Feminine
Singular Plural Singular Plural
Absolute bytek; kāteb ˜ybit]k; kātǝbin ab;t]k; kātǝbā ˜b;t]k; kātǝbān
Construct bytek; kāteb ybet]k; kātǝbe tb't]k; kātǝbat tb;t]k; kātǝbāt
Emphatic ab;t]k; kātǝbā ay:b't]k; kātǝbayyā at;bytek; kātebtā at;b;t]k; kātǝbātā

Absolute forms of the G Participles of the various roots types:

Root type Masc. Sg. Fem. Sg. Masc. Pl. Fem. Pl.
Sound bytek; kāteb ab;t]k; kātǝbā ˜ybit]k; kātǝbin ˜b;t]k; kātǝbān
III–Guttural [m'ç; šāmaʕ a[;m]ç; šāmǝʕā ˜y[im]ç; šāmǝʕin ˜[;m]ç; šāmǝʕān
III–Weak yzej; ḥāze ay:z}j; ḥāzǝyā ˜z"j; ḥāzan ˜y:z}j; ḥāzǝyān
Hollow µyaeq; qāʔem am;y}q; qāyǝmā ˜ymiy}q; qāyǝmin ˜m;y}q; qāyǝmān
Geminate lyae[;÷lyle[; ʕālel/ʕāʔel al;[; ʕāllā ˜yli[; ʕāllin ˜l;[; ʕāllān
Notes:
(a) Verbs I–n, I–y, I–ʔ, I–Guttural and II–Guttural follow the sound type.
(b) Verbs III–Guttural also include III–r, e.g., rf'n: nāṭar guarding, rm'a; ʔāmar saying.
(c) In verbs III–Weak the original third radical -y- reappears in the feminine forms. Note
also the unusual masc. plural form ḥāzan. See Paradigm A.4 for all III–Weak forms.
(d) Note that Hollow verbs show ʔ before e (µyaeq; qāʔem), y before ǝ (˜ymiy}q; qāyǝmin, etc.).
(e) In Geminate roots, the masc. sg. is either regular (lyle[; ʕālel) or patterned after the
Hollow root form (lyae[; ʕāʔel); in the other forms, the -ǝ- between C2 and C3 is lost
(e.g., ʕālǝlin > ʕāllin).
The participles are normally employed as predicates of their respective clauses. They
may, however, be used attributively, where, like any other adjective, agreement with the
state of the noun modified is required, e.g.,
ab;t]k; ar;bg" gabrā kātǝbā the writing man;
at;bytek; at;t]yai ʔittǝtā kātebtā the writing woman.
These are unusual constructions, however, and alternate constructions with the relative
dǝ- and the absolute are preferred:
bytek;d] ar;bg" gabrā dǝ-kāteb;
ab;t]k;d] at;t]yai ʔittǝtā dǝ-kātǝbā.
 LESSON EIGHTEEN 53

dǝ- + Participle may also be used nominally, i.e., without an antecedent, in the sense of
‘the one who, those who’ as the subject or object of a clause:
qyles;d] dǝ-sāleq the one who is going up;
˜yqil]s;d] dǝ-sālǝqin those who are going up.
In general the active participle describes action in progress. In isolated sentences it
corresponds to the English present progressive, or to the immediate future (is about to ...),
or to a habitual form of any tense:
at;rq'mi ˜yqip]n: ay:r'bwgu Gubrayyā nāpǝqin miq-qartā. The men are leaving (are going
to leave, are about to leave, leave) the city.
Frequently, however, especially when translating Hebrew circumstantial clauses, a past
tense is required in English. Note the idiom involved with verbs of perception and the
particle ah; hā:
hytewmud;q'l] fyher; ar;bg" ah;w} az:j] Ḥǝzā wǝ-hā gabrā rāheṭ lǝ-qaddāmuteh. He saw a
man running to meet him.
A predicate complement is otherwise usually expressed with dǝ- or a circumstantial
clause:
ar;ybe rf'sbi µyaeq;d] ar;bg" ty: jk'ça' ʔaškaḥ yāt gabrā dǝ-qāʔem bi-sṭar berā.
or ar;ybe rf'sbi µyaeq; awhuw} ar;bg" ty: jk'ça' ʔaškaḥ yāt gabrā wǝ-huʔ qāʔem bi-sṭar berā.
He found the man standing beside the well.
An isolated sentence expressing progessive action in past time employs hw:h] hǝwāh plus
the participle:
µyir'xmil] ˜ytij]n: wwoh] Hǝwo nāḥǝtin lǝ-Miṣráyim. They were going (or: used to go)
down to Egypt.
The active participle is also used in translating the Hebrew idioms involving the notion of
‘gradually, steadily’:
am;wrod;l] lyfen:w} lyzea; µr;ba' lf'nwU U-nṭal Abrām ʔāzel wǝ-nāṭel lǝ-dāromā. And Abram
travelled gradually southward (Gen 12:9; Hebrew hB;g“N<h' ['/sn:w“ J/lh; µr;b]a' [S'YIw)" .

18.2 The Independent Pronouns

an:a] ʔǝnā I an:jn"a] ʔǝnáḥnā we
ta' ʔatt you (ms) ˜wtua' ʔattun you (mp)
ta' ʔatt you (fs) ˜ytia' ʔattin you (fp)
awhu huʔ he ˜wnUai ʔinnun they (m)
ayhi hiʔ she ˜ynIai ʔinnin they (f)
These pronouns are used mainly as the subjects of non-verbal clauses, i.e., clauses with
nominal, adverbial, adjectival, and participial predicates:
at;rq'b] an:jn"a] ʔǝnáḥnā bǝ-qartā. We are in the city.
54 LESSON EIGHTEEN

ar;ypiç' ta' ʔatt šappirā. You (fs) are beautiful.

ar;mj' ty: yteç; an:a] ʔǝnā šāte yāt ḥamrā. I am drinking the wine.
Third person forms may also appear as copulas when the predicate is a noun phrase:
ak;lm' awhu yjia] ʔǝḥi huʔ malkā My brother is king.
ar;ypiç' ayhi ta' ʔatt hiʔ šappirā You (fs) are beautiful.
Shortened forms of the 1st and 2nd person pronouns may be added directly to active
participles to form a participial inflection:
an:lykey: yākelnā I can, am able
an:yaed; dāʔennā I judge
an:[d'y: yādaʕnā I know ˜n"y[id]y: yādǝʕinnan we know
t['d]y: yādǝʕatt you (ms) know ˜wtuy[id]y: yādǝʕittun you (mp) know
(These forms are not very frequent, but appear to be proper to Targumic Aramaic and not
borrowings from other dialects.)

18.3 The ‘Tens’ and Higher Numbers

˜yriç['÷˜yris[' ʕasrin twenty ˜ytiçi šittin sixty
˜ytil;t] tǝlātin thirty ˜y[ibçi/˜y[ibç' šabʕin/šibʕin seventy
˜y[ib]ra' ʔarbǝʕin forty ˜n"m;t] tǝmānan eighty
˜yçimj' ḥamšin fifty ˜y[içti tišʕin ninety

ha;m] mǝʔāh hundred (f.) πl'a' ʔálap thousand

˜t'am; mā(ʔ)tan two hundred ˜ypila' h[;b]ra' ʔarbǝʕāh ʔalpin four thousand
ha;m] [b'ra' ʔarbaʕ mǝʔāh four hundred
The ‘tens’ are usually followed by pl. nouns: ˜ynIç] ˜yris[' ʕasrin šǝnin twenty years; ˜y[ib]ra'
˜w:l;yle ˜y[ib]ra'w} ˜ymim;y} ʔarbǝʕin yǝmāmin wǝ-ʔarbǝʕin lelāwān forty days and forty nights.

18.4 Gentilics and Other Adjectives in yÎ;/yÎ' -ay/-āy; Plurals in yÎE -e

Gentilics such as yr;xymi/yr'xymi Miṣray/Miṣrāy ‘Egyptian’ have the following forms:

Masc. Singular Masc. Plural Feminine Singular Fem. Plural
Abs. yr;xymi/yr'xymi Miṣray/āy ˜yair;xymi Miṣrāʔin ha;r;xymi Miṣrāʔā ˜a;r;xymi Miṣrāʔān
Cstr. yr;xymi/yr'xymi Miṣray/āy yaerx; ymi Miṣrāʔe — — — —
Emph. ha;r;xymi Miṣrāʔā yaerx; ymi Miṣrāʔe at;yrexymi Miṣretā at;y:r'xymi Miṣrayyātā
For the Fem. Sg. Emph., there also occur forms like at;yrixymi Miṣritā and at;yr;xymi Miṣrāytā;
for the Fem. Pl. Emph., also at;y:r;xymi Miṣrāyātā.
y may replace ʔ in all forms: e.g., Masc. Pl. Emph. yyErx; ymi Miṣrāye, Fem. Sg. Abs. ay:r;xymi
Miṣrāyā.
Note especially the Masc. Pl. Emph. in yÎE -e, which therefore has the same form as the
 LESSON EIGHTEEN 55

Cstr. This Emph. form is also found occasionally on other nouns and adjectives, usually
nonhuman referents; such plurals tend to be collective (a class of things), less definite,
and/or generic: e.g., ynEl;yai lwko kol ʔilāne ‘all the trees’; yrewto tore ‘cattle’; yrey[ezliw} ... yaeygIs'l] lǝ-
saggiʔe ... wǝ-li-zʕere ‘to the larger ones ... and to the smaller ones’.

Vocabulary 18
Verbs:
ay:j] ḥǝyā G to live, be alive; yj' ḥay (f. ay:j' ḥayyā; adj.) alive, living.
dyqep' paqqed D to command (usually followed by direct command using the
imperative [below, §19.1]; it may also be used in the sense ‘to put
someone (yāt) in charge of (ʕal)’).
Nouns:
aj;rwao ʔorḥā (occasionally aj;rwau ʔurḥā; f.; cst/abs. jr'wao ʔóraḥ; pl. abs. ˜j;rwao ʔorḥān)
way, road; conduct, behavior.
at;yr;wao ʔorāytā the Torah.
at;l]k' kallǝtā daughter-in-law.
aç;pn" napšā (abs./cstr. çp'n} nǝpaš; f.; pl. at;ç;pn" napšātā) soul, person.
ay:[]r; rāʕǝyā (cstr. y[er; rāʕe; pl. at;w:[]r; rāʕǝwātā) shepherd, herdsman; contrast with
the participle y[er; rāʕe (pl. ˜['r; rāʕan).

Names:
ha;n:[]n"k] Kǝnaʕǝnāʔā Canaanite, pl. yaen:[]n"k] Kǝnaʕǝnāʔe the Canaanites.
ha;r;xmi Miṣrāʔā Egyptian, pl. Miṣrāʔe the Egyptians.
ha;t;çlip] Pǝlištāʔā Philistine, pl. yaet;çlip] Pǝlištāʔe the Philistines.

Other:
˜ykeb] bǝken (adv.) at that time, in those days.
ah; hā (presentation particle, corresponding to Hebrew hNEhi hinnēh) now (then),
look, here (is/are).
d] am;k] kǝmā dǝ- (conj.) according as, as.
˜yqet; tāqen (adj.; f. an:q]t; tāqǝnā) good, proper, correct, in good order.
πyqit' taqqip (adj.; f. taqqipā) strong, powerful, severe. There is considerable con-
fusion in the texts among the forms taqqip (adj.), tāqep (participle), and
tǝqep (stative verb), all spelled πyqt. The feminine and plural forms are
distinct, however: taqqipā, tāqǝpā, tǝqépat. The same confusion prevails
with tāqen above. Blend forms such as taqqep and taqqen also occur, but
are probably incorrect.

Exercises
A.
1. kapnā taqqipā 2. napšā ḥayyǝtā 3. malkayyā taqqipayyā 4. ʔóraḥ tāqǝnā 5. mille
ʔorāytā hādā 6. ʕasrin gubrin 7. ʔarbǝʕin wa-ḥmeš napšān 8. tǝmānan u-tmānǝyāh
56 LESSON EIGHTEEN

gabrin 9. tišʕin u-tlāt ʔǝtānān 10. ʔorḥān tāqǝnān 11. Kallǝti šappirā laḥdā. 12. Hǝwo
Pǝlištāʔe bǝken bǝ-ʔarʕā. 13. Ḥǝyā mǝʔāh wǝ-ʕasrin šǝnin. 14. Lā ḥǝyā mātan šǝnin. 15.
Rāʕǝwāti gubrin bišin. 16. ʕǝraq bǝ-ʔóraḥ ṭurā. 17. Yādaʕnā ʔǝre bǝrāk ḥay. 18. Hā
ʔittǝtāk.
˜yribwgu ˜yris[' 6 ad;h; at;yr;wao ylemi 5 an:q]t; jr'wao 4 ay:p'yqit' ay:k'lm' 3 at;y}j' aç;pn" 2 ap;yqit' an:pk' 1
ar;ypiç' ytil]k' 11 ˜n:q]t; ˜j;rwao 10 ˜n:t;a] tl;twU ˜y[içyti 9 ˜yribg' hy:n}m;twU ˜n"m;t] 8 ˜ç;pn" çymejw" ˜y[ib]ra' 7
ytiw:[]r; 15 ˜yniç] ˜t'am; ay:j] al; 14 ˜yniç] ˜yris['w} ha;m] ay:j] 13 a[;ra'b] ˜ykeb] yaet;çlip] wwoh] 12 ad;jl'
.˚t;t]yai ah; 18 .yj' ˚r;b] yrea] an:[d'y: 17 ar;wfu jr'waob] qr'[] 16 ˜ycybi ˜yribwgu

B.
1. Lā hǝwāh yādaʕ ʔǝre mítat kallǝteh. 2. yādaʕnā ʔǝre ʔinnun ʔākǝlin tammān laḥmā. 3.
Hǝwo ʔāzǝlin bǝ-ʔóraḥ mešǝrā. 4. Ḥǝzā wǝ-hā tǝlātāh gubrin ʔātan lǝ-qaddāmuteh. 5. Mā
ʔatt bāne hākā? ʔǝnā bāne betā ḥadtā. 6. ʔǝnā gāzar yāt qǝyāmā hāden ʕimmǝkon wǝ-ʕim
bǝnekon. 7. Lǝ-ʔān ʔattun nāsǝbin yāt mekǝlā hāden? 8. ʔǝnā ʕārǝqā ʔǝre dāḥǝlā ʔǝnā
qǝdām baʕli. 9. Wa-hwo Miṣrāʔe dāḥǝqin yātǝhon. 10. Lǝmā ʔatt dāʔar hākā ʕimmánā?
11. Dāʔennā yātǝkon wǝ-yāt kol pitgāmekon. 12. Wǝ-ʔinnun hǝwo ḥādan ʕal pitgāmayyā
hāʔinnun. 13. Mā ʔattun ḥāzan qǝdāmekon bǝ-ʔorḥā? 14. Huʔ yāheb lánā mayyā u-
mekǝlā. 15. ʔaškáḥu yāt nǝbiyā wǝ-huʔ yāteb bi-traʕ qartā. 16. Hodáʕit yāteh ʔǝre bǝreh
māʔet. 17. Lā yǝkelnā lǝ-ʔaškāḥuteh. 18. Lā yākelnā lǝ-ʔaškāḥuteh. 19. Wa-hwáʔā kol
ʔorḥātǝhon tāqǝnān qǝdām Yy. 20. Hǝwénā nāḥǝtin lǝ-Miṣráyim. 21. Lā nāseb ʔǝnā yāt
qinyānāk. 22. Hā tārekt yāti me-ʔarʕā hādā. 23. ʔǝnā hā gāzar qǝyāmi ʕimmāk.
ar;ç]yme jr'waob] ˜yliz}a; wwoh] 3 am;jl' ˜m;t' ˜ylik]a; ˜wnuyai yrea] an:[d'y: 2 hytel]k' tt'ymi yrea] [d'y: hw:h] al; 1
ty: rz"g: an:a] 6 at;dj' at;ybe yneb; an:a] ak;h; yneb; ta' am; 5 hytewmud;q'l] ˜t'a; ˜yribwgu ht;l;t] ah;w} az:j] 4
µd;q] an:a] al;jd] ; yrea] aq;r][; an:a] 8 ˜ydeh; al;k]yme ty: ˜ybis]n: ˜wtua' ˜a;l] 7 ˜wkoyneb] µ[iw} ˜wkom][i ˜ydeh; am;y:q]
˜wkoymeg:tpi lko ty:w} ˜wkot]y: an:yaed; 11 an:m'[i ak;h; ra'd; ta' am;l] 10 ˜whot]y: ˜yqij]d; yaer;xmi wwohw" 9 yli[b'
al;k]ymewu ay:m' an:l' byhey: awhu 14 aj;rwaob] ˜wkoymed;q] ˜z"j; ˜wtua' am; 13 ˜wnuyaih; ay:m'g:tpi l[' ˜d'j; wwoh] ˜wnuyaiw} 12
hytewjuk;ça'l] an:lykey} al; 17 tyaem; hyreb] yrea] hytey: ty[id'who 16 at;rq' [r'tbi bytey: awhuw] ay:bni } ty: wjuk'ça' 15
bysen: al; 21 µyir'xmil] ˜ytij]n: an:yweh] 20 yy µd;q] ˜n:q]t; ˜whot]j;rwao lko ha;w"hw" 19 hytewjuk;ça'l] an:lykey: al; 18
˚m;y[i ymiy:q] rz"g: ah; an:a] 23 ad;h; a[;ra'me ytiy: tkyret; ah; 22 ˚n:y:nyqi ty: an:a]
C.
˜al 4 ˜whn[ ty ˜[r yhwja ˜a 3 armj ˜ytç anjna ˜ytç ˜yta am 2 yhwrtb ˜ypdr ˜wnya ahw azj 1
hyty waywlaw yhwl[ ˜yrbwg aklm dyqp 6 ˜whwba dyqpd amk ˜ydb[ wwh al 5 hytw[r ty jlç
atrql arbml
 LESSON NINETEEN

19.1 G Verbs: Imperfect and Imperative

(a) Sound Roots

(i) Perfect bt'k] kǝtab:
Imperfect*
3ms bwtokyI yiktob 3mp ˜wbut]kyI yiktǝbun
3fs bwtokti tiktob 3fp ˜b;t]kyI yiktǝbān
2ms bwtokti tiktob 2mp ˜wbut]kti tiktǝbun
2fs ˜ybit]kti tiktǝbin 2fp ˜b;t]kti tiktǝbān
1cs bwtokai ʔiktob** 1cp bwtoknI niktob
*Occasionally, the second vowel is u rather than o: bwtukyI yiktub, bwtukti tiktub.
**In some mss, the 1cs is written bwtoka' ʔaktob (reflecting Tiberian b/Tk]a), .
Imperative
ms bwtok] kǝtob mp wbuwtuk] kǝtúbu
fs ybiwtuk] kǝtúbi fp ab;wtuk] kǝtúbā

(ii) Perfect πyqet] tǝqep:

Imperfect
3ms πq'tyI yitqap 3mp ˜wpuq]tyI yitqǝpun
3fs πq'tti titqap 3fp ˜p;q]tyI yitqǝpān
2ms πq'tti titqap 2mp ˜wpuq]tti titqǝpun
2fs ˜ypiq]tti titqǝpin 2fp ˜p;q]tti titqǝpān
1cs πq'tai ʔitqap 1cp πq'tnI nitqap
Imperative
ms πq't] tǝqap mp wpuq't] tǝqápu
fs ypiq't] tǝqápi fp ap;q't] tǝqápā

Most active transitive verbs have -o- as the stem vowel of the Imperfect and Imperative;
most stative verbs have -a-. There is some mixing of types, however, as the following list
shows:
˜b'z} ~ ˜wbozyI zǝban ~ yizbon dygEs] ~ dwgOsyI sǝged ~ yisgod
bt'k] ~ bwtokyI kǝtab ~ yiktob bykeç] ~ bwkoçyI šǝkeb ~ yiškob
lf'q] ~ lwfoqyI qǝṭal ~ yiqṭol
πd'r] ~ πwdoryI rǝdap ~ yirdop byreq] ~ br'qyI qǝreb ~ yiqrab*
qb'ç] ~ qwboçyI šǝbaq ~ yišboq πyqet] ~ πq'tyI tǝqep ~ yitqap
sr'p] ~ syrepyI pǝras ~ yipres *Imperative sing. br'q] qǝrab, pl. wbuyriq] qǝríbu.
58 LESSON NINETEEN

(b) Roots II–Guttural, III–Guttural

Verbs from roots II–Guttural and III–Guttural (including III–r) have stem vowel -a-
in the Imperfect and the Imperative:
rz"g} ~ rz"gyI gǝzar ~ yigzar fh'r] ~ fh'ryI rǝhaṭ ~ yirhaṭ
rb'd] ~ rb'dyI dǝbar ~ yidbar jl'ç] ~ jl'çyI šǝlaḥ ~ yišlaḥ
rm'f] ~ rm'fyI ṭǝmar ~ yiṭmar [m'ç] ~ [m'çyI šǝmaʕ ~ yišmaʕ
[n"m] ~ [n"myI mǝnaʕ ~ yimnaʕ rb't] ~ rb'tyI tǝbar ~ yitbar
rs'm] ~ rs'myI mǝsar ~ yimsar
jl'p] ~ jl'pyI pǝlaḥ ~ yiplaḥ lyjed] ~ lj'dyI dǝḥel ~ yidḥal
jt'p] ~ jt'pyI pǝtaḥ ~ yiptaḥ µyjer] ~ µj'ryI rǝḥem ~ yirḥam
But note qj'd] ~ qwjodyI dǝḥaq ~ yidḥoq with Imperfect in -o-.

(c) Roots I–ḥ, I–h, and I–ʕ

Roots I–ḥ and I–h are essentially regular: ˚p'hyI yihpak.
Roots I–ʕ, however, require special note, especially the Imperative forms:
ʕǝbar: Imperfect
3ms rb'[yI yiʕbar 3mp ˜wrub][yI yiʕbǝrun
or rb'y[iyI yiʕibar or ˜wruby[iyI yiʕibrun
Imperative
ms rb'[] ʕǝbar mp wrub'[] ʕǝbáru
or rb'y[e ʕebar or wrub'y[e ʕebáru
or rb'y[i ʕibar
ʕǝbad: Imperfect (note -a- in the prefix, and stem vowel -e-)
3ms dybe[y" yaʕbed 3mp ˜wdub][y" yaʕbǝdun
Imperative
ms dybey[i ʕibed mp wduybi[] ʕǝbídu
or dybe[] ʕǝbed
ʕǝraq: Imperfect
3ms qwro[yI yiʕroq 3mp ˜wqur][yI yiʕrǝqun
or qwroy[iyI yiʕiroq or ˜wqury[iyI yiʕirqun

19.2 Uses of the Imperfect

(a) The Imperfect is most frequently used to express the future tense in both main and
subordinate clauses.
(b) If the context requires, the Imperfect may be translated as an injunctive, i.e.,
cohortative in the 1st person (e.g., ‘let us write’), jussive in the 3rd person (‘let him write’
‘may he write’).
 LESSON NINETEEN 59

(c) The negative Imperfect of the 2nd person is regularly used as the negative of the
Imperative (which itself may not be negated): bwtokti al; lā tiktob do not write.
(d) After the conjunctions d] lydib] bǝdil dǝ- (so that, in order that) and am;lydi dilmā (lest,
so that not), the Imperfect expresses purpose or result: bwtokyid] lydib] bǝdil dǝ-yiktob so that
he may write; bwtokyi am;lydi dilmā yiktob lest he write.
(e) Note that there are no “converted” tenses: bt'kwu u-ktab and he wrote; bwtoktiw} wǝ-tiktob
and she will write.

Vocabulary 19
Nouns:
aç;n:a] ʔǝnāšā (cstr./abs. çn:a] ʔǝnāš; pl. -ayyā, cstr. -e) man, men; the singular form
may be used as a collective term.
at;wxum' maṣṣutā (f.; abs. wxum' maṣṣu, cstr. twxum' maṣṣut) quarrel, strife.
at;j;a] ʔǝḥātā (cstr./abs. tj;a] ʔǝḥāt) sister; ‘my sister’ may appear as ytij;a] ʔǝḥāti or
tj;a] ʔǝḥāt; pl. at;w:j]a' ʔaḥ(ḥ)ǝwātā.

Other:
lydib] bǝdil (prep.; suffixes as on lǝwāt, §4.1) because of, for the sake of.
d] lydib] bǝdil dǝ- (conj.) so that, in order that (with Imperfect).
am;lydi dilmā (conj.) lest, so that not (with Imperfect).

Exercises
A.
1. Nirdop bātǝrehon bǝ-ṣaprā. 2. Yiqrǝbān lǝ-qartánā bǝ-ramšā. 3. Yiktob lánā. 4. Lā
ʔišboq yātik wǝ-yāt ʕammik. 5. Nǝḥítu lǝ-Miṣráyim bǝdil dǝ-yizbǝnun mekǝlā tammān.
6. Lā nisgod qǝdāmehon. 7. Niškob hākā ʕad ṣaprā. 8. Hǝwāt maṣṣutā ben ʔǝnāš beti lǝ-
ben ʔənāš beteh. 9. Yiplǝḥān qǝdām malkā hāhuʔ. 10. Nimsar yāteh bǝ-yad gabrayyā
hāˀinnun. 11. Lā tidbǝrān yāt ʔəḥātǝken ʕimmǝken. 12. Sǝgod qǝdāmóhi dilmā yitqap leh
wǝ-yiqṭol yātāk.

˚ymi[' ty:w} ˚ytiy: qwboçai al; 4 an:l' bwtokyi 3 aç;mr'b] an:t'rq'l] ˜b;r]qyi 2 ar;px'b] ˜whoyret]b; πwdorni 1
tw:h] 8 ar;px' d[' ak;h; bwkoçni 7 ˜whoymed;q] dwgosni al; 6 ˜m;t' al;k]yme ˜wnub]zyid] lydib] µyir'xmil] wtuyjin} 5
˜wnuyaih' ay:r'bg" dy"b] hytey: rs'mni 10 awhuh; ak;lm' µd;q] ˜j;l]pyi 9 hyteybe çn:a] ˜ybel] ytiybe çn:a] ˜ybe at;wxum'
˚t;y: lwfoqyiw} hyle πq'tyi am;lydi yhiwmod;q] dwgos] 12 ˜ykem]y[i ˜yket]j;a] ty: ˜r;b]dti al; 11

B.
al 5 ynb ymgtyp ty w[mç 4 ytrb ˜yljdt al 3 lzymlm anty [nmy al 2 anmy[ µyq ˜wrzgy 1
atbr atrql brqw arhnb rb[ 7 anty lwfqy amlyd qwr[n 6 ˜ylyah ayçyb aymgtyp ty ˜wdb[t
anm[ abrq ˜wdb[y 8
 LESSON TWENTY

20.1 G Verbs: Imperfect and Imperative (continued)

(d) Roots I–ʔ

These regularly have the preformative vowel -e- in the Imperfect. This vowel is
optionally transferred to the Imperative as well.
Perfect Imperfect (ms) Imperfect (mp) Imperative (ms)
dj'a] ʔǝḥad dwjoyyE yeḥod ˜wduj]yyE yeḥǝdun dwjoa] ʔǝḥod or dwjoyae ʔeḥod
mp wduwjua] ʔǝḥúdu / wduwjuyae ʔeḥúdu
lk'a] ʔǝkal lwkoyyE yekol ˜wluk]yyE yekǝlun lwkua] ʔǝkul or lwkuyae ʔekul
db'a] ʔǝbad db'yyE yebad ˜wdub]yyE yebǝdun
rm'a] ʔǝmar rm'yyE yemar ˜wrum]yyE yemǝrun rm'a] ʔǝmar or rm'yae ʔemar
rs'a] ʔǝsar rs'yyE yesar ˜wrus]yyE yesǝrun
lz"a] ʔǝzal lyzEyyE yezel ˜wluz}yyE yezǝlun lyzEyai ʔizel or lyzEyae ʔezel
mp wluyzIyai ʔizílu / wluyzIyae ʔezílu

(e) Roots I–n

These show regular assimilation of the -n- in the Imperfect, and a short Imperative
form without the first radical.
Perfect Imperfect (ms) Imperfect (mp) Impv (ms) Impv (mp)
lf'n} nǝṭal lwfoyI yiṭṭol ˜wluf]yI yiṭṭǝlun lwfo ṭol wluwfu ṭúlu
qp'n} nǝpaq qwpoyI yippoq ˜wqup]yI yippǝqun qwpo poq wquwpu púqu
bx'n} nǝṣab bwxoyI yiṣṣob ˜wbux]yI yiṣṣǝbun bwxo ṣob wbuwxu ṣúbu
tj'n} nǝḥat twjoyyE yeḥot ˜wtuj]yyE yeḥǝtun twjo ḥot wtuwju ḥútu
rf'n} nǝṭar rf'yI yiṭṭar ˜wruf]yI yiṭṭǝrun rf' ṭar wruf' ṭáru
bysen} nǝseb bs'yI yissab ˜wbus]yI yissǝbun bs' sab wbus' sábu
lp'n} nǝpal lypeyI yippel ˜wlup]yI yippǝlun
(bh'y} yǝhab) ˜yteyI yitten ˜wnUt]yI yittǝnun
qyles] sǝleq qs'yI yissaq ˜wqus]yI yissǝqun qs' saq wqus' sáqu
(f) Roots I–y
These constitute a very mixed group and should be learned individually.
Perfect Imperfect (ms) Imperfect (mp) Impv (ms) Impv (mp)
bytey} yǝteb byteyI yitteb ˜wbut]yI yittǝbun byti tib wbuyti tíbu
dyley} yǝled dyliy} yǝlid ˜wduyliy} yǝlidun
[d'y} yǝdaʕ [d'yI yiddaʕ ˜w[ud]yI yiddǝʕun [d' daʕ w[ud' dáʕu
bh'y} yǝhab — — — — bh' hab wbuh' hábu
tyrey} yǝret twroyye/tr'yyE yerat/yerot ˜wtur]yyE yerǝtun
lykey} yǝkel lwkoyI yikkol ˜wluk]yI yikkǝlun
 LESSON TWENTY 61

Vocabulary 20
Verb:
dç'a] ʔǝšad (imperf. dwçoyyE yešod) to pour out, shed, deposit.

Noun:
am;d] dǝmā (abs./cstr. µd') blood.

Other:
˜['k] kǝʕan (adv.) now, so now, now then.

Exercises
A.
1. Yebǝdān bǝ-ʔarʕā hāhiʔ. 2. U-kʕan nezel lǝ-hekǝlā. 3. ʔeḥúdi yāt daššā bātǝrak. 4. Lā
yekǝlun mil-laḥmā hāden. 5. Nesar yātǝkon dilmā tikkǝlun lǝ-miʕraq. 6. Mā nemar
lǝhon? 7. Sábu yāt laḥmā wǝ-hábu yāteh la-ʔənāše beteh. 8. Niktob lǝkon bǝdil dǝ-
tiddǝʕun yāt pitgāmayyā hāʔillen. 9. U-kʕan nitteb hākā wǝ-nekol. 10. Tib tammān wǝ-ṭar
yāt ʕānā. 11. Ḥúti lǝ-nahrā. 12. Niṭṭol bǝ-ṣaprā. 13. Lā tešǝdun dam ʔǝḥúnā.

˜ydeh; am;jl'mi ˜wluk]yyE al; 4 ˚r't]b; aç;d' ty: ydiwjuyae 3 al;k]yhel] lyzeyne ˜['kwu 2 ayhih; a[;ra'b] ˜d;b]yye 1
hyteybe yçen:a]l' hytey: wbuh'w} am;jl' ty: wbus' 7 ˜whol] rm'yne am; 6 qr'[ymil] ˜wluk]ti am;lydi ˜wkot]y: rs'yne 5
an:[; ty: rf'w} ˜m;t' byti 10 lwkoynew} ak;h; bytenI ˜['kwu 9 ˜yleyaih; ay:m'g:typi ty: ˜w[udy] tid] lydib] ˜wkol] bwtokni 8
an:wjua] µd' ˜wduç]yte al; 13 ar;px'b] lwfoyni 12 ar;hn"l] ytiwju 11

B.
al 5 antrq tyw anm[ ty qwbçn al ˜[kw 4 awhh abrqb lypy 3 ayrwfl wqs 2 ˜mt bytt al 1
ty ˜wbzyad lydb apsk ty yl bh 8 µyrxml ˜wtjyy 7 ynynyq ty tryy ˜m 6 atrql qsyml lwky
˜ylyah aynm
 LESSON TWENTY-ONE

21.1 G Verbs: Imperfect and Imperative (concluded)

(g) Roots III–Weak

All verbs from roots III–Weak are inflected alike; e.g., an:b:]
Imperfect
3ms ynEbyI yibne 3mp ˜wnObyI yibnon
3fs ynEbti tibne 3fp ˜y:n}byI yibnǝyān
2ms ynEbti tibne 2mp ˜wnObti tibnon
2fs ˜n'bti tibnan 2fp ˜y:n}bti tibnǝyān
1cs ynEbai ʔibne 1cp ynEbnI nibne
Imperative
ms ynIb]/ynEb] bǝne/bǝni mp wnOb] bǝno
fs an'b] bǝna fp ha;n"b] bǝnáʔā
Similarly from ydij] ḥǝdi: ydejyI yiḥde, ˜wdojyI yiḥdon, etc. The Imperfect of at;a] ʔǝtā is regular
(yteyyE yete, ˜wtoyyE yeton, etc.); the Imperative of at;a] ʔǝtā is ms at;yai ʔitā (also at;yae ʔetā), fs
at'yae ʔeta, mp wtoyae ʔeto.
The Imperfect of hw:h] hǝwāh is partly irregular:
3ms (ywEhyI) yhey} yǝhe (yihwe) 3mp ˜whoy} yǝhon
3fs (ywEhti) yhet] tǝhe (tihwe) 3fp ˜y:w}hyI yihwǝyān
2ms (ywEhti) yhet] tǝhe (tihwe) 2mp ˜whot] tǝhon
2fs ˜h't] tǝhan 2mp ˜y:w}hti tihwǝyān
1cs ywEhai÷yheyae ʔehe/ʔihwe 1cp yhen} nǝhe
The forms ywEhyI yihwe (3ms) and ywEhti tihwe (3fs, 2ms) are
quite rare; the 1cs variants occur about equally often.
Imperative
ms ywIh]/ywEh] hǝwe/hǝwi mp wwOh] hǝwo
fs yaiw"h/] yw'h/] aw'h] hǝwa/hǝway/hǝwáʔi fp [ha;w"h] hǝwáʔā]

(h) Hollow Roots

Most follow the pattern of µq; qām:
Imperfect
3ms µwquy} yǝqum 3mp ˜wmuwquy} yǝqumun
3fs µwqut] tǝqum 3fp ˜m;wquy} yǝqumān
2ms µwqut] tǝqum 2mp ˜wmuwqut] tǝqumun
2fs ˜ymiwqut] tǝqumin 2fp ˜m;wqut] tǝqumān
1cs µwqua] ʔǝqum 1cp µwqun} nǝqum
 LESSON TWENTY-ONE 63

Imperative
ms µwqu qum mp wmuwqu qúmu
fs ymiwqu qúmi fp am;wqu qúmā
Similarly rd; ~ rwduy} dār ~ yǝdur, bt; ~ bwtuy} tāb ~ yǝtub, tymi ~ twmuy} mit ~ yǝmut; but
with i in the imperfect: ˜d; ~ ˜ydiy} dān ~ yǝdin.

(i) Geminate Roots

Imperfect
3ms lw[oyyE yeʕol 3mp ˜wlu[]yyE yeʕǝlun
3fs lw[oyte teʕol 3fp ˜l;[]yyE yeʕǝlān
2ms lw[oyte teʕol 2mp ˜wlu[]yte teʕǝlun
2fs ˜yli[]yte teʕǝlin 2fp ˜l;[]yte teʕǝlān
1cs lw[oyae ʔeʕol 1cp lw[oynE neʕol
Imperative
ms lw[o ʕol mp wluw[u ʕúlu
fs yliw[u ʕúli fp al;w[u ʕúlā

Vocabulary 21
µai ʔim (conj.) if.

Exercises
A.
1. Yiḥdon kad yiḥzon yātāk. 2. Ḥútu lǝ-nahrā wǝ-lā tišton yāt mayyā. 3. ʔiqre lǝhon bǝ-
ṣaprā. 4. Neḥot lǝ-Miṣráyim bǝdil dǝ-niqne mekǝlā tammān. 5. Sáqu lǝ-qirwekon wǝ-tíbu
tammān ʕad ṣaprā. 6. Mǝne yāt kokǝbayyā ʔim tikkol lǝ-mimne yātǝhon. 7. Teton lǝ-
hekǝlā kad ʔiqre lǝ-kon. 8. W-ihe bǝ-yomā hāhuʔ u-the maṣṣutā benánā u-benehon. 9. ʔān
nirʕe yāt ʕānánā? 10. Ṣúbu ʔilānā bǝgo ginnǝtā. 11. ʔətub lǝ-ʔarʕi. 12. ʔitā lǝwāti bǝdil
da-ʔədin ʕal pitgāmāk.

lydib] µyir'xmil] twjoynE 4 ar;px'b] ˜whol] yreqyai 3 ay:m' ty: ˜wtoçti al;w} ar;hn"l] wtuwju 2 ˚t;y: ˜wzojyi dk' ˜wdojyi 1
˜whot]y: ynEmymil] lwkoti µai ay:b'kw] ko ty: ynEm] 6 ar;px' d[' ˜m;t' wbuytiw} ˜wkoywEryqil] wqus' 5 ˜m;t' al;ky] me ynEqynId]
an:n"[; ty: y[eryni ˜a; 9 ˜whoynEybewU an:n"ybe at;wxum' yhetwU awhuh; am;wyob] yheywi 8 ˜wkol] yreqai dk' al'k]yhel] ˜wtoyte 7
˚m;g:tpi l[' ˜ydia]d' lydib] ytiw:l] at;yai 12 y[ira'l] bwtua] 11 at;n}ygi wgob] an:l;yai wbuwxu 10

B.
lydb aylylb ˜wtyy 4 arwfl lyzynw µwqn 3 ˜mt twmyw hytrql bwty 2 adh aryb rfsyb yrçyn 1
˜wkrb ty yzjml ˜wkty ˜wqbçy al 7 aklh ˜ytyy aml 6 lzymlm anty [nmyml lwkt al 5 hyty ˜wdjyyd
hyty ˜nmtw apsk ty ˜ybsyt 8
 LESSON TWENTY-TWO

22.1 G Verbs: the Passive Participle

Associated with most transitive roots is a passive participle, the absolute forms of which
are as follows.
(a) Sound roots (bytik] kǝtib written):
ms bytik] kǝtib mp ˜ybiytik] kǝtibin
fs ab;ytik] kǝtibā fp ˜b;ytik] kǝtibān
(b) Roots III–Weak (yreq] qǝre called; see also Paradigm A.4, p. 76):
ms yreq] qǝre mp ˜r'q] qǝran
fs ay:rq' qaryā fp ˜y:rq' qaryān

22.2 D Verbs: Imperfect, Imperative, Participles

Below are presented the Imperfect, Imperative, and Active Participle of D verbs for
Sound roots (qabbel), roots III–Guttural and III–r (tabbar to shatter), roots II–r (qāreb),
and roots III–Weak (manni to appoint):
Perfect Imperfect Imperative Participle
lybeq' qabbel lybeq'y} yǝqabbel lybeq' qabbel lybeq'm] mǝqabbel
rb't' tabbar rb't'y} yǝtabbar rb't' tabbar rb't'm] mǝtabbar
byreq; qāreb byreqy} yǝqāreb byreq; qāreb byreq;m] mǝqāreb
ynIm' manni ynEm'y} yǝmanne ynIm' manni ynEm'm] mǝmanne
Inflection is normal throughout: vowel reduction in Imperfect (3mp ˜wlub]q'y} yǝqabbǝlun)
and Participle (mp ˜ylib]q'm] mǝqabbǝlin); e > i in Imperative (mp wlybiq' qabbílu).
Note that the Imperative masc. sg. of roots III–Weak is in -i; the rest of the forms are like
those of the G bǝne:
ms ynIm' manni mp wnOm' manno
fs an"m' manna fp ha;n"m' mannáʔā
The Passive Participle of D verbs is normally of the form lb'wqum] mǝqubbal: ˜q'wtum]
mǝtuqqan arranged, an'wmum] mǝmunna appointed; an uncommon byform is mǝqabbal, which
is however normal with roots II–Guttural and II–r, as in qj'r'm] mǝraḥ(ḥ)aq rejected, ˚r'b;m]
mǝbārak blessed.
The inflection of all participles in -e is like that of bāne: e.g.,
ms ynEm'm] mǝmanne mp ˜n"m'm] mǝmannan
fs ay:n}m'm] mǝmannǝyā fp ˜y:n}m'm] mǝmannǝyān

See Paradigm B.1 for all forms of the Sound verb, B.6 for III–Weak verbs.
 LESSON TWENTY-TWO 65

22.3 C Verbs: Imperfect, Imperative, Participles

Perfect Imperfect Imperative Participle
Sound çyrepa' ʔapreš çyrepy" yapreš çyrepa' ʔapreš çyrepm' mapreš
III–G jk'ça' ʔaškaḥ jk'çy" yaškaḥ jk'ça' ʔaškaḥ jk'çm' maškaḥ
I–n qypea' ʔappeq qypey" yappeq qypea' ʔappeq qypem' mappeq
I–ʔ lykewao ʔokel lykewyO yokel lykewao ʔokel lykewmo mokel
I–y dylewao ʔoled dylewyO yoled dylewao ʔoled dylewmo moled
III–Weak yzIja' ʔaḥzi yzEjy" yaḥze yzIja' ʔaḥzi yzEjm' maḥze
Hollow* µyqea] ʔǝqem µyqiy} yǝqim µyqea] ʔǝqem µyqim] mǝqim
Geminate* ly[ea' ʔaʕel ly[ey" yaʕel ly[ea' ʔaʕel ly[em' maʕel
*Hollow roots also appear with a or ā in the first syllable (Perf. µyqea' ʔaqem or µyqea; ʔāqem, etc.);
Geminate roots also appear with ǝ in the first syllable (Perf. ly[ea] ʔǝʕel, etc.; note also C Perf. rm'a'
ʔammar he made bitter, from m-r-r).
As in the D, inflection is normal throughout: vowel reduction in the Imperfect (3mp ˜wçur]py"
yaprǝšun) and Participle (mp ˜yçir]pm' maprǝšin); e > i in the Imperative (mp wçuyripa'
ʔapríšu). See Paradigms B.1–7.
There are two Passive Participles of the C, both uncommon: çr'pwmu mupraš, çr'pm' mapraš.

Vocabulary 22
Verb:
ywIj' ḥawwi D to tell, relate, inform (someone: lǝ-).

Noun:
am;l][; ʕālǝmā (abs./cstr. µl'[; ʕālam) world, eternity; am;l][; d[' ʕad ʕālǝmā forever.

Other:
πa' ʔap (adv.) also, likewise, even.

Exercises
A.
1. Rǝháṭat ʕulemətā wǝ-ḥawwíʔat lə-ʔimmah yāt pitgāmayyā hāʔillen. 2. Wa-ʔəmar
Ywy lə-ʔAbrām ʔizel me-ʔarʕāk u-mib-bet ʔəbuk lə-ʔarʕā dǝ-ʔaḥze yātāk. 3. U-
tḥawwon lǝ-ʔabbā yāt kol da-ḥzeton tammān. 4. Wǝ-ʔap ʔəteb leh malkā yāt kol
qinyāneh. 5. Wa-ʔəmar Ywy tappeq ʔarʕā napšā ḥayyǝtā.

a[;ra'l] ˚wbua] tybemiwU ˚[;ra'me lyzEyai µr;ba'l] ywy rm'a]w" 2 ˜yleyaih; ay:m'g:typi ty: hm'yail] ta'ywIj'w} at;m]ylew[u tf'h'r] 1
qypet' ywy rm'a]w" 5 hynEy:nyqi lwko ty: ak;lm' hyle bytea] πa'w} 4 ˜m;t' ˜wtoyzEjd' lwko ty: ab;a'l] ˜wwOj'twU 3 ˚t;y: yzEja'd]
at;y}j' aç;pn" a[;ra'
66 LESSON TWENTY-THREE

B.
aml[ d[ ˚nblw ˚l µyql ˜ydh amgtp ty ˜wrfytw 2 ˚wja ata al yra ˚l hawjl ydb[ ty tyjlç 1
˚rbm yhyw ˚rb ty ˚yrba 4 yl tywj al ta πaw ˜ydh amgtp ty db[ ˜m ty[dy al rmaw 3
 LESSON TWENTY-THREE

23.1 The -t- Verbs: Gt, Dt, Ct

Corresponding to most transitive G, D, and C verbs there are passive–reflexive verbs

marked by a prefixed -t-. The basic forms of these verbs from Sound Roots are:
Perfect Imperfect Imperative Participle
Gt (3)ms lyfeq]tai ʔitqǝṭel lyfeq]tyI yitqǝṭel lyfeq]tai ʔitqǝṭel lyfeq]tmi mitqǝṭel
(3)mp wluyfiq]tai ʔitqǝṭílu ˜wlufq'tyI yitqaṭlun wluyfiq]tai ʔitqǝṭílu ˜ylifq'tmi mitqaṭlin
Dt (3)ms lb'q'tai itqabbal lb'q'tyI yitqabbal lb'q'tai ʔitqabbal lb'q'tmi mitqabbal
(3)mp wlub'q'tai ʔitqabbálu ˜wlubq] 'tyI yitqabbǝlun wlubq' 'tai ʔitqabbálu ˜ylib]q'tmi mitqabbǝlin
Ct (3)ms çr'pt'ai ʔittapraš çr'pt'yI yittapraš çr'pt'ai ʔittapraš çr'pt'mi mittapraš
(3)mp wçur'pt'ai ʔittaprášu ˜wçur]pt'yI yittaprǝšun wçur'pt'ai ʔittaprášu ˜yçir]pt'mi mittaprǝšin
As the paradigm indicates, the inflection of the Dt and the Ct is normal: in the Perfect and
Imperative the stem vowel remains; in the Imperfect and Participle the stem vowel is
reduced. The Gt Perfect and Imperative are also normal; in the Gt Imperfect and
Participle, however, the reduction of the stem vowel occasions the return of the full
vowel -a- in the penultimate syllable. Full paradigms appear in Appendix B.1.
The following table shows the Gt, Dt, and Ct forms for various root types that
require special note:
Perfect Imperfect Imperative Participle
III–Gutt. Gt [n"m]tai ʔitmǝnaʕ [n"m]tyI yitmǝnaʕ [n"m]tai ʔitmǝnaʕ [n"m]tmi mitmǝnaʕ
II–r Dt ˚r'b;tai ʔitbārak ˚r'b;tyI yitbārak ˚r'b;tai ʔitbārak ˚r'b;tmi mitbārak
I–y Gt dyley}tai ʔityǝled dyley}tyI yityǝled dyley}tmi mityǝled
or dyleytiai ʔitiled or dyleytiyI yitiled
Ct bt'wtoai ʔittotab bt'wtoyI yittotab bt'wtoai ʔittotab bt'wtomi mittotab
III–Weak Gt ylig}tai ʔitgǝli yleg}tyI yitgǝle ylig}tai ʔitgǝli yleg}tmi mitgǝle
(3)mp wauylig}tai ʔitgǝlíʔu ˜wlog}tyI yitgǝlon wlog}tai ʔitgǝlo ˜l'g}tmi mitgǝlan
(3)fp ha;ylig}tai ʔitgǝlíʔā ˜y:lg"tyI yitgalyān ha;l'g}tai ʔitgǝláʔā ˜y:lg"tmi mitgalyān
Dt ynIm'tai ʔitmanni ynEm'tyI yitmanne ynIm'tai ʔitmanni ynEm'tmi mitmanne
(3)mp wauynIm'tai ʔitmanníʔu ˜wnOm'tyI yitmannon wnOm'tai ʔitmanno ˜n"m'tmi mitmannan
Ct yzIjt'ai ʔittaḥzi yzEjt'yI yittaḥze yzIjt'ai ʔittaḥzi yzEjt'mi mittaḥze
Hollow Gt µq;t]ai ʔittǝqām µq;t]yI yittǝqām µq;t]ai ʔittǝqām µq;t]mi mittǝqām
Ct µq't;ai ʔittāqam µq't;yI yittāqam µq't;ai ʔittāqam µq't;mi mittāqam
If the first root consonant is a sibilant (š, s, ṣ, z), the Gt and Dt undergo metathesis:
G qb'ç] šǝbaq, Gt qybet]çai ʔištǝbeq (< *ʔitšǝbeq); G qyles] sǝleq, Dt ql't'sai ʔistallaq
(< *ʔitsallaq).
With z and ṣ, further, partial assimilation of -t- takes place: -zt- > -zd-; -ṣt- > -ṣṭ-:
68 LESSON TWENTY-THREE

G ˜b'z} zǝban, Gt ˜ybedz] ai ʔizdǝben (< *ʔitzǝben); D [b'x' ṣabbaʕ to wash (clothes),
Dt [b'f'xai ʔiṣṭabbaʕ to be washed (< *ʔitṣabbaʕ)
If the first root consonant is d, ṭ, or t, complete assimilation of prefixal -t- takes place:
G rb'd] dǝbar Gt rb'd]ai ʔiddǝbar Dt rb'd'ai ʔiddabbar
G rm'f] ṭǝmar Gt rm'fa] i ʔiṭṭǝmar Dt rm'fa' i ʔiṭṭammar
G rb't] tǝbar Gt rb't]ai ʔittǝbar Dt rb't'ai ʔittabbar
Note especially the distinctions in forms such as these Imperfect forms: G rb'dyI yidbar, Gt
rb'd]yI yiddǝbar, D rb'd'y} yǝdabbar, Dt rb'd'yI yiddabbar.

23.2 The Adjective ʔuḥrān (other)

Absolute
ms ˜r;jwau ʔuḥrān mp ˜ynir;jwau ʔuḥrānin
fs yrijwau ʔuḥri fp ˜y:n}r;jwau ʔuḥrānǝyān
Emphatic
ms an:r;jwau ʔuḥrānā mp ay:n"r;jwau ʔuḥrānayyā
fs at;nr} ;jwau ʔuḥrānǝtā fp at;y:n}r;jwau ʔuḥrānǝyātā

23.3 The Ordinal Numbers

The Ordinal adjectives have the following endings (see also §18.4):
Absolute
ms yÎ; -āy mp ˜yaiÎ; -āʔin
fs — — fp — —
Emphatic
ms ha;Î; -āʔā mp yaeÎ; -āʔe
fs at;yÎE -etā fp at;y:Î" -ayyātā
The base forms are:
ym;dq' qadmāy yt;ytiç] šǝtitāy
˜y:nti tinyān (f.emph. at;y}nti tinyǝtā) y[;ybiç] šǝbiʕāy
yt;ylit] tǝlitāy yn:ymit] tǝmināy
y[;ybir] rǝbiʕāy y[;yçit] tǝšiʕāy
yç;ymij] ḥǝmišāy yr;ysi[] ʕǝsirāy

Vocabulary 23
Nouns:
at;y[irz" zarʕitā (f.; abs. y[irz" zarʕi, cstr. ty[irz" zarʕit, pl. abs. at;y:[]rz" zarʕǝyātā; see Paradigm
A.3) descendant, family.
 LESSON TWENTY-THREE 69

aç;yre rešā top, head, beginning.

Verbs:
˚r'b;tai ʔitbārak Dt to be blessed.
al;g} gǝlā G to reveal; ylig}tai ʔitgǝli Gt to reveal oneself, appear.
rb'd]ai ʔiddǝbar Gt to be taken.
yzIjt'ai ʔittaḥzi Ct to appear.
bt'wtoai ʔittotab (root bty) Ct to settle (intrans.).
çn"k] kǝnaš (imperf. çwnOkyi yiknoš) G to gather, assemble (trans.); çynek]tai ʔitkǝneš Gt to be
gathered, gather (intrans.); çn"k'tai ʔitkannaš Dt to gather (intrans.).
ynim]tai ʔitmǝni Gt to be counted.
ql't'sai ʔistallaq Dt to go up.
çr'p;tai ʔitpāraš Dt to be(come) divided, to separate (intrans.).

Exercises
A.
1. Yitbārǝkun bǝdil bǝnāk kol zarʕəyāt ʔarʕā. 2. ʔittaḥzíyu reše ṭurayyā. 3. U-qrā li-
bnóhi wa-ʔəmar ləhon ʔitkannášu wa-ʔəḥawwe lǝkon yāt pitgāmay. 4. Wǝ-nahrā hǝwāh
nāpeq me-ʕedan (Eden) lǝ-ʔašqāʔā yāt ginnǝtā u-mit-tammān mitpāraš wǝ-hāwe lǝ-
ʔarbəʕā reše nahrin. 5. Wǝ-ʔatt sab lāk mik-kol mekal dǝ-mitʔəkel bə-ginnətā.

ywEj'a]w" wçun"k'tai ˜whol] rm'a]w" yhiwnObyli ar;qwU 3 ay:r'wfu yçeyre wyUyzIjt'yai 2 a[;ra' ty:[]rz" lwko ˚n:b] lydib] ˜wkur]b;tyi 1
çr'p;tmi ˜m;t'ymiwU at;n}ygI ty: ha;q;ça'l] (Eden) ˜d'[eme qypen: hw:h] ar;hn"w} 4 ym'g:typi ty: ˜wkol]
at;n}ygIb] lykea]tmid] lk'yme lwkomi ˚l; bs' ta'w} 5 ˜yrihn" yçeyre h[;b]ra'l] ywEh;w}

B.
˜mtm ˜wqltsy 3 ˜yaygs ˜ymwy adh atrqb µhrba btwtyaw 2 µyrxml twjyt al rmaw ywy hyl ylgta 1
aklm tybl hyttya trbdya 4 ˜rjwa rtal ˜wlzyyw
 LESSON TWENTY-FOUR

24.1 The Verb with Object Suffixes

A pronominal direct object may be indicated by a suffix on the verb rather than with the
object marker ty: yāt. The forms of the verb with object suffixes are presented in the
following tables. Forms that are underlined completely are unusual in that they do not
show proper vowel reduction.
(a) On the Perfect of Sound Verbs

Perfect 3ms 3fs

without suffix bt'k] kǝtab tb't'k] kǝtábat
with 1cs ynIb'tk' katbáni ynItb't'k] kǝtabátni
with 2ms ˚b;tk' katbāk ˚t;bt'k] kǝtabtāk
with 2fs ˚ybitk' katbik ˚ytibt'k] kǝtabtik
with 3ms hybetk' katbeh hytebt'k] kǝtabteh
with 3fs hb'tk' katbah ht'bt'k] kǝtabtah
with 1cp an:b'tk' katbánā an:tb't'k] kǝtabátnā
with 3mp ˜wnUybit'k] kǝtabinnun ˜wnUtb't'k] kǝtabatnun
with 3fp ˜ynIybit'k] kǝtabinnin

Perfect 2ms 2fs 1cs

without suffix tbt'k] kǝtabt tbt'k] kǝtabt tybit'k] kǝtábit
with 1cs ynIt'bt'k] kǝtabtáni ynIytibt'k] kǝtabtíni — —
with 2ms — — — — ˚t;bt'k] kǝtabtāk
with 2fs — — — — ˚ytibt'k] kǝtabtik
with 3ms yhit;bt'k] kǝtabtā́ hi yhiytibt'k] kǝtabtíhi hytebt'k] kǝtabteh
with 3fs ht'bt'k] kǝtabtah ah;ytibt'k] kǝtabtíhā ht'bt'k] kǝtabtah
with 1cp an:t'bt'k] kǝtabtánā an:ytibt'k] kǝtabtínā — —
with 3mp ˜wnUytibt'k] kǝtabtinnun ˜wnUytibt'k] kǝtabtinnun ˜wnUytibt'k] kǝtabtinnun

Perfect 3mp 3fp 2mp 1cp

without suffix wbut'k] kǝtábu ab;t'k] kǝtábā ˜wtubt'k] kǝtabtun an:bt'k] kǝtábnā
with 1cs ynIwbutk' katbúni ynIb'tk' katbáni ynIwtubt'k] kǝtabtúni — —
with 2ms ˚wbutk' katbuk ˚b;tk' katbāk — — ˚n:bt'k] kǝtabnāk
with 3ms yhiwbutk' katbúhi yhib;tk' katbā́ hi yhiwtubt'k] kǝtabtúhi yhin:bt'k] kǝtabnā́ hi
with 3fs ah;wbutk' katbúhā hb'tk' katbah ah;wtubt'k] kǝtabtúhā hn"bt'k] kǝtabnah
with 1cp an:wbutk' katbúnā an:b'tk' katbánā an:wtubt'k] kǝtabtúnā — —
with 3mp ˜wnUwbut'k] kǝtabunnun ˜wnUb;tk' katbānnun ˜wnUwtubt'k] kǝtabtunnun ˜wnUn:bt'k] kǝtabnānnun
 LESSON TWENTY-FOUR 71

Notes:
(1) The 2ms tbt'k] kǝtabt has the same suffixes as 3ms bt'k] kǝtab except with 3ms:
yhit;bt'k kǝtabtā́ hi.
The 1cs tybit'k kǝtábit appears as Îtbt'k kǝtabt- and has the same suffixes as 3ms
bt'k kǝtab.
The 2mp ˜wtubt'k kǝtabtun appears as Îwtubt'k kǝtabtu- and has the same suffixes as
3mp wbut'k kǝtábu.
The 1cp an:bt'k kǝtábnā has the same suffixes as 3fp ab;t'k] kǝtábā.
(2) Only G verbs have the stem change found in the 3rd person (bt'k] kǝtab > Îbtk'
katb-, wbut'k] kǝtábu > Îwbutk' katbu-). In D and C verbs there is regular reduction of
the final stem syllable:
lybeq' qabbel: ynIl'b]q' qabbǝláni wluybiq' qabbílu: ynIwlub]q' qabbǝlúni
çyrepa' ʔapreš: ynIç'r]pa' ʔaprǝšáni wçuyripa' ʔapríšu: ynIwçur]pa' ʔaprǝšúni
(3) As noted, the underlined forms above do not show proper vowel reduction. This
peculiarity occurs with these same forms in all comparable paradigms. For ex-
ample, in D verbs, compare ˜wnUlyi beq' qabbelinnun (3ms with 3mp suffix), ynItl'ybeq'
qabbelátni (3fs with 1cs), an:tl'ybeq' qabbelátnā (3fs with 1cp), ˜wnUtl'ybeq'
qabbelatnun (3fs with 3mp), ˜wnUwluybiq' qabbilunnun (3mp with 3mp).

(b) On the Perfect of Verbs III–Weak

(1) G 3ms forms in -ā follow the paradigm of 3fp ab;t'k] kǝtábā, above under (a):
az:j] ḥǝzā: ynIz"j] ḥǝzáni, ˚z:j] ḥǝzāk, yhiz:j] ḥǝzā́ hi, hz'j] ḥǝzah (also ha;z:j] ḥǝzāʔah),
an:z:j] ḥǝzā́ nā, ..., ˜wnUz:j] ḥǝzānnun.
(2) G 3mp forms in -o follow the paradigm of 3mp wbut'k] kǝtábu, above under (a):
wzOj] ḥǝzo: ynIwzOj] ḥǝzóni, yhiwzOj] ḥǝzóhi, ˜wnUwzOj] ḥǝzonnun.
(3) D and C 3ms forms in -i change -i to -ǝy- and add the suffixes of bt'k] kǝtab:
ynIm' manni: ynIy"n}m' mannǝyáni, ˚y:n}m' mannǝyāk, hyyEn}m' mannǝyeh, etc.
(4) D and C 3mp forms in -íʔu change this to -ǝyu- and add the suffixes of wbut'k]
kǝtábu:
wauynIm' manníʔu: ynIwyUn}m' mannǝyúni, ˚wyUn}m' mannǝyuk, yhiwyUn}m' mannǝyúhi, etc.
(5) D and C 3fs forms in -íʔat change this to -it-:
ta'ynI[' ʕanníʔat she oppressed, but ht'ynI[' ʕannitah she oppressed her.

(c) On the Imperfect of Sound Verbs

Object suffixes are attached to the imperfect with the mediation of the suffix -inn; if
the form already ends in -n, this is simply doubled. The added pronominal elements are
the same as those given above for the Perfect 3ms kǝtab:
72 LESSON TWENTY-FOUR

on 3ms bwtokyI yiktob on 3mp ˜wbut]kyI yiktǝbun

with 1cs ynIn"ybit]kyI yiktǝbinnáni ynIn"wbut]kyI yiktǝbunnáni
with 2ms ˚n:ybit]kyI yiktǝbinnāk ˚n:wbut]kyI yiktǝbunnāk
with 2fs ˚ynIybit]kyI yiktǝbinnik ˚ynIwbut]kyI yiktǝbunnik
with 3ms hynEybit]kyI yiktǝbinneh hynEwbut]kyI yiktǝbunneh
with 3fs hn"ybit]kyI yiktǝbinnah hn"wbut]kyI yiktǝbunnah
with 1cp an:n"ybit]kyI yiktǝbinnánā an:n"wbut]kyI yiktǝbunnánā
with 3mp ˜wnUybitokyI yiktobinnun* ˜wnUwnUwbut]kyI yiktǝbununnun
*Note the lack of vowel reduction in 3ms + 3mp suffix ˜wnUybitokyI yiktobinnun.

(d) On the Imperfect of Verbs III–Weak

(1) 3ms yzEjyI yiḥze: ynIn"yzEjyI yiḥzennáni, ˚n:yzEjyI yiḥzennāk, ˚ynIyzEjyI yiḥzennik, hynEyzEjyI
yiḥzenneh, hn"yzEjyI yiḥzennah, an:n"yzEjyI yiḥzennánā, ˜wnUyzEjyI yiḥzennun.
(2) 3mp ˜wzOjyI yiḥzon: ynIn"wzOjyI yiḥzonnáni, hynEwzOjyI yiḥzonneh, etc.

(e) On the Imperative of Sound Verbs

(1) The suffixes -ni, -hi, -hā, -nā, and -innun are added directly to the masc. sing.
imperative with no further changes:
ms bwtok] kǝtob: ynIbwtok] kǝtóbni, yhibwtok] kǝtóbhi, ah;bwtok] kǝtóbhā, an:bwtok] kǝtóbnā,
and ˜wnUybiwtok] kǝtobinnun.
(2) The masc. pl. imperative has reduction; G forms:
mp wbuwtuk] kǝtúbu: ynIwbutki kitbúni, yhiwbutki kitbúhi, ah;wbutki kitbúhā, an:wbutki kitbúnā;
but with the unreduced form before 3mp -nnun: ˜wnUwbuwtuk] kǝtubunnun.

(f) On the Imperative of Verbs III–weak

ms G yzEj] ḥǝze: ynIyzEj] ḥǝzéni, yhiyzEj] ḥǝzéhi;
ms C yzIja' ʔaḥzi: ynIyzIja' ʔaḥzíni, yhiyzIja' ʔaḥzíhi.

24.2 Anticipatory Object Construction

A noun as direct object may be anticipated by an object suffix on the verb, the noun
object itself then introduced by the preposition Îl] lǝ- (see §2.2, end): hyçeb;lli hyqebç' šabq-
eh li-lbāš-eh he removed his garment (lit., he removed it, namely, his garment).

Exercises
1. šalḥáni 2. ʔəbārəkinnāk 3. paqqǝdāk 4. ʔaʕəláni 5. ʔidbərinnāk 6. ʔappəqah 7.
nǝsebatnun 8. paqqǝdánā 9. ʔəḥadinnun 10. ʔəḥadteh 11. d-iledtāk 12. ʔaškaḥátnā
13. ʔaškaḥtah 14. hodaʕtáni 15. dǝbartāk 16. šǝlaḥteh 17. yǝhabtah 18. ʔassǝquk
19. naṭlúhi 20. katbúhā 21. tārikunnun 22. šǝlaḥtúni 23. yǝhabnah 24.
yaškǝḥinnáni 25. yerǝtinnāk 26. yissǝbinnah 27. tassǝqinnánā 28. tǝbārekinnun 29.
 LESSON TWENTY-FOUR 73

ʔǝqiminneh 30. ʔaʕelinnun 31. tidbǝrinneh 32. taʕbǝdinnah 33. yiplǝḥunnāk

34. yerǝtunnah 35. taškǝḥunneh 36. bārékni 37. hodáʕni 38. sábhi 39. ʔasséqhi
40. qārebinnun 41. sabúni 42. ʔiklúhi 43. ʔaḥzǝyāk 44. ʔaytǝyeh 45. ḥǝzānnun
46. ḥǝzātni 47. qǝretāk 48. ḥǝzetinnun 49. yiḥzennah

˜wnUydij'a] 9 an:d'q]p' 8 ˜wnUtb'ysen} 7 hq'p]a' 6 ˚n:yrib]dai 5 ynIl'[]a' 4 ˚d;q]p' 3 ˚n:ykir]b;a] 2 ynIj'lç' 1

hytejl'ç] 16 ˚t;rb'd] 15 ynIt'[d'who 14 ht'jk'ça' 13 an:tj'k'ça' 12 ˚t;dyleydi 11 hytedj'a] 10
ynIn"yjik]çy" 24 hn"bh'y} 23 ynIwtujl'ç] 22 ˜wnUwkuyrit; 21 ah;wbutk' 20 yhiwlufn" 19 ˚wqus]a' 18 ht'bh'y} 17
hynEyrib]dyti 31 ˜wnUyliy[ea' 30 hynEymiyqia] 29 ˜wnUykiyreb;t] 28 an:n"yqis]t' 27 hn"ybis]yI 26 ˚n:ytir]yye 25
yhiqysea' 39 yhibs' 38 ynI[d'who 37 ynIkyreb; 36 hynEwjuk]çt' 35 hn"wtur]yyE 34 ˚n:wjul]pyi 33 hn"ydib][t' 32
˚t;yreq] 47 ynItz:j] 46 ˜wnUz:j] 45 hyyEt]ya' 44 ˚y:z}ja' 43 yhiwlukai 42 ynIwbus' 41 ˜wnUybiyreq; 40
hn"yzEjyI 49 ˜wnUytiyzEj] 48
 PARADIGMS

A. Nouns and Adjectives

A.1 Noun and Adjectives with Unchanging Base (rypiç' šappir ‘beautiful’)
Masculine Feminine
Singular Plural Singular Plural
Absolute rypiç' šappir ˜yriypiç' šappirin ar;ypiç' šappirā ˜r;ypiç' šappirān
Construct rypiç' šappir yreypiç' šappire tr'ypiç' šappirat tr;ypiç' šappirāt
Emphatic ar;ypiç' šappirā ay:r'ypiç' šappirayyā at;r]ypiç' šappirǝtā at;r;ypiç' šappirātā
A.2 Feminine Nouns Ending in -vCtā
a. -a- is reduced to -ø- in the abs. and cstr., resulting in other changes to the stem:
Emphatic Absolute Construct Emph. Pl.
at;lg"[] ʕǝgaltā al;g[' ʕaglā tl'g[' ʕaglat at;l;g[' ʕaglātā ‘heifer’
at;bd'n} nǝdabtā ab;dynI nidbā tb'dynI nidbat at;b;dynI nidbātā ‘free-will offering’
at;ll'[] ʕǝlaltā al;l][' ʕalǝlā tl'l][' ʕalǝlat at;l;l][' ʕalǝlātā ‘produce’
b. -i- and -e- are sometimes reduced, sometimes not:
Emphatic Absolute Construct
at;çynIk] kǝništā aç;nyki kinšā tç'nyki kinšat ‘congregation’
aç;ynEk/] /kǝnešā
at;lybin} nǝbiltā al;ybin} nǝbilā tl'bynI niblat ‘corpse’
at;ryzEg} gǝzertā ar;yzEg} gǝzerā tr'yzEg} gǝzerat ‘decree’
feminine G active participle (§18.1):
Emphatic Absolute Construct Emph. Pl.
at;bytek; kātebtā ab;t]k; kātǝbā tb't]k; kātǝbat at;b;t]k; kātǝbātā ‘writing’
c. -ā- and -u- are normally not reduced:
Emphatic Absolute Construct Emph. Pl.
at;ry:ç] šǝyārtā ar;y:ç] šǝyārā tr'y:ç] šǝyārat at;r;y:ç] šǝyārātā ‘caravan’
at;bwnUg} gǝnubtā ab;wnUg} gǝnubā tb'wnUg} gǝnubat at;bw; nUg} gǝnubātā ‘theft’

A.3 Nouns in -itā and -utā

These go back to two originally distinct types:
a. With -it and -ut as suffixes used to form abstract nouns; the regular inflection is:
Emphatic Absolute Construct Emph. Pl.
at;y[irz" zarʕitā y[irz" zarʕi ty[irz" zarʕit at;y:[]rz" zarʕǝyātā ‘descendant’
at;wkulm' malkutā wkulm' malku twkulm' malkut at;w:k]lm' malkǝwātā ‘kingdom’
76 PARADIGMS

b. With -it and -ut as the result of phonetic changes involving y or w as the third root
consonant. These sometimes follow the inflection of zarʕitā and malkutā:
Emphatic Absolute Construct
at;wsuk] kǝsutā wsuk] kǝsu twsuk] kǝsut ‘garment’
Often, however, they show traces of the more original form (see also A.4):
Emphatic Absolute Construct Emph. Pl.
at;w[ur] rǝʕutā aw:[r' raʕwā tw[ur] rǝʕut at;w:[r' raʕwātā ‘will, desire’
/at;yri[] ʕǝritā/ ay:r[' ʕaryā ty"r[' ʕaryat ‘nakedness’
at;y}r[' ʕaryǝtā
Note also the noun ṣǝlotā (originally *ṣalawat-):
Emphatic Absolute Construct Emph. Pl.
at;wlox] ṣǝlotā wlox] ṣǝlo twlox] ṣǝlot at;w:lx' ṣalwātā ‘prayer’

A.4 Adjectives and Nouns Final -y, -w

a. Adjectives: yçeq] qǝše ‘hard, difficult’ (including the G passive participle of verbs III–
Weak, §22.1 b):
Masc. Singular Masc. Plural Feminine Singular Fem. Plural
Abs. yçiq/] yçeq] qǝše/qǝši ˜ç'q] qǝšan ay:çq' qašyā ˜y:çq' qašyān
Cstr. yçeq] qǝše yyEçq'/yçeq] qǝše/qašye tyçiq/] ty"çq' qašyat/qǝšit ty:çq' qašyāt
Emph. ay:çq' qašyā ay:ç'q] qǝšayyā at;yçiq/] at;y}çq' qašyǝtā/qǝšitā at;y:çq' qašyātā
Similarly G active participles of verbs III–Weak (§18.1):
Masc. Singular Masc. Plural Feminine Singular Fem. Plural
Abs. ynEb; bāne ˜n"b; bānan ay:n}b' bānǝyā ˜y:n}b; bānǝyān
Cstr. ynEb; bāne ynEb; bāne tynIb/; ty"n}b; bānǝyat/bānit ty:n}b; bānǝyāt
Emph. ay:n}b; bānǝyā ay:n"b; bānayyā at;ynIb; bānitā at;y:n}b; bānǝyātā
But note also, e.g., ay:[]r; rāʕǝyā ‘shepherd’, pl. at;w:[]r; rāʕǝwātā.

b. Nouns: ay:dg" gadyā ‘kid’; ay:ra' ʔaryā ‘lion’; aw:dj' ḥadwā ‘joy’; aw:zyji ḥizwā ‘appearance’:
Sg Abs. ydig} gǝdi yria] ʔǝri wduyje ḥédu wzUyje ḥézu
Cstr. ydig} gǝdi yria] ʔǝri wduyje ḥédu wzUyje ḥézu
Emph. ay:dg" gadyā ay:ra' ʔaryā aw:dj' ḥadwā aw:zyji ḥizwā
aw:dyji/ /ḥidwā aw:zj'/ /ḥazwā
Pl Abs. ˜ydig/} ˜yyIdg" gadyin/gǝdin ˜w:y:ra' ʔaryāwān ˜ywIzyji ḥizwin
Cstr. ydeg}/yyEdg" gadye/gǝde tw:y:ra' ʔaryāwāt
Emph. ay:d'g} gǝdayyā at;w:y:ra' ʔaryāwātā ay:w"zyji ḥizwayyā
 PARADIGMS 77

B. Verbs
B.1 Sound Verbs

G G STATIVE D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS bt'k] byreq] bytek' byteka' bytek]tai bt'k'tai bt'kt'ai
3FS tb't'k] tb'yreq] tb'ytek' tb'yteka' tb'ytek]tai tb't'k'tai tb't'kt'ai
2MS tbt'k] tbyreq] tbytek' tbyteka' tbytek]tai tbt'k'tai tbt'kt'ai
at;bt'k/] at;byreq]/ at;bytek/' at;byteka'/ at;bytek]tai/ at;bt'k'tai/ at;bt'kt'a/i
2FS tbt'k] tbyreq] tbytek' tbyteka' tbytek]tai tbt'k'tai tbt'kt'ai
1CS tybit'k] tybiyreq] tybiytek' tybiyteka' tybiytek]tai tybit'k'tai tybit'kt'ai
3MP wbut'k] wbuyriq] wbuytik' wbuytika' wbuytik]tai wbut'k'tai wbut'kt'ai
3FP ab;t'k] ab;yriq] ab;ytik' ab;ytika' ab;ytik]tai ab;t'k'tai ab;t'kt'ai
2MP ˜wtubt'k] ˜wtubyreq] ˜wtubytek' ˜wtubyteka' ˜wtubytek]tai ˜wtubt'k'tai ˜wtubt'kt'ai
2FP ˜ytibt'k] ˜ytibyreq] ˜ytibytek' ˜ytibyteka' ˜ytibytek]tai ˜ytibt'k'tai ˜ytibt'kt'ai
1CP an:bt'k] an:byreq] an:bytek' an:byteka' an:bytek]tai an:bt'k'tai an:bt'kt'ai
IMPF. 3MS bwtokyI br'qyi bytek'y} byteky" bytek]tyI bt'k'tyI bt'kt'yI
3FS bwtokti br'qti bytek't] bytekt' bytek]tti bt'k'tti bt'kt'ti
2MS bwtokti br'qti bytek't] bytekt' bytek]tti bt'k'tti bt'kt'ti
2FS ˜ybiit]kti ˜ybiir]qti ˜ybiit]k't] ˜ybiit]kt' ˜ybitk'tti ˜ybitk] 'tti ˜ybit]kt'ti
1CS bwtokai br'qai bytek'a] byteka' bytek]tai bt'k'tai bt'kt'ai
3MP ˜wbuut]kyI ˜wbuur]qyi ˜wbuut]k'y} ˜wbuut]ky" ˜wbutk'tyI ˜wbut]k'tyI ˜wbut]kt'yI
3FP ˜b;;t]kyI ˜b;;r]qyi ˜b;;t]k'y} ˜b;;t]ky" ˜b;tk'tyI ˜b;t]k'tyi ˜b;t]kt'yI
2MP ˜wbuut]kti ˜wbuur]qti ˜wbuut]k't] ˜wbuut]kt' ˜wbutk'tti ˜wbut]k'tti ˜wbut]kt'ti
2FP ˜b;;t]kti ˜b;;r]qti ˜b;;t]k't] ˜b;;t]kt' ˜b;tk'tti ˜b;t]k'tti ˜b;t]kt'ti
1CP bwtoknI br'qni bytek'n} bytekn" bytek]tnI bt'k'tnI bt'kt'nI
IMPV. MS bwtok] br'q] bytek' byteka' bytek]tai bt'k'tai bt'kt'ai
FS ybiwtuk] ybir'q] ybiytik' ybiytika' ybiytik]tai ybit'k'tai ybit'kt'ai
MP wbuwtuk] wbur'q] wbuytik' wbuytika' wbuytik]tai wbut'k'tai wbut'kt'ai
FP ab;wtuk] ab;r'q] ab;ytik' ab;ytika' ab;ytik]tai ab;t'k'tai ab;t'kt'ai
ACTIVE MS bytek; bytek'm] bytekm' bytek]tmi bt'k'tmi bt'kt'mi
PTCPL. MP ˜ybit]k; ˜ybit]k'm] ˜ybit]km' ˜ybitk'tmi ˜ybit]k'tmi ˜ybit]kt'mi
PASSIVE MS bytik] bt'k'm] bt'km'
PTCPL. bt'wkum/] bt'kwmu/
INFINITIVE bt'kmi br'qmi ab;t;k' ab;t;ka' ab;t;k]tai ab;t;k'tai ab;t;kt'ai
78 PARADIGMS

B.2 Verbs I–ʔ

G D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS lk'a] dybea' lykewao lykea]tai lb'a'tai ytiyteai
3MP wluk'a] wduybia' wluykiwao wluykia]tai wlub'a'tai
IMPF. 3MS lwkuyyE dybea'y} lykewyO lykea]tyI lb'a'tyI yteyteyI
3MP ˜wluk]yyE ˜wdub]a'y} ˜wluk]wyO ˜wluka'tyI ˜wlub]a'tyI
IMPV. MS lwkua/e lwkua] dybea' lykewao lykea]tai lb'a'tai
MP wluwkua/e wluwkua] wduybia' wluykiwao wluykia]tai wlub'a'tai
ACTIVE MS lykea; dybea'm] lykewmo lykea]tmi lb'a'tmi
PTCPL. MP ˜ylik]a; ˜ydib]a'm] ˜ylik]wmo ˜ylika'tmi ˜ylib]a'tmi
PASSIVE MS lykia] db'a'm] lk'wmo
PTCPL. db'waum/] lk'wmu/
INFINITIVE lk'yme ad;b;a' al;k;wao al;k;a]tai al;b;a'tai

B.3 Verbs I–n

G G STATIVE D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS qp'n} bysen} µyjen" qypea' bysen}tai µj'n"tai qp't'ai
3MP wqup'n} wbuysin} wmuyjin" wquypia' wbuysin}tai wmuj'n"tai wqup't'ai
IMPF. 3MS qwpoyI bs'yI µyjen"y} qypey" bysen}tyI µj'n"tyI qp't'yI
3MP ˜wqup]yI ˜wbus]yI ˜wmuj]n"y} ˜wqup]y" ˜wbusn"tyI ˜wmuj]n"tyI ˜wqup]t'yI
IMPV. MS qwpo bs' µyjen" qypea' bysen}tai µj'n"tai
MP wquwpu wbus' wmuyjin" wquypia' wbuysin}taii wmuj'n"tai
ACTIVE MS qypen: bysen: µyjen"m] qypem' bysen}tmi µj'n"tmi qp't'mi
PTCPL. MP ˜yqip]n: ˜ybis]n: ˜ymij]n"m] ˜yqip]m' ˜ybisn"tmi ˜ymij]n"tmi ˜yqip]t'mi
PASSIVE MS qypin} µj'n"m] qp'm'
PTCPL. µj'wnUm/] qp'wmu/
INFINITIVE qp'ymi bs'ymi am;j;n" aq;p;a' ab;s;n}tai al;b;a'tai aq;p;t'ai
 PARADIGMS 79

B.4 Verbs I–y

G G STATIVE D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS bh'y} bytey} rq'y" bytewao byhey}tai rq'y"tai bt'wtoai
3MP wbuh'y} wbuytiy} wruq'y" wbuytiwao wbuyhiy}tai wruq'y"tai wbut'wtoa
IMPF. 3MS lwkoyI tr'yyE byteyI rq'yy" } bytewyO byhey}tyI rq'y"tyI bt'wtoyI
3MP ˜wluk]yI ˜wtur]yyE ˜wbut]yI ˜wruq]yy" } ˜wbut]wyO ˜wbuhy"tyI ˜wruq]y"tyI ˜wbut]wtoyI
IMPV. MS bh' byti rq'y" bytewao byhey}tai
MP wbuh' wbuyti wruq'y" wbuytiwao wbuyhiy}tai
ACTIVE MS lykey: bytey: rq'y"m] bytewmo byhey}tmi rq'y"tmi bt'wtomi
PTCPL. MP ˜ylik]y: ˜ybit]y: ˜yriq]y"m] ˜ybit]wmo ˜ybihy"tmi ˜yriq]y"tmi ˜ybit]wtomi
PASSIVE MS byhiy} rq'y"m] ([d'm)'
PTCPL. (˜y[id]m')
INFINITIVE tr'yme bt'ymi ar;q;y" ab;t;wao ab;h;y}tai ar;q;y"tai ab;t;wtoai

B.5 Hollow Verbs

G G STATIVE D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS µq; byse, tymi µyyEq' µyqea/' µyqea] r[;t]a/i r['t]ai µy"q'tai µq't;ai
3FS tm'q' tb'yse, tt'ymi
2MS at;mq'/tmq' etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
2FS tmq'
1CS tymiq' tybiyse
3MP wmuq/; wmuq' wbuyse, wtuymi wmuyyIq' wmuyqia/' wmuyqia] wru[;t]a/i wru['t]ai wmuy"q'tai wmuq't;ai
3FP am;q/; am;q'
2MP ˜wtumq' etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
2FP ˜ytimq'
1CP an:mq' an:tymi
IMPF. 3MS µwquy} µyyEqy' } µyqiy:/µyqiy/" µyqiy} r[;t]y/I r['t]yI µy"q'tyI µq't;yI
3MP ˜wmuwquy} ˜wmuyy}q'y} wmuyqiy/: wmuyqiy/" wmuyqiy} ˜wru[;t]yI ˜wmuy}q'tyI
IMPV. MS µwqu µyyEq' µyqea/' µyqea] µy"q'tai
MP wmuwqu wmuyyIq' wmuyqia/' wmuyqia] wmuy"q'tai
ACTIVE MS µyaeq; tyaem; µyyEq'm] µyqim/; µyqim/' µyqim] r[;t]mi µy"q'tmi µq't;mi
PTCPL. MP ˜ymiy}q; ˜ytiy}m; ˜ymiyy}q'm] ˜ymiyqim/; m'/m] ˜yri[;t]mi ˜ymiy}q'tmi ˜ymiq]t;mi
INFINITIVE µq;m] tm;m] am;yy;q' am;q;a/; a'/a] ar;[;t]ai am;y:q'tai
80 PARADIGMS

B.6 Verbs III–Weak

G G STATIVE D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS an:b] ydj] ynIb' ynIba' ynIb]tai ynIb'tai ynIbt'ai
3FS tn:b] ta'ydij ta'ynIb' ta'ynIba' ta'ynIb]tai ta'ynIb'tai ta'ynIbt'ai
2MS at;ynEb/] tynEb] at;ydij/] tydij] at;ynIb/' tynIb' tynIba' tynIb]tai tynIb'tai tynIbt'ai
at;ynIba'/ at;ynIb]tai/ at;ynIb'tai/ at;ynIbt'a/i
2FS tynEb] tydij] tynIb' tynIba' tynIb]tai tynIb'tai tynIbt'ai
1CS ytiynEb/] tynEb] ytiydij/] tydij] ytiynIb/' tynIb' tynIba' tynIb]tai tynIb'tai tynIbt'ai
ytiynIba'/ ytiynIb]tai/ ytiynIb'ta/i ytiynIbt'a/i
3MP wnOb] wauydij]÷wyUdij] wauynIb' wauynIba' wauynIb]tai wauynIb'tai wauynIbt'ai
3FP ha;n"b] ha;ydij] ha;ynIb' ha;ynIba' ha;ynIb]tai ha;ynIb'tai ha;ynIbt'ai
2MP ˜wtoynEb] ˜wtuydij] ˜wtuynIb' ˜wtuynIba' ˜wtuynIb]tai ˜wtuynIb'tai ˜wtuynIbt'ai
2FP ˜yteynEb] ˜ytiydij] ˜ytiynIb' ˜ytiynIba' ˜ytiynIb]tai ˜ytiynIb'tai ˜ytiynIbt'ai
1CP an:ynEb] an:ydij] an:ynIb' an:ynIba' an:ynIb]tai an:ynIb'tai an:ynIbt'ai
IMPF. 3MS ynEbyI ydejyI ynEb'y} ynEby" ynEb]tyI ynEb'tyI ynEbt'yI
3FS ynEbti ydejti ynEb't] ynEbt' ynEb]tti ynEb'tti ynEbt'ti
2MS ynEbti ydejti ynEb't] ynEbt' ynEb]tti ynEb'tti ynEbt'ti
2FS ˜n"bti ˜d'jti ˜n"b't] ˜n"bt' ˜n"b]tti ˜n"b'tti ˜n"bt'ti
1CS ynEbai ydejai ynEb'a] ynEba' ynEb]tai ynEb'taii ynEbt'ai
3MP ˜wnObyI ˜wdojyI ˜wnOb'y} ˜wnOby" ˜wnOb]tyI ˜wnOb'tyI ˜wnObt'yI
3FP ˜y:n}byI ˜y:d]jyI ˜y:n}b'y} ˜y:n}by" ˜y:nb'tyI ˜y:n}b'tyI ˜y:n}bt'yI
2MP ˜wnubti ˜wdojti ˜wnOb't] ˜wnObt' ˜wnOb]tti ˜wnOb'tti ˜wnObt'ti
2FP ˜y:n}bti ˜y:d]jti ˜y:n}b't] ˜y:n}bt' ˜y:nb'tti ˜y:n}b'tti ˜y:n}bt'ti
1CP ynEbnI ydejnI ynEb'n} ynEbn" ynEb]tnI ynEb'tnI ynEbt'nI
IMPV. MS ynEb/ynIb] ydij] ynIb' ynIba' ynIb]tai ynIb'tai ynIbt'ai
FS an"b] ad'j] an:b' an"ba' an"b]tai an"b'tai an"bt'ai
MP wnOb] wdoj] wnOb' wnOba' wnOb]tai wnOb'tai wnObt'ai
FP ha;n"b] ha;d'j] ha;n"b' ha;n"ba' ha;n"b]tai ha;n"b'tai ha;n"bt'ai
ACTIVE MS ynEb; ynEb'm] ynEbm' ynEb]tmi ynEb'tmi ynEbt'mi
PTCPL. MP ˜n"b; ˜n"b'm] ˜n"bm' ˜n"b]tmi ˜n"b'tmi ˜n"bt'mi
PASSIVE MS ynEb] an"wbum] an"bwmu
PTCPL.

INFINITIVE ynEbmi ydejmi ha;n:b' ha;n:ba' ha;n:b]tai ha;n:b'tai ha;n:bt'ai

 PARADIGMS 81

B.7 Geminate Verbs

G G STATIVE D C GT DT CT
PEAL PAEL APHEL ITHPEEL ITHPAAL ITTAPHAL
PERF. 3MS l[;/l[' lylem' ly[ea/] ly[ea' zyzEb]tai ll'm'tai l['t;ai
3FS tl'['
2MS at;l['/tl[' etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
2FS tl['
1CS tyli['
3MP wlu[/; wlu[' wluylim' wluyli[/] wluy[ia' wzuyzIb]tai wlul'm'tai wlu['t;ai
3FP al;[/; al;['
2MP ˜wtul[' etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
2FP ˜ytil['
1CP an:l['
IMPF. 3MS lw[uyE µj'yyE lylemy' } ly[ey/} ly[ey" zyzEb]tyI ll'm'tyI l['t;yI
3MP ˜wlu[]yE wmuj]yyE ˜wlul]my' } ˜wlu[y] " ˜wzUz}b'tyI ˜wlul]m'tyI ˜wlu[]t;yI
IMPV. MS lw[u lylem' ly[ea/] ly[ea' zyzEb]tai
MP wluw[u wluylim' wluyli[/] wluy[ia' wzuyzIb]tai
ACTIVE MS lyae[/; ayle[; lylem'm] ly[em' zyzEb]tmi lylem'tmi l['t;mi
PTCPL. MP ˜yli[; ˜ylil]m'm] ˜yli[]m' ˜yziz}b'tmi ˜ylil]m'tmi ˜yli[]t;mi
PASSIVE MS lyli[] ll'm'm]
PTCPL. ll'wmum/]
INFINITIVE l['yme µj'yme al;l;m' al;[;a/] al;[;a' az:z:b]tai
 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16

The following pages reproduce Targum Onqelos to Genesis chapters 12–16 from
Sperber’s The Bible in Aramaic, vol. 1 (Leiden: Brill, 1959), pages 17–22, including the
critical apparatus at the bottom of each page. The text is followed by notes that present
vocabulary and grammatical features not covered in the lessons, and point out typos in
Sperber’s text.
84 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16
APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16 85
86 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16
APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16 87
88 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16

Notes

Additional abbreviations in these notes:

Berliner: A. Berliner, Targum Onkelos (Berlin: Gorzelanczyk, 1884), an edition with Tiberian
pointing; the pointing of Berliner’s version is not cited in Sperber’s critical apparatus.
GN: geographical name.
MT: the Hebrew of the masoretic text.
PN: personal name.
var.: variant text (in the critical apparatus of Sperber’s edition).
§ refers to sections of this Introduction, above.
* indicates a common word that should be learned.

Chapter 12

1. at;wdul;y" yallādutā ‘place of birth’.

˚n:yEzIja' ʔaḥziyennāk read with the var. ˚n:yzEja' ʔaḥzennāk (see §24.1 d).
 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16 89

2. *ab;r] rǝbā G ‘to grow, increase, become great’; ybir' rabbi D ‘to make great, increase, raise,
rear’.
˚r'b;m] mǝbārak see §22.2.
3. fyfel; lāṭeṭ (a pālel verb, a pseudo-conjugation corresponding to the Hebrew pōlēl) = *fl; lāṭ
(yǝluṭ) G ‘to curse’.
4. fwlo Loṭ PN.
çymej'w} wǝ-ḥameš = çymej]w" wa-ḥǝmeš (cf. the var., and see p. xv, end).
˜r;j; Ḥārān GN.
5. yr'ç; Śāray PN.
ty}w: wā-yǝt is a typo for ty:w} wǝ-yāt.
*dybe[]ç/' dybe[ç' šaʕ(ǝ)bed (a šaphel verb, conjugated like the D: perfect 3mp wduybi[]ç/' wduybi[ç'
šaʕ(ǝ)bídu; imperfect 3ms dybe[]ç'y/} dybe[ç'y} yǝšaʕ(ǝ)bed) ‘to subject’; here: ‘to convert’.
˜['nk'di di-Kanʕan and ˜['nk;di di-Kānʕan are both typos for ˜['n"kdi di-Knáʕan and ˜['n:kdi di-
Knā́ ʕan; the long ā of the second form is in imitation of the Hebrew pausal form.
6. µk'ç] Šǝkam GN.
hr'wmo Morah GN.
8. lae tybe Bet ʔel GN.
hyser'pwU u-praseh a typo for hyserp'wU u-parseh (cf. §24.1 a, and compare hyserp'd] dǝ-parseh in
Gen. 13:3); hynEk]çm'l] hyserp' parseh lǝ-maškǝneh see §24.2.
y[; ʕāy GN.
9. lyfen"w} lyzEa; ʔāzel wǝ-nāṭel see §18.1, end.
11. byriq] qǝrib either for byreq] qǝreb (cf. the var.), or for the adjective byriq; qārib near (cf. the
discussion of taqqip in Vocabulary 18).
an:[d'y: yādaʕnā see §18.2, end.
*aw:zyji ḥizwā (abs. wzUyje ḥézu; pl. ay:w"zyji ḥizwayyā; see Paradigm A.4) ‘sight, vision, appear-
ance’.
12. Third word: read ˜wzOjyI yiḥzon (typo).
*µyyEq' qayyem D (root qwm) ‘to confirm, establish; here: ‘to let live’.
13. µyy'q'tai ʔitqayyam Dt (root qwm) ‘to be allowed to live, kept alive’.
*byfewao ʔoṭeb C (imperfect in G: bf'yyI yiṭab, a Hebraism for bf'yyE yeṭab; cf. var.) ‘to be well’
(here impersonal: ʔoṭeb lǝ-X ‘it was well with X, X prospered, was fine’).
15. *h[orp' parʕoh ‘pharaoh’.
17. *qs'y[e l[' ʕal ʕésaq (prep.) ‘because of, on account of’.
19. trm'a' ʔamart = trm'a] ʔǝmart (cf. var. and see p. xv, end).
tj;a' ʔaḥāt = tj;a] ʔǝḥāt (cf. var. and see p. xv, end).

Chapter 13

3. an:l;f]m' maṭṭǝlānā ‘journey’ (cf. lf'n} nǝṭal).

*at;ymedq' qadmetā ‘former time or occasion’; at;ymedq'b] bǝ-qadmetā ‘previously’.
6. rb'wso *sobar (anomalous verb type) ‘to bear, support’.
Read ˜whon}y:nqi qinyānǝhon (typo).
7. One expects y[er; rāʕe (cstr.) for ˜['r; rāʕan, or yāt or dǝ- after rāʕan.
90 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16

ha;z:yrip] Pǝrizzāʔā ‘Perizzite’.

10. *πq'z} zǝqap (πwqozyI yizqop) G ‘to raise, lift up’.
an:d]ry" Yardǝnā GN.
*lwko kol with suffixes has the base Alwku kull-.
ay:qyçi tybe bet šiqyā ‘an irrigated (or well-watered) area’ (cf. yqiça' ʔašqi C ‘to water’).
µdus] Sǝdom GN.
hr;wmo[] ʕǝmorāh GN.
*yfem; māṭe (prep.) ‘as far as’ (lit.: ‘reaching, extending to’).
r['wxo Ṣóʕar GN.
11. rj'b] *bǝḥar (rj'byI yibḥar) G ‘to choose’.
at;ymedq' qadmetā here: ‘east’.
yhiwjoa] ʔǝḥóhi error for yhiwjua] ʔǝḥúhi (cf. var.).
13. yçena' ʔanše a Hebraism (cf. MT); yçen:a] ʔǝnāše is expected (cf. var.).
*an:wmom; māmonā usually means ‘wealth, money’ in Aramaic.
*at;ywIg/} at;y}wygi giwyǝtā/gǝwitā (pl. at;y:ywIg/} at;y:wygI giwyātā/gǝwiyātā) ‘body’.
16. *ar;p[' ʕaprā ‘dust’.
*rç;pai ʔipšār ‘possibility’ (originally: ‘division, alternative’); rç;pai tyle let ʔipšār ‘it is not
possible’ (‘to do’: dǝ- + imperfect or lǝ- + infinitive).
17. *˚yleh' hallek D ‘to walk, go’.
*ak;rwau ʔurkā ‘length’.
*ay:twpu putyā ‘width’.
18. aremm' Mamreʔ PN.
˜wrobj' Ḥabron GN.

Chapter 14

1. lp'r;ma' ʔamrāpal PN; lb'b; Bābal GN; ˚wyOra' ʔaryok PN; rs;l;a' ʔallāsār GN; rm'[ol;Ard;k] Kǝdār-
lāʕómar PN; µl;y[e ʕelām GN; l[;dti Tidʕāl PN.
ymem][' ʕamǝme an emphatic plural in -e (see §18.4).
2. [r'b' Báraʕ PN; [ç'rbi Biršaʕ PN; ba;nçi Šinʔāb PN; hm;da' ʔadmāh GN; rb'aemç' Šamʔébar PN;
µyyIwbox] Ṣǝboyim GN; [l'b' Bálaʕ GN.
3. *am;y" yammā ‘sea’.
*aj;lmi milḥā ‘salt’.
4. yres[' at'rt' tarta ʕasre, yres[' tl;t] tǝlāt ʕasre see §16.2, end (p. 48).
*dr'm] mǝrad G ‘to rebel’.
5. yres[' [b'ra' ʔarbaʕ ʕasre see §16.2, end (p. 48).
*aj;m] mǝḥā G ‘to strike, smite’.
*ar;b;ygI gibbārā ‘warrior’ (for MT µyaip;r] rǝpāʔîm).
µyIn"rq' twrot]ç[' ʕaštǝrot Qarnáyim GN.
ay:p'yqit' taqqipayyā translates MT µyzIWzh' haz-zûzîm (gentilic?).
at'm]h; Hāmǝtā GN.
an:t;m]yae ʔemǝtānā (adj.) ‘fearsome’ (here an emphatic plural in -e); translates MT µymiyaeh; hā-
ʔêmîm (gentilic?).
 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16 91

µyIt'y:rqi hwEç; Šāweh Qiryātáyim GN.

6. ha;rwjo Ḥorāʔā ‘Hurrian’.
ry[is] Seʕir GN; ˜r;ap; Pāʔrān GN.
*˚m's] sǝmak G ‘to lean upon; l[' ˚ymis] sǝmik ʕal ‘bordering on’.
7. gwluypi pillug (Hebrew) ‘division’; an:ydi *dinā ‘legal case, decision, judgment’; an:ydi gwluypi pillug
dinā renders MT fp;v]mi ˜y[e ʕên mišpāṭ (‘spring of judgment’).
µq;r] Rǝqām GN (MT vdeq; Qādēš).
ha;q;l]m;a] ʔǝmālǝqāʔā ‘Amalekite’.
ha;rwmoa] ʔǝmorāʔā ‘Amorite’.
ydig" ˜y[e ʕen Gádi GN.
8. *rd's' saddar D ‘to arrange, position, set up’; ab;r;q] rd's' saddar qǝrābā ‘to join battle’.
9. *lybeqli li-qbel (prep.) ‘against’.
10. ar;m;j] ḥemārā ‘bitumen, pitch’.
*ra't]çai ʔištǝʔar (root šʔr) Gt ‘to be left, survive, remain over’.
11. *ab;ç] šǝbā G ‘to seize, capture’; ybit]çai Gt ‘to be taken captive’.
11, 12. an:yn:qi qināynā and hynEyn:qi qināyneh are typos for an:y:nqi qinyānā and hynEy:nqi qinyāneh.
13. *byzEyçe šezeb (anomalous verb type; loan from Akkadian) ‘to save’; *bz"yçem] mǝšezab (passive
ptcpl) ‘survivor, fugitive’.
*ha;r;b[i ʕibrāʔā ‘Hebrew’.
yreç] šǝre passive ptcpl, ‘encamped’.
lkoça' ʔaškol PN; rnE[; ʕāner PN.
*am;y:q] çn:a] ʔǝnāš qǝyāmā ‘ally/allies’.
14. *zyrez: zārez D ‘to rouse, muster’.
yres[' tn"m;t] tǝmānat ʕasre see §16.2, end (p. 48).
˜d; Dān GN.
15. gl'p]tai ʔitpǝlag for Gt gylep]tai ʔitpǝleg (cf. var.) or Dt gl'p'tai ʔitpallag; gl'p] pǝlag G ‘to
separate’; gylep' palleg D ‘to divide’; gl'p'ta/igylep]tai ʔitpǝleg/ʔitpallg Gt/Dt, with ʕal, ‘to
split up (intrans.) against’.
hb;wjo Ḥobāh GN.
qç'm;d' Dammā́ šaq GN.
17. *an:p] pǝnā G ‘to turn’; ynIp' panni D ‘to clear, remove; to level’; an"p'm] mǝpanna (rare passive
ptcpl form) ‘clear, levelled’ (MT ʕḗmeq šāwē ‘valley of the Plain’).
as;yre resā ‘race(-course)’; as;yre tybe bet resā ‘race-course, arena’ (MT ˚l,M,h' qm,[e ʕḗmeq ham-
mélek ‘king’s valley’).
18. qd'x' ykilm' Malki-ṣádaq PN.
µl'çwruy] Yǝrušlam GN.
*çymeç' šammeš D ‘to minister, wait upon’.
lae ʔel ‘El’ (divine name).
yl'y[i ʕillay (adj.; emphatic ha;l;y[i ʕillāʔā; see Paradigm A.5) ‘high(est)’.
20. ha;n}s; sānǝʔā archaic or Hebraizing for *ay:n}s; sānǝyā ‘enemy’ (participle of an:s] *sǝnā G ‘to
hate’).
*al;wko kollā (emphatic state of lwko kol) ‘everything, the whole’.
22. *µyrea] ʔǝrem C (root µwr rwm) ‘to raise, lift up’.
92 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16

23. *af;wju ḥuṭā ‘thread’.

*an:s;m] mǝsānā ‘shoe’; at;q]r[' ʕarqǝtā ‘strap’; an:s;m] tq'r[' ʕarqat mǝsānā ‘shoe-lace’.
rt'[' ʕattar D (of rt'[] ʕǝtar) ‘to make rich’.
24. lk'a' ʔakal = lk'a] ʔakal (cf. var., and see p. xv, end).
aq;l;wju *ḥullāqā ‘portion, share’.

Chapter 15

1. *ha;wbun} nǝbuʔā ‘prophecy, inspiration, vision’.

*ap;qwtu tuqpā (abs./cstr. πwqot] tǝqop) ‘strength’.
*ar;ga' ʔagrā ‘reward; pay(ment)’.
2. µyhiloa] ywy Ywy ʔǝlohim (Hebrew) ‘(O) Lord God’.
al;d] dǝ-lā here: ‘without’.
ad;lw" waldā ‘child, offspring’.
*as;n:rp' parnāsā (loan from Greek πρόνοος) ‘administration’; bar parnāsā ‘manager’ (MT
qv,m,A˜B, ben-méšeq).
ha;q;çm'd' Dammasqāʔā ‘Damascene’.
rz"a'ylia] ʔǝliʕázar PN.
4. *˜yhel;yai/˜yhel;a] ʔǝlāhen/ʔillāhen ‘but (rather), however, on the contrary’.
5. ak;s] sǝkā G ‘to look’; ykit'sai ʔistakki Dt ‘to look’.
*˜ydek] kǝ-den ‘thus’ (lit.: ‘like this’).
6. *˜ymeyhe hemen (irregular C verb) ‘to believe’.
*byçej/] bç'j] ḥǝšab/ḥǝšeb G ‘to think, plan; to reckon, consider, regard’; the 3fs suffix on the
verb corresponds to the Hebrew h;b,v]j]Y"w" way-yaḥšǝbéhā ‘he reckoned it’, where ‘it’ refers
vaguely to the preceding clause.
*at;wkuz: zākutā (f.; abs. wkuz: zāku) ‘merit, favor, justice’.
7. rwau ʔur GN.
ha;d;sk' Kasdāʔā ‘Chaldaean’.
9. *al;g[i ʕiglā ‘calf’.
*az:[i ʕizzā (f.) ‘female goat’.
*ar;kdi dikrā ‘male; ram’.
an:ynIpç' šapninā ‘turtle-dove’.
an:wyO (hn:wyO) yonā (m.) ‘dove, pigeon’; the final -h is archaic or a Hebraism.
10. gylep' palleg D ‘to split’.
*ywEç] šǝwe ‘half; equal portion’.
bh'y} yǝhab here: ‘to place’.
ag:lpi/ag:lp' palgā/pilgā ‘piece’.
lybeq;l; lā-qābel reflects Tiberian pointing (lbeq’l; lo-qŏbel) for Babylonian lybeqli liqbel.
*ar;bj' ḥabrā ‘companion, counterpart’.
*ap;w[o ʕopā (collective) ‘fowl, bird’.
12. *aç;mçi šimšā (f. and m.) ‘sun’; note: l[; ʕāl, of sun, ‘to set’.
*at'nçi šintā (f.) ‘sleep’.
*at'm]yae ʔemǝtā ‘fear’.
 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16 93

*al;bq' qablā ‘darkness’.

13. *[d;ymi middāʕ a miqtāl infinitive (G); these occur, along with the more common miqtal forms,
in imitation of the Hebrew infinitive absolute construction, to emphasize the finite verb.
*ar;yy:d' dayyārā ‘sojourner, dweller’ (cf. rd; dār).
[r'a'b] bə-ʔáraʕ = [r'a]b' ba-ʔəraʕ (cf. the var., and see p. xv, end).
˜whob] ˜wjul]pyi yiplǝḥun bǝhon ‘they will work (as slaves) among them’, rendering MT µWdb;[}w"
wa-ʕăbādûm ‘they will serve them’.
*ynI[' ʕanni D ‘to oppress’.
14. *˜yke ken (adv.) ‘thus’; *˜yke rt'b; bātar ken ‘afterwards’; *˜yke l[' ʕal ken ‘therefore’.
15. *rb'q] qǝbar (rb'qyI yiqbar) G ‘to bury’; rb'q]tai Gt ‘to be buried’.
*at;wbuyse (at;wbuyçe) sebutā (f.) ‘old age’; here with ś for s (archaism or Hebraism).
16. *ar;d; dārā ‘generation’.
y[;ybir] rǝbiʕāy see §23.3.
*µyliç] šǝlim (adj.) ‘complete, whole, finished’; perhaps here for µyleç] šǝlem (so Berliner):
*µyleç] šǝlem G ‘to be finished, completed, whole; to come to an end’.
*ab;wjo ḥobā ‘guilt, debt.
17. tl'[] ʕǝl(l)at error for tl'[' ʕállat (cf. var.); tl'[' aç;mçi tw:hw" wa-hwāt šimšā ʕállat imitates the
asyndetic construction of the MT: ha;B; vm,V,h' yhiyw" wa-yhî haš-šémeš bā́ ʔāh ‘the sun had set’.
ar;wnUt' tannurā ‘furnace, brazier’.
an:n}t/; an:n}t/' an:n:t] tǝnānā/tannǝnā/tānǝnā ‘smoke’; Adi di- is either an error for Ad] dǝ- (cf. var.) or
reflects a variant vocalization of the noun (˜n:tdi di-tnān).
ar;w[ob; bāʕorā ‘torch’.
*at;ç;yai ʔiššātā (f. sg.; abs. aç;yai ʔiššā) ‘fire’.
*ad;[] ʕǝdā G ‘to pass (by, over, through)’.
18. *al;jn" naḥlā ‘wadi, stream’.
*tr;p] Pǝrāt ‘Euphrates’.
19. ha;m;l]ç; Šālǝmāʔā gentilic (MT ynIyQ´h' haq-Qênî).
ha;z:ynIq] Qǝnizzāʔā ‘Qenizzite’.
*yn"wmodq' qadmonay (adj.; emph. ha;n:wmoq' qadmonāʔā; see Paradigm A.5) ‘ancient’; here: ha;n:wmoq'
Qadmonāʔā means ‘Qadmonite’.
20. ha;f;yji ḥittāʔā ‘Hittite’.
ha;z"rip] Pǝrizzāʔā ‘Perizzite’.
ar;b;ygI gibbārā cf. 14:5.
21. ha;ç;ygIrg" Gargišāʔā ‘Gargishite’ (MT yviG:r]GI Girgāšî).
ha;s;wbuy} Yǝbusāʔā ‘Jebusite’.

Chapter 16

2. ynI[n"m] mǝnaʕni for ynI["nm' manʕáni (cf. var.).

µai am; mā ʔim (also µaim; māʔim) ‘perhaps; how? when?’.
ynIb]tai ʔitbǝni Gt ‘to be built (up); to acquire offspring’.
3. *ap;wso sopā ‘end; mis-sop ‘at the end of, after’.
hl'[]b' baʕǝlah Tiberianizing for hl'[b' baʕlah (cf. var.).
94 APPENDIX: TARGUM ONQELOS TO GENESIS 12–16

4. *ydi[' ʕaddi D ‘to become pregnant; to remove’.

*lq;/lq' qal/qāl (root llq q-l-l) G ‘become small, unimportant, of little esteem’.
*an"wboyri ribbonā ‘lord, master’; at;n}wboyri *ribbonǝtā ‘lady, mistress’.
7. ar;gj' Ḥagrā GN (MT rWv Šûr).
8. ay:ta; ʔātyā for ay:t]a; ʔātǝyā (cf. al;z}a; ʔāzǝlā).
9. db'[t'çai *ʔištaʕbad (Št) passive and reflexive of dybe[ç' šaʕbed (12:5); the a afer ʕ (in the form
in Sperber’s main text) reflects a Tiberian ḥāṭēp vowel (db'[}T'v]ai ʔištaʕăbad).
10. *ygIsa' ʔasgi C ‘to increase’ (trans.); for ha;g:sa' ʔasgāʔā, see note to 15:13.
*ay:gs' sagyā (abs./cstr. ygEs] sǝge) ‘multitude, large amount’.
11. la[em;çyi Yišmāʕe(ʔ)l PN.
12. *ad;wrom; mārodā ‘rebel; wild ass’ (MT µd;a; ar,P, péreʔ ʔādām); in the variant: ad;wro[; ʕārodā
‘wild ass’.
*˚yrix] ṣǝrik (adj.) ‘needed, necesary; needing, needy’.
13. ll'm'tai ʔitmallal Dt ‘to converse’
14. ar;q] qǝrā here impersonal: ‘one called’.
*µy:q' qayyām (adj.) ‘living, existing, enduring’.
µq;r] Rǝqām, ar;gj' Ḥagrā GNs (MT vdeq; Qādēš, dr,B; Bā́ red).
15. td'yleyd] typo? for td'yleydi d-ilédat (so Berliner).
 GLOSSARY OF THE LESSON VOCABULARIES
Aramaic — English

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

ʔab, pl. ʔǝbāhātā father ʔāb 14

ʔǝbad, yebad to perish, die ʔbd 1
ʔizgaddā (ordinary) messenger (Pers.) 15
ʔǝzal, yezel to go hlk 1
ʔǝḥad, yeḥod to seize, grasp, lay hold of; close (door) ʔḥz 7
ʔaḥ, pl. ʔaḥayyā brother ʔāḥ 14
ʔǝḥātā, cstr./abs. ʔǝḥāt, sister (my sister: ʔǝḥāti or ʔǝḥāt) ʔāḥôt 19
pl. ʔaḥ(ḥ)ǝwātā
ʔaḥsānǝtā possession, inheritance; cf. ʔaḥsen 14
ʔuḥrān, ʔuḥri, ʔuḥrānin, other ʔaḥēr 23
ʔuḥrānǝyān
ʔit (there) is, are yēš 17
ʔǝkal, yekol to eat ʔkl 4
C ʔokel to cause to eat, feed ʔkl C
ʔillen these ʔḗlle 8
ʔilānā tree ʕēṣ 7
ʔálap thousand ʔélep 18
ʔim if ʔim 21
ʔamtu maidservanthood (in idiom) 5
ʔamtā, pl. ʔamhātā female servant, slave ʔāmā 6
ʔimmā (f.), pl. ʔimmāhātā mother (my mother: ʔimmā) ʔēm 11
ʔǝmar, yemar, memar to say ʔmr 7
lǝ-memar intro dir. quote lē(ʔ)mōr 12
ʔān where? ʔān 8
lǝ-ʔān whither? 8
mǝnān whence? 8
ʔǝnā I ʔănî/ʔānōkî 18
ʔǝnáḥnā we ʔa¯náḥnû 18
ʔinnin they, those (f.) hēn 18
ʔinnun they, those (m.) hēm 18
ʔǝnāšā, cstr./abs. ʔǝnāš man, men; sg. can be coll. ʔĕnôš 19
ʔǝsar, yesar to bind, take captive ʔsr 9
ʔap (adv.) also, likewise, even ʔap 22
ʔappayyā (pl.) face, surface pānîm 9
ʔapreš to divide, separate bdl C 14
ʔurḥā/ʔorḥa, cstr./abs. ʔóraḥ (f.), way, road, conduct, behavior ʔṓraḥ 18
pl. ʔurḥātā
ʔǝre that, the fact that; when, since, bec. kî 7
ʔorāytā the Torah tôrā 18
ʔarʕā (cstr./abs. ʔəraʕ; f.) land, country; the earth ʔéreṣ 2
ʔǝšad, yešod to pour out, shed, deposit 20
ʔǝtā, yete to come bwʔ/ʔth 10
C ʔayti to bring; to cause to come bwʔ C 15
ʔatt you (f. sg.) ʔatt 18
ʔatt you (m. sg.) ʔattā 18
ʔattin you (f. pl.) ʔatten 18
ʔattun you (m. pl.) ʔattem 18
96 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH)

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

ʔittu wifehood (in idiom) 5

ʔittǝtā, pl. nǝšayyā woman, wife ʔiššā 1
ʔattānā/ʔǝtānā female donkey ʔātōn 6
ʔatrā (cstr./abs. ʔətar) place, site, location cf. ʔăšer 8

bǝ- in, within; with (instr.) bǝ- 2

bǝ-go, bǝgawwi in, within, in the midst of bǝ-tôk 4
bǝ-yad, b-idā dǝ into the hand/power/control of; through, 4, 9
by means of
bǝ-ken at that time, in those days 18
bi-sṭar beside, near ʔḗṣel/bǝ-ṣad 11
bǝ-ʕene in the eyes of, in the opinion of bǝ-ʕênê 17
bǝʔeš to be/become/seem bad; cf. biš 17
bǝdil because of, for the sake of baʕăbûr 19
bǝdil dǝ- so that, in order that (+ impf.) lǝmáʕan 19
ben between (ben u-ben or ben x lǝ-y) bên 11
bǝnā, yibne to build bnh 10
baʕlā husband, owner báʕal 6
bǝʕirā cattle (bulls, oxen, cows) bāqār/bǝʕîr 6
bārā the outside (of a place) ḥûṣ 9
bār min except, except for, other than 9
lǝ-bārā to the outside 9
mib-bārā on the outside (of: lǝ) 9
lǝ-mib-bārā to the outside (of: lǝ) 9
bǝrā son bĕn 6
bǝrattā daughter bat 6
berā (f.) well, pit bǝʔēr 11
bārek (√brk D) to bless bērēk 13
Dt ʔitbārak to be blessed 23
birkǝtā blessing bǝrākā 13
biš bad, evil, wicked raʕ 17
betā house báyit 3
bātar after, behind (spatial, temporal) ʔaḥărê 4
bātar dǝ- after ʔaḥărê ʔăšer 11

gabrā/gubrā (abs./cstr. gəbar) man ʔîš 1

bǝ-go, bǝ-gawwi in, within, in the midst of bǝ-tôk 4
mig-go, mig-gawwi from within, from the midst of mit-tôk 4
gǝzar, yigzar to cut; to circumcize gzr/krt 4
gǝzar qǝyām ʕim to make a covenant with 4
gǝlā to reveal pqḥ 23
Gt ʔitgǝli to appear, reveal oneself rʔh N 23
gamlā camel gāmāl 6
ginnǝtā garden gan(nā) 6

dā this (f.) zōˀt 7

dǝbar, yidbar to take (s.th. along with you), lead (away) lqḥ 2
Gt ʔiddǝbar to be taken 23
dahbā gold zāhāb 8
√d-w-r: dār, yǝdur to sojourn gwr 11
dǝḥel, yidḥal to be afraid, fear (obj. usu. min (qǝdām) yrʔ 5
dǝḥeq/dǝḥaq to press, urge; to oppress (yāt, bǝ-, lǝ-) dḥq twice 9
√d-y-n: dān, yǝdin to judge dyn 11
 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH) 97

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

dilmā lest, so that not (+ impf.) pen 19

dǝmā (abs./cstr. dam) blood dām 20
den this (m.) ze 7
dāromā the south dārôm 5
mid-dāromā lǝ- to the south of 5
daššā door, doorleaf délet 7

hā now (then), look, here (is) hinnē 18

huʔ he, that (m.) hûʔ 18
hiʔ she, that (f.) hîʔ 18
hǝwāh, yǝhe/yihwe to be; with lǝ-, to become hyh 10
hǝwāh leh X he had X 10
hākā here pōh 12
hekǝlā palace, temple hêkāl 4
hālǝkā hither, to this place hā́ lǝkā 12
hǝpak to overthrow; to convert, change hpk 9
hǝpak yāt X lǝ-Y to change X into Y 9

zǝban to buy, purchase 8

D zabben to sell mkr 13
zǝʕer small ṣāʕîr/qāṭōn 17
zarʕitā (f.; abs. zarʕit, cstr. zarʕi descendant, family mišpāḥā 23
pl. abs. zarʕǝyātā)
ḥabbel to destroy šḥt D/ḥbl D late 13
ḥǝdi, yiḥde to rejoice śmḥ/ḥdh rare 10
ḥad, f. ḥǝdā one ˀeḥād 16
ḥad ʕəsar, f. ḥǝdā ʕasre eleven ʔaḥad ʕāśār 16
ḥǝdat, f. abs. & m. emph. ḥadtā, new ḥādāš 17
f. emph. ḥǝdattā
ḥawwi D to tell, relate, inform (someone: lǝ-) ngd C 22
ḥǝzā, yiḥze to see rʔh/ḥzh 10
C ʔaḥzi to show, cause to see rʔh C 14
Ct ʔittaḥzi to appear 23
ḥay, f. ḥayyā alive, living ḥay 18
ḥǝyā to live, be alive ḥyh 18
ḥayyāb wicked, evil, guilty of crime ḥaṭṭāʔ 17
ḥakkim wise, clever ḥākām 17
ḥamrā (abs./cstr. ḥəmar) wine yáyin/ḥémer 14
ḥǝmārā male donkey ḥămôr 6
ḥǝmeš, ḥamšāh five ḥāmēš 16
ḥamšin fifty ḥămiššîm 18
ʔaḥsen (√ḥsn C) to take possession of (usu: land); to bequeath, yrš 14
hand on (X to Y: yāt X lǝ-Y); cf. ʔaḥsānǝtā
ḥaqlā (abs./cstr. ḥǝqal) field śāde 6
ḥarbā (f.) sword ḥéreb 6
ḥǝšokā darkness ḥṓšek 14

ṭāb good, just, pleasant ṭôb 17

ṭǝmar to hide, conceal ṭmr 9
ṭǝʕā to wander, go astray tʕh 14
C ʔaṭʕi to lead astray 14
ṭurā mountain har 1
98 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH)

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

yǝdā, cstr. yad hand yād 9

bǝ-yad, b-idā dǝ into the hand/power/control of; through, 4, 9
by means of
yǝdaʕ, yiddaʕ, middaʕ/medaʕ to know ydʕ 7
yǝdaʕ ʔǝre to know that 7
C hodaʕ/ʔodaʕ to inform (s.o.: yāt) of/about (s.th. yāt) ydʕ C 15
yǝhab, yitten to give; to place, set ntn 3
ʔoḥi (√yḥy C) to hurry, go hurriedly; to hurry (to do: lǝ- + inf.) mhr D 15
Yy, Ywy writing of the divine name 9
yǝkel, yikkol, mikkal/mekal to be able yākōl 12
yǝled, yǝlid, melad to bear (a child) yld 16
Gt ʔityəled or ʔitiled to be born yld Pual 23
C ʔoled to beget yld C 16
yomā day yôm 7
yǝmāmā daylight 14
yǝret, yerat to inherit yrš 7
yāt (direct object particle) ʔet-/ʔēt 2
yǝteb, yitteb to sit, dwell, remain, settle yšb 5
C ʔoteb to cause to settle yšb C 15
Ct ʔittotab to settle (intr.) 23

kǝ- like, as, according to kǝ- 4

ka-ḥdā together, as one 12
kad when kaʔăšer/kî/bǝ- 11
or kǝ- + inf.
kokǝbā star kôkāb 11
kol/kull- all, every, whole, entire kōl/kol- 7
kallǝtā daughter-in-law kallā 18
kǝmā dǝ- according as, as (conj.) 18
bǝ-ken at that time, in those days 18
Kǝnáʕan Canaan Kǝnáʕan 12
Kǝnaʕǝnāʔā Canaanite Kǝnaʕănî 18
kǝnaš to gather, assemble (trans.) 23
Gt ʔitkǝneš to be gathered, gather (intr.) 23
Dt ʔitkannaš to gather (intr.) 23
kaspā (abs./cstr. kǝsap) silver, money késep 2
kǝʕan now, so now, now then ʕattā 20
kapnā famine rāʕāb 5
karmā vineyard kérem 9
kǝtab to write ktb 2

lǝ- to, for (a person), to into (a place) lǝ-, ʔel 1

lǝ-ʔān whither? 8
lǝ-bārā to the outside 9
lǝ-mā why? lā́ mmā 2
lǝ-madnǝḥā east(ward) 5
lǝ-memar intro dir. quote lē(ʔ)mōr 12
lǝ-mib-bārā to the outside (of: lǝ) 9
lǝ-qaddāmut (out) to meet liqra(ʔ)t 13
lǝ-tammān to there, thither 1
lā (negative) lōʔ, ʔal 1
ʔalwi (√lwy C) to accompany cf. lwh 14
lǝwāt to, unto, into the presence of (s.o.) ʔel/lipnê 3
 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH) 99

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

mil-lǝwāt from the presence of mil-lipnê 3

laḥdā very much, greatly mǝʔōd 12
laḥmā bread, food léḥem 3
lelǝyā, pl. abs. lelāwān night laylā 7, 16
let (there) is, are not ʔên 17

mā what? mā 7
lǝ-mā why? lā́ mmā 2
mǝʔāh (f.) hundred mēʔā 18
mā(ʔ)nā vessel, utensil kǝlî/ʔŏnî 8
madbǝḥā, cstr. madbaḥ altar mizbēaḥ 9
madbǝrā desert, steppe, wilderness 5
madnǝḥā the east mizrāḥ 5
lǝ-madnǝḥā east(ward) 5
mim-madnaḥ/madnǝḥā on/to the east of 5
√m-w-t: mit, yǝmut to die mwt 11
C ʔǝmet to cause to die, put to death mwt C 15
mayyā water máyim 3
mekǝlā (infin. of ʔəkal as noun) food 12
maktāšā, cstr. maktāš plague, affliction négaʕ 15
malʔǝkā angel, divine messenger malʔāk 15
malkā king mélek 1
malkǝtā queen malkā 1
malkutā, pl. malkǝwātā kingdom, reign, rule malkût,mamlākā 9
mallel (√mll D) to speak (with: ʕim) dibbēr 13
Dt ʔitmallal to converse 23
millǝtā (f.), pl. millayyā word dābār 11
memǝrā (infin. of ʔəmar as noun) word, utterance 12
memǝra da-Yy the Word of the Lord, circumloc. for God 12
lǝ-memar intro dir. quote lē(ʔ)mōr 12
man who? mî 7
min from, out of; partitive min 1
mǝnān whence? 8
mib-bārā on the outside (of: lǝ) 9
mig-go, mig-gawwi from within, from the midst of mit-tôk 4
mid-dāromā lǝ- to the south of 5
mil-lǝwāt from the presence of mil-lipnê 3
mim-madnǝḥā on/to the east of 5
mis-sǝṭar from beside 13
me-ʕal from upon mēʕal 3
min qǝdām from before, from the presence of mil-lipnê 4
mit-tammān from there, thence miššām 1
mǝnā, yimne to count mnh 10
D manni to appoint pqd C
Gt ʔitmǝni to be counted 23
mǝnaʕ, yimnaʕ to prevent, hinder mnʕ 12
mǝsar, yimsar to hand over (to into the hand of: bǝ-yad, lǝ-, 4
or qǝdām)
maʕrǝbā the west maʕărāb 5
maṣṣutā (f.) quarrel, strife; cf. nǝṣā nṣʔ N, C;
maṣṣā/maṣṣût 19
Miṣrāʔā, pl. Miṣrāʔe Egyptian, the Egyptians Miṣrî(m) 18
Miṣráyim Egypt Miṣráyim 5
100 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH)

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

maškǝnā tent, habitation ʔṓhel/miškān 3

mešǝrā plain, valley mîšôr 3

nǝbiyā prophet nābîʔ 8

nahrā (abs./cstr. nəhar) river nāhār 2
nǝhorā light ʔôr/(nēr/nîr) 14
nǝḥat/nǝḥet, yeḥot to come/go down, descend yrd 3
C ʔaḥet/ʔǝḥet to bring/lead/send down yrd C 15
nǝṭal, yiṭṭol to raise up, lift, take up; to set out, travel nśʔ, nsʕ 1
nǝṭar, yiṭṭar to guard, preserve, keep, observe nṣr 4
nǝseb/nǝsab, yissab to take (most genl. vb. for taking) lqḥ 5
nǝseb X b-ideh he picked up X 9
nǝpal, yippel to fall npl 3
nǝpaq, yippoq to go forth yṣʔ 1
nǝpaq min X to leave X, depart from X 1
C ʔappeq to bring/lead/send forth; produce yṣʔ C 15
nǝpeš, yippoš to become numerous, widespread 8
napšā (abs./cst nǝpaš; f.), soul, person népeš 18
pl. napšātā
nǝṣā to quarrel; cf. maṣṣutā nṣʔ N, C 19
nǝṣab, yiṣṣob to plant nṭʕ 7

sǝged, yisgod to bow down hištaḥăwā 5

sǝgi to be/become numerous rbh 17
saggi, saggiʔā many, much, numerous rab(b) 17
bi-sṭar beside, near ʔḗṣel/bǝ-ṣad 11
mis-sǝṭar from beside 13
√s-y-b: sib/seb to grow old zqn/śêbā old age 11
sǝleq, yissaq to go up, ascend (intr.) ʕlh 5
C ʔasseq to bring/lead/send up ʕlh C 15
Dt ʔistallaq to go up 23

ʕǝbad, yaʕbed to do, act; to make, fashion ʕśh 7

ʕǝbad qǝrābā ʕim to wage war against 9
ʕabdā servant, slave; attendant ʕébed 6
ʕǝbar, yiʕbar/yiʕibar to cross (yāt or bǝ); to transgress ʕbr 2
C ʔaʕbar to lead/take across ʕbr C 14
ʕad up to, as far as, until ʕad 3
ʕal on, down onto; against; about, concerning, ʕal 3
in regard to
ʕal ʔappe on the face, surface of; right up against, 9
over against
ʕal mā why? lā́ mmā 2
me-ʕal from upon mēʕal 3
√ʕ-l-l: ʕal/ʕāl, yeʕol to enter (a place: lǝ-) bwʔ 11
C ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel to bring/lead/take in; cause to enter bwʔ C 15
ʕulemā boy, lad; servant, attendant náʕar/ʕélem 4
ʕulemǝtā girl, maiden naʕărā/ʕalmā 4
ʕālǝmā (abs./cstr. ʕālam) world, eternity ʕôlām 22
ʕad ʕālǝmā forever ʕad ʕôlām
ʕim, ʕimm- with, together with ʕim/ʔet-/ʔēt 4
ʕammā people, the people; nation ʕam 1
ʕānā flock(s) (sheep and goats) ṣō(ʔ)n 6
 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH) 101

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

ʕenā (f.), pl. ʕenayyā eye; well, spring ʕáyin 17

bǝ-ʕene in the eyes of, in the opinion of bǝ-ʕênê 17
ʕǝsar, ʕasrāh ten ʕéśer 16
ʕasrin twenty ʕeśrîm 18
ʕǝraq, yiʕroq/yiʕiroq to flee brḥ,nws 1
ʕǝtar to be/become rich ʕšr 17
ʕattir rich ʕāšîr 17

ʔitpallag ʕal (√plg Dt) to attack 23

pǝlaḥ, yiplaḥ to serve, work (as slave, etc.) ʕbd 2
C ʔaplaḥ to make (someone) work, reduce to servitude ʕbd C 14
Pǝlištāʔā, pl. Pǝlištāʔe Philistine(s) Pǝlištî(m) 18
paqqed to command (usu. foll. by dir. command using pqd/ṣwh D 18
impv.); to put s.o. (yāt) in charge of (ʕal)
pǝras, yipres to pitch (a tent) nṭh 3
ʔapreš (√prš C) to divide, separate bdl C 14
Dt ʔitpāraš to separate (intr.) 23
pitgāmā word, thing, affair (Pers. lw.) dābār 2
pǝtaḥ, yiptaḥ to open ptḥ 7

ṣalli (√ṣly D) to pray hitpallēl 13

ṣǝlotā prayer tǝpillā 13
ṣippunā the north ṣāpōn 5
ṣaprā morning bṓqer 2

qabbel to receive lqḥ/qbl D late 13

qabbel min to obey 13
qabbel ṣǝlotā to hear a prayer 13
qabbel lǝ-memar X to heed, obey X 13
ʔitqǝbar (√qbr Gt) to be buried 23
ʔaqdem (√qdm C) to do s.th. early or first (usu. + bǝ-ṣaprā, fol- škm C 14
lowed by a 2nd coordinated verb); to go early
lǝ-qaddāmut (D infin.) (out) to meet liqra(ʔ)t 13
qǝdām before, in the presence of lipnê 4
min qǝdām from before, from the presence of mil-lipnê 4
qadmāy first 23
√q-w-m: qām, yǝqum to arise, stand, stop qwm 11
C ʔǝqem to set up, establish, to cause to stand, station qwm C/kwn C 15
Dt ʔitqayyam to be allowed to live, etc. 23
qǝṭal to kill hrg/qṭl 2
qǝyāmā/qiyāmā treaty, covenant; cf. qām bǝrît 4
qālā voice, sound qôl 8
qǝnā, yiqne to acquire, purchase qnh 10
qinyānā property, possessions 2
qǝrā, yiqre to call, summon (lǝ-); to name qrʔ 10
qǝrā yāt šom/šem X Y to name X Y 10
qǝreb, yiqrab to approach, draw near (to: lǝ, lǝwāt) qrb 5
qǝreb + inf. to be on the point of 5
qǝreb bǝ- to come into contact with, touch 5
D qāreb to bring, present, offer qrb C 13
qǝrābā battle, war milḥāmā 9
qurbānā offering minḥā/qorbān 13
qartā, pl. qirwayyā city ʕîr 1
102 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH)

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

rab, rabbā, rabrǝbayyā great, big, important gādōl 17

rabbā as noun, leader, prince, high official 17
ʔarbaʕ, ʔarbəʕā four ʔarbaʕ 16
ʔarbaʕ ʕasre fourteen ʔarbaʕ ʕaśrē 16
ʔarbǝʕin forty ʔarbāʕîm 18
rugzā (abs./cstr. rǝgaz) anger, wrath rṓgez 6
rǝdap to pursue (obj. with bātar) rdp 4
rǝhaṭ/rǝheṭ, yirhaṭ to run rwṣ 4
rǝḥem, yirḥam to love ʔhb 6
ramšā evening ʕéreb 2
rǝʕā, yirʕe, ptcp. rāʕe, pl. rāʕan to pasture, tend rʕh 10, 18
rāʕǝyā, cstr. rāʕe, pl. rāʕǝwātā shepherd, herdsman rōʕe 18

rešā top, head, beginning rōʔš 23

ʔištǝʔar (√šʔr Gt) to survive, remain over 23
šabbaḥ (D) to praise hillēl 13
ʔištǝbi (√šby Gt) to be captured 23
šǝbaʕ, šabʕāh/šibʕāh seven šébaʕ 17
šabʕin/šibʕin seventy šibʕîm 18
šǝbaq to leave, abandon, forsake ʕzb 4
šǝbaq + inf. to allow 4
šǝbaq lǝ to forgive 4
šawwi to put, place, set, set up, make śym/šwh D late 13
šǝkeb, yiškob to lie down škb 8
ʔaškaḥ (√škḥ C) to find, come upon mṣʔ 14
šǝlaḥ, yišlaḥ to send, to send a message/messenger šlḥ 8
šǝmā, cstr. šom/šem, pl. šǝmāhātā name šēm 9
šǝmayyā (m. pl.) heaven, the sky šǝmā́ yim 11
šǝmaʕ, yišmaʕ to hear šmʕ 8
C ʔašmaʕ cause to hear/obey, announce, proclaim šmʕ C 14
šǝpar to be/become good ṭyb/yṭb 17
šappir beautiful, handsome, excellent yāpe/ṭôb 17
ʔašqi (√šqy C) to cause to drink; to water (animals) šqh C 14
šǝrā to come to a stop, set up camp, settle down cf. škn 11
D šāri to begin (+ inf. or ptcp.) ḥll C 13
šet, šittāh six šēš 16
šittin sixty šiššîm 18
šǝti, yište to drink šth 10
šattā (f.), cstr. šǝnat, pl. šǝnayyā year šānā 16

tǝbar, yitbar to break, break down; to subdue šbr 9

D tabbar to shatter šbr D
√t-w-b: tāb, yǝtub to return, go/come back šwb 11
C ʔǝteb to bring/lead/send back; to answer (a person: yāt) šwb C/ʕnh 15
tǝḥot under, beneath (+pl. sfs.) táḥat 8
tǝlāt, tǝlātāh three šālôš 16
tǝlāt ʕəsar, tǝlāt ʕasre thirteen šǝlōšā ʕāśār 16
tǝlātin thirty šǝlōšîm 18
tammān there, in that place šām 1
lǝ-tammān to there, thither šā́ mmā 1
mit-tammān from there, thence miššām 1
tǝmāne, tǝmānǝyāh eight šǝmōne 16
 GLOSSARY (ARAMAIC–ENGLISH) 103

Aramaic Gloss = Hebrew Lesson

tǝmānan eighty šǝmōnîm 18

tāqen, f. tāqǝnā good, proper, correct, in good order ṭôb/tqn 18
tǝqep, yitqap to be, grow strong, severe, rich, wealthy kbd/ḥzq 5
tǝqep lǝ-N N became angry ḥrh lǝ- 5
tǝqep rugzeh bǝ- he became angry at/with ḥrh lǝ- 6
taqqip, f. taqqipā strong, powerful, severe ḥāzāq 18
torā bull, ox šôr/ʔélep 6
torǝtā cow pārā? 6
tārek (√trk D) to drive out, expel grš 13
tǝren, f. tarten two šnáyim 16
tǝre ʕəsar, f. tarta ʕasre twelve šnáyim ʕāśār 16
tarʕā gate (of a city), doorway (house, tent) šáʕar 7
tǝšaʕ, tišʕāh nine tḗšaʕ 16
tišʕin ninety tišʕîm 18
English — Aramaic

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

abandon šǝbaq ʕzb 4

able, be yǝkel, yikkol yākōl 12
about ʕal ʕal 3
accompany ʔalwi (√lwy C) cf. lwh 14
according as (conj.) kǝmā dǝ- 18
according to kǝ- kǝ- 4
across, lead/take C ʔaʕbar ʕbr C 14
acquire qǝnā, yiqne qnh 10
affair pitgāmā dābār 2
affliction maktāšā négaʕ 15
afraid, be (obj. usu. min (qǝdām) dǝḥel, yidḥal yrʔ 5
after bātar dǝ- ʔaḥărê ʔăšer 11
after (spatial, temporal) bātar ʔaḥărê 4
against ʕal ʕal 3
against ʕal ʔappe 9
alive ḥay, f. ḥayyā ḥay 18
alive, be ḥǝyā ḥyh 18
all kol/kull- kōl/kol- 7
allow šǝbaq + inf. 4
also ʔap ʔap 22
altar madbǝḥā mizbēaḥ 9
angel malʔǝkā malʔāk 15
anger rugzā rṓgez 6
angry: N became angry tǝqep lǝ-N ḥrh lǝ- 5
angry: he became angry at/with tǝqep rugzeh bǝ- ḥrh lǝ- 6
announce ʔašmaʕ (šmʕ C) šmʕ C 14
answer (a person: yāt) C ʔǝteb šwb C/ʕnh 15
appear Ct ʔittaḥzi 23
appear ʔitgǝli (√gly Gt) 23
appoint D manni pqd C
approach (to: lǝ, lǝwāt) qǝreb, yiqrab qrb 5
arise qām, yǝqum qwm 11
as (conj.) kǝmā dǝ- 18
as (prep.) kǝ- kǝ- 4
ascend sǝleq, yissaq ʕlh 5
astray, go ṭǝʕā tʕh 14
astray, lead C ʔaṭʕi 14
at that time bǝ-ken 18
attack ʔitpallag ʕal (√plg Dt) 23
attendant ʕulemā náʕar/ʕélem 4
attendant ʕabdā ʕébed 6

bad biš raʕ 17

bad, be/become/seem bǝʔeš 17
battle qǝrābā milḥāmā 9
bear (a child) yǝled, yǝlid yld 16
beautiful šappir yāpe/ṭôb 17
because ʔǝre kî 7
because of bǝdil baʕăbûr 19
 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC) 105

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

become hǝwāh, yǝhe/yihwe + lǝ- hyh 10
before qǝdām lipnê 4
before, from min qǝdām mil-lipnê 4
beget C ʔoled yld C 16
begin (+ inf. or ptcp.) D šāri ḥll C 13
beginning rešā rōʔš 23
behavior ʔurḥā/ʔorḥa (f.) ʔṓraḥ 18
behind (spatial, temporal) bātar ʔaḥărê 4
beneath tǝḥot táḥat 8
bequeath ʔaḥsen (√ḥsn C)
beside bi-sṭar ʔḗṣel/bǝ-ṣad 11
beside, from mis-sǝṭar 13
between (ben u-ben or ben x lǝ-y) ben bên 11
big rab, rabbā gādōl 17
bind, take captive ʔǝsar, yesar ʔsr 9
bless bārek (√brk D) bērēk 13
blessed, be Dt ʔitbārak 23
blessing birkǝtā bǝrākā 13
blood dǝmā dām 20
born, be Gt ʔityəled or ʔitiled yld Pual 23
bow down sǝged, yisgod hištaḥăwā 5
boy ʕulemā náʕar/ʕélem 4
bread, food laḥmā léḥem 3
break, break down tǝbar, yitbar šbr 9
bring D qāreb qrb C 13
bring C ʔayti bwʔ C 15
bring back C ʔǝteb šwb C/ʕnh 15
bring down C ʔaḥet/ʔǝḥet yrd C 15
bring forth C ʔappeq yṣʔ C 15
bring in C ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel bwʔ C 15
bring up C ʔasseq ʕlh C 15
brother ʔaḥ, pl. ʔaḥayyā ʔāḥ 14
build bǝnā, yibne bnh 10
bull, ox torā šôr/ʔélep 6
buried, be ʔitqǝbar (√qbr Gt) 23
buy zǝban 8

call qǝrā, yiqre qrʔ 10

camel gamlā gāmāl 6
Canaan Kǝnáʕan Kǝnáʕan 12
Canaanite Kǝnaʕǝnāʔā Kǝnaʕănî 18
captive, take ʔǝsar, yesar ʔsr 9
captured, be ʔištǝbi (√šby Gt) 23
cattle bǝʕirā bāqār/bǝʕîr 6
change hǝpak hpk 9
circumcize gǝzar, yigzar gzr/krt 4
city qartā, pl. qirwayyā ʕîr 1
clever ḥakkim ḥākām 17
close (door) ʔǝḥad, yeḥod ʔḥz 7
come ʔǝtā, yete bwʔ/ʔth 10
come, cause to C ʔayti bwʔ C 15
come back tāb, yǝtub šwb 11
come into contact with qǝreb bǝ- 5
106 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC)

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

come to a stop šǝrā cf. škn 11
come down nǝḥat/nǝḥet, yeḥot yrd 3
come upon ʔaškaḥ (√škḥ C) mṣʔ 14
command paqqed pqd/ṣwh D 18
conceal ṭǝmar ṭmr 9
concerning ʕal ʕal 3
conduct ʔurḥā/ʔorḥa (f.) ʔṓraḥ 18
convert, to hǝpak hpk 9
converse Dt ʔitmallal 23
correct tāqen, f. tāqǝnā ṭôb/tqn 18
count mǝnā, yimne mnh 10
counted, be Gt ʔitmǝni 23
country ʔarʕā (f.) ʔéreṣ 2
covenant qǝyāmā/qiyāmā bǝrît 4
cow torǝtā pārā? 6
cross (yāt or bǝ) ʕǝbar, yiʕbar/yiʕibar ʕbr 2
cut gǝzar, yigzar gzr/krt 4

darkness ḥǝšokā ḥṓšek 14

daughter bǝrattā bat 6
daughter-in-law kallǝtā kallā 18
day yomā yôm 7
in those days bǝ-ken 18
daylight yǝmāmā 14
death, put to C ʔǝmet mwt C 15
depart from nǝpaq min 1
deposit ʔǝšad, yešod 20
descend nǝḥat/nǝḥet, yeḥot yrd 3
descendant zarʕitā mišpāḥā 23
desert madbǝrā 5
destroy ḥabbel šḥt D/ḥbl D late 13
die ʔǝbad, yebad ʔbd 1
die mit, yǝmut mwt 11
die, cause to C ʔǝmet mwt C 15
direct object particle yāt ʔet-/ʔēt 2
direct quote marker lǝ-memar lē(ʔ)mōr 12
divide ʔapreš (√prš C) bdl C 14
divine name Yy, Ywy 9
do, act; to make, fashion ʕǝbad, yaʕbed ʕśh 7
donkey, female ʔattānā/ʔǝtānā ʔātōn 6
donkey, male ḥǝmārā ḥămôr 6
door, doorleaf daššā délet 7
doorway (house, tent) tarʕā šáʕar 7
down onto ʕal ʕal 3
draw near (to: lǝ, lǝwāt) qǝreb, yiqrab qrb 5
drink šǝti, yište šth 10
drink, cause to ʔašqi (√šqy C) šqh C 14
drive out, expel tārek (√trk D) grš 13
dwell yǝteb, yitteb yšb 5

early, go or do s.t. ʔaqdem (√qdm C) škm C 14

earth ʔarʕā (f.) ʔéreṣ 2
east madnǝḥā mizrāḥ 5
 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC) 107

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

east(ward) lǝ-madnǝḥā 5
east of, on, to mim-madnǝḥā 5
eat ʔǝkal, yekol ʔkl 4
Egypt Miṣráyim Miṣráyim 5
Egyptian(s) Miṣrāʔā, pl. Miṣrāʔe Miṣrî(m) 18
eight tǝmāne, tǝmānǝyāh šǝmōne 16
eighty tǝmānan šǝmōnîm 18
eleven ḥad ʕəsar, f. ḥǝdā ʕasre ʔaḥad ʕāśār 16
enter (a place: lǝ-) ʕal/ʕāl, yeʕol (ʕ-l-l) bwʔ 11
enter, cause to C ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel bwʔ C 15
entire kol/kull- kōl/kol- 7
establish C ʔǝqem qwm C/kwn C 15
eternity ʕālǝmā ʕôlām 22
even (adv.) ʔap ʔap 22
evening ramšā ʕéreb 2
every kol/kull- kōl/kol- 7
evil biš, ḥayyāb raʕ, ḥaṭṭāʔ 17
excellent šappir yāpe/ṭôb 17
except, except for bār min 9
eye ʕenā (f.), pl. ʕenayyā ʕáyin 17
eyes of, in the bǝ-ʕene bǝ-ʕênê 17

face ʔappayyā (pl.) pānîm 9

fall nǝpal, yippel npl 3
family zarʕitā mišpāḥā 23
famine kapnā rāʕāb 5
father ʔab, pl. ʔǝbāhātā ʔāb 14
fear, to dǝḥel, yidḥal yrʔ 5
feed, to C ʔokel ʔkl C
field ḥaqlā śāde 6
fifty ḥamšin ḥămiššîm 18
find ʔaškaḥ (√škḥ C) mṣʔ 14
first qadmāy 23
first, go or do s.t. ʔaqdem (√qdm C) škm C 14
five ḥǝmeš, ḥamšāh ḥāmēš 16
flee ʕǝraq, yiʕroq/yiʕiroq brḥ,nws 1
flock(s) ʕānā ṣō(ʔ)n 6
food laḥmā léḥem 3
food (inf. as noun) mekǝlā 12
for lǝ- lǝ-,ʔel 1
forever ʕad ʕālǝmā ʕad ʕôlām 22
forgive šǝbaq lǝ 4
forsake šǝbaq ʕzb 4
forty ʔarbǝʕin ʔarbāʕîm 18
four ʔarbaʕ, ʔarbəʕā ʔarbaʕ 16
fourteen ʔarbaʕ ʕasre ʔarbaʕ ʕaśrē 16
from, out of min min 1
from before min qǝdām mil-lipnê 4
from beside mis-sǝṭar 13
from the presence of mil-lǝwāt mil-lipnê 3
from the presence of min qǝdām mil-lipnê 4
from there mit-tammān miššām 1
from upon me-ʕal mēʕal 3
108 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC)

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

garden ginnǝtā gan(nā) 6

gate (of a city) tarʕā šáʕar 7
gather (trans.) kǝnaš ʔāsap 23
gather (intrans.), be gathered Gt ʔitkǝneš, Dt ʔitkannaš 23
girl ʕulemǝtā naʕărā/ʕalmā 4
give yǝhab, yitten ntn 3
go ʔǝzal, yezel hlk 1
go astray ṭǝʕā tʕh 14
go back tāb, yǝtub šwb 11
go down nǝḥat/nǝḥet, yeḥot yrd 3
go forth nǝpaq, yippoq yṣʔ 1
go hurriedly ʔoḥi (√yḥy C) mhr D 15
go up sǝleq, yissaq; Dt ʔistallaq ʕlh 5, 23
goats (and sheep) ʕānā ṣō(ʔ)n 6
gold dahbā zāhāb 8
good ṭāb ṭôb 17
good, in good order tāqen, f. tāqǝnā ṭôb/tqn 18
good, be/become šǝpar ṭyb/yṭb 17
grasp ʔǝḥad, yeḥod ʔḥz 7
great rab, rabbā gādōl 17
greatly laḥdā mǝʔōd ? 12
grow old sib/seb zqn/śêbā old age 11
guard nǝṭar, yiṭṭar nṣr 4
guilty of crime ḥayyāb ḥaṭṭāʔ 17

habitation maškǝnā ʔṓhel/miškān 3

hand yǝdā, cstr. yad yād 9
hand over mǝsar, yimsar 4
handsome šappir yāpe/ṭôb 17
have: he had X hǝwāh leh X 10
he huʔ hûʔ 18
head rešā rōʔš 23
heaven šǝmayyā šǝmā́ yim 11
hear šǝmaʕ, yišmaʕ šmʕ 8
hear a prayer qabbel ṣǝlotā 13
heed qabbel lǝ-memar X 13
herdsman rāʕǝyā rōʕe 18
here hākā pōh 12
here (is) hā hinnē 18
hide ṭǝmar ṭmr 9
high official rabbā 17
hinder mǝnaʕ, yimnaʕ mnʕ 12
hither hālǝkā hā́ lǝkā 12
house betā báyit 3
hundred mǝʔāh (f.) mēʔā 18
hurry ʔoḥi (√yḥy C) mhr D 15
husband baʕlā báʕal 6

I ʔǝnā ʔănî/ʔānōkî 18
if ʔim ʔim 21
important rab, rabbā gādōl 17
in bǝ-go, bǝ-gawwi bǝ-tôk 4
 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC) 109

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

in bǝ- bǝ- 2
inform C hodaʕ/ʔodaʕ ydʕ C 15
inform (someone: lǝ-) ḥawwi D ngd C 22
inherit yǝret, yerat yrš 7
inheritance ʔaḥsānǝtā 14
into lǝ- lǝ-,ʔel 1

judge dān, yǝdin dyn 11

just ṭāb ṭôb 17

keep nǝṭar, yiṭṭar nṣr 4

kill qǝṭal hrg/qṭl 2
king malkā mélek 1
kingdom malkutā, pl. malkǝwātā malkût,mamlākā 9
know (that) yǝdaʕ (ʔǝre) ydʕ 7

lad ʕulemā náʕar/ʕélem 4

land ʔarʕā (f.) ʔéreṣ 2
lay hold of ʔǝḥad, yeḥod ʔḥz 7
lead (away) dǝbar, yidbar lqḥ 2
lead astray C ʔaṭʕi 14
lead across C ʔaʕbar ʕbr C 14
lead back C ʔǝteb šwb C/ʕnh 15
lead down C ʔaḥet/ʔǝḥet yrd C 15
lead forth C ʔappeq yṣʔ C 15
lead in C ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel bwʔ C 15
lead up C ʔasseq ʕlh C 15
leader rabbā 17
leave nǝpaq min 1
leave šǝbaq ʕzb 4
lest dilmā pen 19
lie down šǝkeb, yiškob škb 8
lift nǝṭal, yiṭṭol nśʔ 1
light nǝhorā ʔôr/(nēr/nîr) 14
like kǝ- kǝ- 4
likewise ʔap ʔap 22
live ḥǝyā ḥyh 18
live, be allowed to Dt ʔitqayyam 23
living ḥay, f. ḥayyā ḥay 18
location ʔatrā cf. ʔăšer 8
look hā hinnē 18
love rǝḥem, yirḥam ʔhb 6

maiden ʕulemǝtā naʕărā/ʕalmā 4

maidservanthood ʔamtu 5
make šawwi śym/šwh D late 13
man gabrā/gubrā ʔîš 1
man ʔǝnāšā ʔĕnôš 19
many saggi, saggiʔā rab(b) 17
meet, (out) to lǝ-qaddāmut (D infin.) liqra(ʔ)t 13
messenger, divine malʔǝkā malʔāk 15
messenger, ordinary ʔizgaddā 15
midst of, in the bǝ-go, bǝ-gawwi bǝ-tôk 4
110 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC)

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

money kaspā késep 2
morning ṣaprā bṓqer 2
mother ʔimmā (f.), pl. ʔimmāhātā ʔēm 11
mountain ṭurā har 1
much saggi, saggiʔā rab(b) 17

name šǝmā, cstr. šom/šem, pl. šǝmāhātā šēm 9

name, to qǝrā, yiqre qrʔ 10
nation ʕammā ʕam 1
near bi-sṭar ʔḗṣel/bǝ-ṣad 11
new ḥǝdat ḥādāš 17
night lelǝyā laylā 7
nine tǝšaʕ, tišʕāh tḗšaʕ 16
ninety tišʕin tišʕîm 18
north ṣippunā ṣāpōn 5
no, not lā lōʔ,ʔal 1
not, there is, are let ʔên 17
now, now then kǝʕan ʕattā 20
now (then) hā hinnē 18
numerous saggi, saggiʔā rab(b) 17
numerous, be/become sǝgi rbh 17
numerous, become nǝpeš, yippoš 8

obey qabbel min, qabbel lǝ-memar 13

observe nǝṭar, yiṭṭar nṣr 4
offer D qāreb qrb C 13
offering qurbānā minḥā/qorbān 13
official, high rabbā 17
old, grow √s-y-b: sib/seb zqn/śêbā old age 11
on ʕal ʕal 3
one ḥad, f. ḥǝdā ˀeḥād 16
open pǝtaḥ, yiptaḥ ptḥ 7
opinion of, in the bǝ-ʕene bǝ-ʕênê 17
oppress dǝḥeq/dǝḥaq dḥq twice 9
order, in good tāqen, f. tāqǝnā ṭôb/tqn 18
other ʔuḥrān, ʔuḥri ʔaḥēr 23
other than bār min 9
out of min min 1
out to meet lǝ-qaddāmut (D infin.) liqra(ʔ)t 13
outside (of a place) bārā ḥûṣ 9
outside, on the mib-bārā 9
outside, to the lǝ-bārā 9
over against ʕal ʔappe 9
overthrow hǝpak hpk 9
owner baʕlā báʕal 6
ox torā šôr/ʔélep 6

palace hekǝlā hêkāl 4

pasture rǝʕā, yirʕe rʕh 10, 18
people ʕammā ʕam 1
perish ʔǝbad, yebad ʔbd 1
person napšā (f.), pl. napšātā népeš 18
Philistine(s) Pǝlištāʔā, pl. Pǝlištāʔe Pǝlištî(m) 18
 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC) 111

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

pick up nǝseb b-id- 9
pit berā (f.) bǝʔēr 11
pitch (a tent) pǝras, yipres nṭh 3
place yǝhab, yitten ntn 3
place ʔatrā cf. ʔăšer 8
place, to šawwi śym/šwh D late 13
plague maktāšā négaʕ 15
plain mešǝrā mîšôr 3
plant nǝṣab, yiṣṣob nṭʕ 7
pleasant ṭāb ṭôb 17
possession ʔaḥsānǝtā 14
possession of, take ʔaḥsen (√ḥsn C)
possessions qinyānā 2
pour out ʔǝšad, yešod 20
powerful taqqip, f. taqqipā ḥāzāq 18
praise šabbaḥ (D) hillēl 13
pray ṣalli (√ṣly D) hitpallēl 13
prayer ṣǝlotā tǝpillā 13
prayer, hear a qabbel ṣǝlotā 13
presence of, from the mil-lǝwāt mil-lipnê 3
presence of, from the min qǝdām mil-lipnê 4
presence of, in the qǝdām lipnê 4
presence of, into lǝwāt ʔel/lipnê 3
present D qāreb qrb C 13
preserve nǝṭar, yiṭṭar nṣr 4
press dǝḥeq/dǝḥaq dḥq 9
prevent mǝnaʕ, yimnaʕ mnʕ 12
prince rabbā 17
proclaim ʔašmaʕ (šmʕ C) šmʕ C 14
produce C ʔappeq yṣʔ C 15
proper tāqen, f. tāqǝnā ṭôb/tqn 18
property qinyānā 2
prophet nǝbiyā nābîʔ 8
purchase qǝnā, yiqne qnh 10
purchase zǝban 8
pursue rǝdap rdp 4
put šawwi śym/šwh D late 13

quarrel maṣṣutā (f.) nṣʔ N, C;

maṣṣā/maṣṣût 19
quarrel, to nǝṣā nṣʔ N, C 19
queen malkǝtā malkā 1

raise up nǝṭal, yiṭṭol nśʔ 1

receive qabbel lqḥ/qbl D late 13
reduce to servitude C ʔaplaḥ ʕbd C 14
regard to, in ʕal ʕal 3
reign malkutā, pl. malkǝwātā malkût,mamlākā 9
rejoice ḥǝdi, yiḥde śmḥ/ḥdh rare 10
relate ḥawwi D ngd C 22
remain yǝteb, yitteb yšb 5
remain over ʔištǝʔar (√šʔr Gt) 23
return tāb, yǝtub šwb 11
112 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC)

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

reveal oneself ʔitgǝli (√gly Gt) 23
rich ʕattir ʕāšîr 17
rich, be/become ʕǝtar ʕšr 17
rich, be/grow tǝqep, yitqap kbd/ḥzq 5
river nahrā nāhār 2
road ʔurḥā/ʔorḥa (f.) ʔṓraḥ 18
rule malkutā, pl. malkǝwātā malkût,mamlākā 9
run rǝhaṭ/rǝheṭ, yirhaṭ rwṣ 4

sake of, for the bǝdil baʕăbûr 19

say ʔǝmar, yemar ʔmr 7
see ḥǝzā, yiḥze rʔh/ḥzh 10
see, cause to C ʔaḥzi rʔh C 14
seize ʔǝḥad, yeḥod ʔḥz 7
sell D zabben mkr 13
send (a message/messenger) šǝlaḥ, yišlaḥ šlḥ 8
send back C ʔǝteb šwb C/ʕnh 15
send down C ʔaḥet/ʔǝḥet yrd C 15
send forth C ʔappeq yṣʔ C 15
send up C ʔasseq ʕlh C 15
separate (intr.) Dt ʔitpāraš 23
separate (tr.) ʔapreš (√prš C) bdl C 14
servant, female ʔamtā, pl. ʔamhātā ʔāmā 6
servant, male ʕabdā ʕébed 6
servant, male ʕulemā náʕar/ʕélem 4
servanthood, female ʔamtu 5
serve, work (as slave, etc.) pǝlaḥ, yiplaḥ ʕbd 2
servitude, reduce to C ʔaplaḥ ʕbd C 14
set yǝhab, yitten ntn 3
set šawwi śym/šwh D late 13
set out, travel nǝṭal, yiṭṭol nsʕ 1
set up šawwi śym/šwh D late 13
set up C ʔǝqem qwm C/kwn C 15
set up camp šǝrā cf. škn 11
settle (intr.) yǝteb, yitteb; Ct ʔittotab yšb 5
settle, cause to C ʔoteb yšb C 15
settle down šǝrā cf. škn 11
seven šǝbaʕ, šabʕāh/šibʕāh šébaʕ 17
seventy šabʕin/šibʕin šibʕîm 18
severe taqqip, f. taqqipā ḥāzāq 18
severe, be, grow tǝqep, yitqap kbd/ḥzq 5
shatter D tabbar šbr D
she hiʔ hîʔ 18
shed ʔǝšad, yešod 20
sheep and goats ʕānā ṣō(ʔ)n 6
shepherd rāʕǝyā rōʕe 18
show C ʔaḥzi rʔh C 14
silver kaspā késep 2
since ʔǝre kî 7
sister ʔǝḥātā ʔāḥôt 19
sit yǝteb, yitteb yšb 5
site ʔatrā cf. ʔăšer 8
six šet, šittāh šēš 16
 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC) 113

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

sixty šittin šiššîm 18
sky šǝmayyā šǝmā́ yim 11
slave, female ʔamtā, pl. ʔamhātā ʔāmā 6
slave, male ʕabdā ʕébed 6
small zǝʕer ṣāʕîr/qāṭōn 17
so now kǝʕan ʕattā 20
so that bǝdil dǝ- lǝmáʕan 19
so that not dilmā pen 19
sojourn √d-w-r: dār, yǝdur gwr 11
son bǝrā bĕn 6
soul napšā(f.), pl. napšātā népeš 18
sound qālā qôl 8
south dāromā dārôm 5
speak mallel (√mll D) dibbēr 13
spring ʕenā (f.), pl. ʕenayyā ʕáyin 17
stand, cause to C ʔǝqem qwm C/kwn C 15
star kokǝbā kôkāb 11
station, to C ʔǝqem qwm C/kwn C 15
stop √q-w-m: qām, yǝqum qwm 11
stop, come to a šǝrā cf. škn 11
steppe madbǝrā midbār 5
strife maṣṣutā (f.) nṣʔ N,
C/maṣṣā/maṣṣût 19
strong taqqip, f. taqqipā ḥāzāq 18
strong, be, grow tǝqep, yitqap kbd/ḥzq 5
stop √q-w-m: qām, yǝqum qwm 11
subdue tǝbar, yitbar šbr 9
subject C ʔaplaḥ ʕbd C 14
summon qǝrā, yiqre qrʔ 10
surface ʔappayyā (pl.) pānîm 9
survive ʔištǝʔar (√šʔr Gt) 23
sword ḥarbā (f.) ḥéreb 6

take dǝbar, yidbar; nǝseb/nǝsab, yissab lqḥ 2, 5

take across C ʔaʕbar ʕbr C 14
take in C ʔaʕel/ʔǝʕel bwʔ C 15
take possession of ʔaḥsen (√ḥsn C)
take up nǝṭal, yiṭṭol nśʔ 1
taken, be Gt ʔiddǝbar 23
tell ḥawwi D ngd C 22
temple hekǝlā hêkāl 4
ten ʕǝsar, ʕasrāh ʕéśer 16
tend (animals) rǝʕā, yirʕe rʕh 10, 18
tent maškǝnā ʔṓhel/miškān 3
that (f.) hiʔ hîʔ 18
that (m.) huʔ hûʔ 18
that, the fact that ʔǝre kî 7
thence mit-tammān miššām 1
there tammān šām 1
there is, are ʔit yēš 17
there is, are not let ʔên 17
there, from mit-tammān miššām 1
there, to lǝ-tammān šā́ mmā 1
114 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC)

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

these ʔillen ʔḗlle 8
they (f.) ʔinnin hēn 18
they (m.) ʔinnun hēm 18
thing pitgāmā dābār 2
thirteen tǝlāt ʕəsar, tǝlāt ʕasre šǝlōšā ʕāśār 16
thirty tǝlātin šǝlōšîm 18
this (f.) dā zōˀt 7
this (m.) den ze 7
thither lǝ-tammān šā́ mmā 1
those (f.) ʔinnin hēn 18
those (m.) ʔinnun hēm 18
thousand ʔálap ʔélep 18
three tǝlāt, tǝlātāh šālôš 16
through (agency) bǝ-yad, b-idā dǝ 4, 9
to lǝ- lǝ-,ʔel 1
to lǝwāt ʔel/lipnê 3
together ka-ḥdā 12
together with ʕim, ʕimm- ʕim/ʔet-/ʔēt 4
top rešā rōʔš 23
Torah ʔorāytā tôrā 18
touch qǝreb bǝ- 5
transgress ʕǝbar ʕābar 2
treaty qǝyāmā/qiyāmā bǝrît 4
tree ʔilānā ʕēṣ 7
twelve tǝre ʕəsar, f. tarta ʕasre šnáyim ʕāśār 16
twenty ʕasrin ʕeśrîm 18
two tǝren, f. tarten šnáyim 16

under tǝḥot táḥat 8

until ʕad ʕad 3
unto lǝwāt ʔel/lipnê 3
up to ʕad ʕad 3
upon, from me-ʕal mēʕal 3
urge, to dǝḥeq/dǝḥaq dḥq twice 9
utensil mā(ʔ)nā kǝlî/ʔŏnî 8
utterance memǝrā, cstr. memar 12

valley mešǝrā mîšôr 3

very much laḥdā mǝʔōd ? 12
vessel mā(ʔ)nā kǝlî/ʔŏnî 8
vineyard karmā kérem 9
voice qālā qôl 8

wage war ʕǝbad qǝrābā 9

wander ṭǝʕā tʕh 14
war qǝrābā milḥāmā 9
water mayyā máyim 3
water (animals), to ʔašqi (√šqy C) šqh C 14
way ʔurḥā/ʔorḥa (f.) ʔṓraḥ 18
we ʔǝnáḥnā ʔa¯náḥnû 18
wealthy, be, grow tǝqep, yitqap kbd/ḥzq 5
well berā (f.) bǝʔēr 11
well ʕenā (f.), pl. ʕenayyā ʕáyin 17
 GLOSSARY (ENGLISH–ARAMAIC) 115

Gloss Aramaic = Hebrew Lesson

west maʕrǝbā maʕărāb 5
what? mā mā 7
when ʔǝre kî 7
when kad kaʔăšer/kî/bǝ- or
kǝ-+inf. 11
whence? mǝnān 8
where? ʔān ʔān 8
whither? lǝ-ʔān 8
who? man mî 7
whole kol/kull- kōl/kol- 7
why? lǝ-mā, ʕal mā lā́ mmā 2
wicked biš, ḥayyāb raʕ, ḥaṭṭāʔ 17
widespread, become nǝpeš, yippoš 8
wife ʔittǝtā, pl. nǝšayyā ʔiššā 1
wifehood (in idiom) ʔittu 5
wilderness madbǝrā 5
wine ḥamrā yáyin/ḥémer 14
wise ḥakkim ḥākām 17
with (instr.) bǝ- bǝ- 2
with, together with ʕim ʕim/ʔet-/ʔēt 4
within bǝ- bǝ- 2
within bǝ-go, bǝ-gawwi bǝ-tôk 4
word millǝtā (f.), pl. millayyā dābār 11
Word of the Lord, circumlocution for God memǝra da-Yy 12
work (as slave) pǝlaḥ, yiplaḥ ʕbd 2
world ʕālǝmā ʕôlām 22
woman ʔittǝtā, pl. nǝšayyā ʔiššā 1
word pitgāmā dābār 2
word memǝrā, cstr. memar 12
wrath rugzā rṓgez 6
write kǝtab ktb 2

year šattā (f.), cstr. šǝnat, pl. šǝnayyā šānā 16

you (f. pl.) ʔattin ʔatten 18
you (f. sg.) ʔatt ʔatt 18
you (m. pl.) ʔattun ʔattem 18
you (m. sg.) ʔatt ʔattā 18
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

Note: Most of the sentences have several possible translations.

Lesson One
A. (Throughout, the verbs may be translated as present perfect rather than simple past: ‘has gone’
rather than ‘went’, etc.) 1. He went to the mountain. 2. She went the the city. 3. They (m)
departed from/left the city. 4. They (f) went forth to the mountain. 5. The man perished. 6. The
woman perished. 7. The people perished. 8. The king set out. 9. The queen set out. 10. They
(m) fled from the city. 11. The queen fled to the mountain. 12. They (m) fled from there. 13.
The woman departed from there. 14. The people perished there. 15. The king did not flee from
the city. 16. The woman did not go to the mountain. 17. The people did not depart from there.
18. They (m) did not travel thither. 19. The queen did not leave the city. 20. The man did not flee
to that place.
qr'[] al; 15 ˜m;t' am;[' wdub'a] 14 ˜m;t'ymi at;t]yai tqup'n} 13 ˜mtm wqur'[] 12 ar;wful] at;k]lm' tq'r'[] 11 B
tq'p'n} al; 19 ˜m;t'l] wluf'n} al; 18 ˜m;t'mi am;[' wqup'n} al; 17 ar;wful] at;t]yai tl'z"a] al; 16 at;rq'mi ak;lm'
˜m;t'l] ar;bg" qr'[] al; 20 at;rq'ymi at;k]lm'

Lesson Two
A. 1. I went forth in the morning. 2. We fled from there. 3. They (m) perished in the river. 4.
Why did you (sg) not flee? 5. We set out in the evening. 6. Why did you (mp) go to the mountain?
7. I did not set out in the morning. 8. I fled to the river. 9. Why did you (fp) not leave the city?
10. I did not perish there. 11. We crossed the land. 12. I led the woman. 13. Why did you (sg)
kill the queen? 14. They served the king. 15. I wrote the word. 16. Why did you (mp) cross the
river? 17. The woman wrote the word. 18. The king took the man along. 19. Why did you (sg)
take the man along? 20. The land perished. 21. In the morning the people crossed the land. 22.
In the evening we crossed the river. 23. We served the queen. 24. They did not take the woman.
25. We killed the king.

ty: trb'd] am;l] 19 ar;bg" ty: ak;lm' rb'd] 18 am;g:tpi ty: at;t]ai tb't'k] 17 ar;hn" ty: ˜wturb'[] am;l] 16 B
ty; an:jl'p] 23 ar;hn" ty: an:rb'[] aç;mr'b] 22 a[;ra'b] am;[' wrub[' ] ar;px'b] 21 a[;ra' td'b'a] 20 ar;bg"
ak;lm' ty: an:lf'q] 25 at;t]yai ty: wrub'd] al; 24 at;k]lm'

Lesson Three
A. 1. I gave him/it (m) to the man. 2. They (m) killed them (m) in the house. 3. We crossed it
(m) in the morning. 4. He took us into the presence of the king. 5. I fled from the king’s presence.
6. They (m) descended from the mountain to the plain. 7. I pitched the tent there. 8. She fell and
perished. 9. He set out in the morning and went as far as the river. 10. Why did you (sg) not give
the bread to the woman? 11. He picked up the silver and gave it to the man. 12. We gave the
property to the people. 13. We went/came down to the river and pitched the tent there. 14. The
house fell upon the queen and she perished. 15. I fell in the water. 16. Why did you (fp) not give
the water to the woman? 17. We crossed the land as far as the city. 18. She fled from the house
and went to the river. 19. They (m) descended from the mountain as far as the plain and pitched
the tent there.
118 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

B. 1. a[;ra' l[' ak;lm' lp'n} The king fell upon the ground. 2. ar;bwgU ay:m' ty: an:bh'y} al; We did not
give the water to the man. 3. at;t]ai tw:l]mi tq'r'[/tqr'[] am;l] Why did you (sg)/she flee from the
woman’s presence? 4. ak;lm'l] ht'y: bh'ywI at;t]yai ty: rb'd] He took the woman and gave her to the king.
5. wqur'[] ˜m;t' wdub'a]w" ar;ç]ymel] They (m) fled to the valley and perished there. 6. ˜yhet]y: wluf'q] al; They
(m) did not kill them (f).

Lesson Four
A. 1. the city (with)in which they (m) perished 2. the man to whom I gave the property 3. the
woman who wrote the word 4. the lad who fell to the ground 5. the palace from which we fled
6. the bread that you (fp) gave me 7. the water that you (mp) kept/guarded for us 8 the man to
whom (into whose presence) I ran 9 the treaty that we made with you (mp) 10 the woman to
whom you (ms) gave the silver

B. 1. ak;lm' µd;q] jl'pdi am;ylew[u the boy who served before the king 2. hynEmi wtuj'ndi ar;wfu the mountain
from which they (m) descended 3. ˜m;t' an:sr'pdi an:k]çm' the tent that we pitched there
4. ar;px'b] wrub'[]d' ar;ç]yme the plain that they (m) crossed in the morning 5. hb' wrub'[]d' a[;ra' the land
that they (m) crossed

C. 1. I gave you (fs) the property. 2. He made a treaty with us. 3. He pursued (after) the man
and killed him. 4. They (f) went to the palace and left the servant there. 5. We ran to him. 6.
They (m) ate the bread and/but they did not give us (any) of it. 7. They (m) handed the lad over
to the king. 8. He went forth with the man, and they traveled to the mountain. 9. We did not hand
the city over to the king. 10. I protected the property that he gave me.

D. 1. at;rq' wgOb] ˜whot]y: wluf'q] They (m) killed them (m) within the city. 2. am;ylew[u rt'b; ˜wtupd'r] al; am;l]
Why did you (mp) not pursue the lad? 3. am;['l] (or tq'b'ç)] tqb'ç] al; am; l[' Why did you (sg) (or,
why did she) not forgive the people? 4. ytiw:l] tf'h'rwU at;ybemi at;m]ylew[u tq'r'[] The girl fled from the
house and ran to me. 5. ˜ykel] tybit'kdi am;g:tpi ty: ˜ytirf'n: al; You (fp) have not kept the word that I
wrote to you.

Lesson Five
A. 1. They (m) went east(ward). 2. They dwelt to the east of the city. 3. He drew near to the
city. 4. We approached the river. 5. I bowed down before the king. 6. I married her (took her as
my wife). 7. He took the servant and traveled with him to the north. 8. They (m) approached the
land from the north. 9. We settled south of the mountain. 10. I did not go up (to) the mountain.
11. Why did you (sg) take the girl to the palace? 12. They (m) went to the valley and settled in it.
13. He became angry and killed the man. 14. The famine was severe in the land. 15. She was
afraid of the king and fled from him.

B. 1. an:n"mi ˜wtulyjed] am;l] Why did you (mp) fear us? 2. ar;px' d[' ˜m;t' byteywI ar;wful] qyles] He went up
the mountain and remained there until morning. 3. µyIr'xmil] am;[' wtuj'nwU an:pk' πyqet] The famine was
severe and the people went down to Egypt. 4. at;k]lm' µd;q] wduygIs] al; They (m) did not bow down
before the queen. 5. ar;b]dm' d[' ab;r][m'l] al;f'n} They (f) traveled westward as far as the steppe. 6.
aj;n}dm'l] ak;lm' rt'b; wpud'r] They (m) pursued the king to the east. 7. dy"b] hytey: wrus'mwU am;ylew[u ty: wbuysin}
ak;lm' They (m) took the lad and handed him over to the king. 8. ˜wkom][i an:rz"gdi am;y:qi ty: ˜wturf'n} al;
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES 119

You (mp) did not keep the treaty that we made with you. 9. an:y:nqib] ar;bwgU πyqet] The man was rich
in property. 10. am;jl'b] tybiyreq] al; I did not touch the bread. 11. at;rq' ty: wqub'çwU an:n"mi wluyjid] They
(m) were afraid of us and abandoned the city. 12. tydiygEswU hytew:l] tybiyreq] I approached him and
bowed down. 13. ar;b]dm'b] wbuytiy} al; They (m) did not dwell in the desert. 14. hyle at;t]yai ty: bysen}
whuma'l] He took the woman as his maidservant. 15. wtuyail] ˜whol] ˜yhet]y: wbuysin} They (m) took them (f)
as their wives.

Lesson Six
A. 1. your (fs) male donkey 2. our sword 3. your (mp) temple 4. their (m) camel 5. his field
6. their (m) flock 7. your (fs) servant 8. your (mp) cattle 9. your (ms) word 10. his female
donkey

B. 1. ˚d;b[' your (ms) male servant 2. ytit]ai my wife 3. hylemg" his camel 4. ynIt;a' my female
donkey 5. ˚n:[; your (ms) sheep and goats 6. ˚ytima' your (fs) female servant 7. an:r'y[ib] our cattle
8. ˜yketn"ygI your (fp) garden 9. yliqj' my field 10. ˜wkod]b[' your (mp) male servant

C. 1. She feared her husband. 2. We came up from their city. 3. They (m) did not bow down to
our king. 4. They (f) approached my house in the evening. 5. He became angry with his son. 6.
They (m) settled to the east of our land. 7. I did not take your (fs) bread. 8. Her daughter ran to
her. 9. Why did you (ms) not keep my covenant? 10. Why did you take the boy with you (ms)?
11. They (m) fled from their queen’s presence. 12. My people perished there. 13. I took my son
with me and went out of my house. 14. He took my sword from me. 15. He handed his property
over to his servant.

D. 1. ˚l; πyqet] am;l] Why did you become angry? 2. an:m'[' ty: wluf'qwU an:['ra' ty: wrub'[] They (m) crossed
our land and killed our people. 3. aç;mr'b] ˜whotn"ygIb] tybiytey} I sat in their garden in the evening. 4.
ytir]wto ty:w} yriwto ty" ˜wtubysen} am;l] Why did you (mp) take my bull and my cow? 5. hr'b] ty: at;t]ai tm'yjer]
ht'r'b] ty:w} The woman loved her son and her daughter. 6. ht'w:l]mi ht'ma' tq'r'[] Her female servant fled
from her (presence). 7. tj'n} al;w} hyrem;j] l[' bytey} He sat on his (male) donkey and did not come
down. 8. ˜wkol]qj'l] ˜wkol]mg" lz"a] Your (mp) camel went to your field. 9. jn"dm"mi at;t]yaiw} ar;bg" wbuytiy}
at;n}ygIl] The man and the woman dwelt east of the garden. 10. ar;y[ibbiwU an:[;b] πyqet] He was wealthy
in flocks and cattle. 11. dygEswU hymeylew[u µ[i byreq] He approached with his servant and bowed down.
12. wtuyail] hyle at;ma' ty" rb'd] He took his female servant as his wife. 13. hytet]ai ty: µyjer] al; He did
not love his wife. 14. a[;ra' l[' hyberj' tl'p'n} His sword fell to the ground. 15. ˜whor]y[ib]mi wluk'a] al;
They (m) did not eat any of their cattle.

Lesson Seven
A. 1. before that king 2. into that woman’s presence 3. in this garden 4. as far as that river 5.
from the presence of this king 6. in all that land 7. This is our city. 8. He/That is my son. 9.
She/That is your (fs) daughter. 10. He/That is my husband. 11. This is our garden.

B. 1. ad;h; at;rq'l] am;wrod;mi south of this city 2. awhuh; ar;wfuul] jn'dm'mi east of that mountain 3. µ[i
ayhih; at;m]ylew[u with that girl 4. ˜ydeh; ar;ç]yme wgOb] within this valley 5. at;rq' lko the whole city 6.
˜whol]qj' lko their whole field 7. ar;b]dm' lko the whole wilderness 8. awhuh; am;wyO lko that whole day 9.
120 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

hymeg:tpi ˜yde This is his word. 10. ynIt;a] ad; This is my (female) donkey. 11. ayhi ht'ma' She/That is
her female servant. 12. ayhi ˚t;ty] ai That/She is your (ms) wife. 13. awhu hymeylew[u He/That is his
servant.

C. 1. He ran to the door and opened it. 2. He pursued them as far as the mountain. 3. What did
you (sg) do there that day? 4. I inherited all this property. 5. I did not know that my wife had fled
6. He laid hold of the sword and killed him with it. 7. We planted the tree in our garden. 8. Who
made this thing? 9. He sat in the gate and did not go out. 10. I went out and closed the door
behind me. 11. This is my covenant that I have made with you (mp). 12. I gave you this entire
land. 13. What did you (mp) say to his servant?

D. 1. ˜whok]lm' db'a] yrea] w[ud'y} They (m) knew that their king had perished. 2. wqup'nwU a[;rt' ty: wjut'p]
at;rq'mi They opened the gate and left the city. 3. wqur'[]w" ylimg" ty: wduj'a] They (m) seized my camel
and fled. 4. at;r]wto ty: (tb'h'y}) tbh'y} ˜m'l] To whom did you (sg) (or, did she) give the cow? 5. ab;yriq]
ay:l]yleb] an:t'ybel] They (f) approached our house in the night. 6. awhuh; am;wyOb] tybix'ndi an:l:yai ˜yde
This is the tree that I planted on that day. 7. at;n}gIb] at;t]ai tl'k'a] am; What did the woman eat in the
garden? 8. awhuh; ay:l]yleb] am;[' lko wdub'a] All of the people perished that night. 9. tdb'[] am; hyle tyrim'a]
yli I said to him, “What have you done to me?” 10. awhuh; al;qj' ty: tyrey} He inherited that field. 11.
˜whoyle[] at;ybe lp'n} The house fell on them (m). 12. yhiwmod;q] wduygIs] They (m) bowed down before him.
13. ˜whoymed;q] an:jl'p] We served before them (m).

Lesson Eight
A. 1. under those trees 2. from the presence of those kings 3. against these peoples 4. on the
west of those cities 5. camels and (male) donkeys

B. 1. ˜yleyaih; ay:r'wful] jn"dm'mi to the east of these mountains 2. ˜yniyaih; ay:ç'n} µd;q] ˜mi from the presence
of those women 3. ˜yleyaih; ay:r'bg" lko µy[i with all these men 4. ay:d'b[' lkow} at;h;ma' lko µ[i with all
the female servants and all the male servants 5. ˜wnUyaih; ay:m'wyOb] in those days

C. 1. We did not hear their words. 2. They (m) lay down beneath the trees in that place. 3. He
sent his prophet to all the cities and to all their peoples. 4. We bought there these camels with the
gold that you (sg) gave us. 5. And that people became numerous in that entire land. 6. The men
whom I sent to that place perished. 7. From where have these women fled? 8. Where did you
(mp) buy these vessels? 9. Who made those utensils? 10. They (m) did not know that their king
had sent his servants to the prophet.

D. 1. an:qr'[]w" ˜whoyleq; ty: an:[m'ç] We heard their voices and fled. 2. ˜whoyçed' lko ty: wjut'p] They (m)
opened all their doors. 3. ˜ydeh; ar;ta'b] ay:n"l;yai ty: bx'n} ˜m' Who planted the trees in this place? 4.
ab;hd' ty: ˜wtujl'ç] ˜a;l] Where (Whither) did you (mp) send the gold? 5. wtuail] an:l' hyten:b] ty: an:bysen} We
took his daughters as wives. 6. ay:l'qj' ty:w} ay:t'b; ty: tytiyrey} I inherited the houses and the fields. 7.
ay:r'bg" tw:l] fh'rwU hyberj' ty: dj'a] He seized his sword and ran to the men. 8. lko ad;b'a] am; l['
˜wkoywErqi Why did all your cities perish? 9. ˚n:bli trm'a] am; What did you say to your (ms) sons? 10.
awhuh; am;wyO lko tq'p'n} al;w} ht'ybeb] tb'ykeç] She lay down in her house and did not go out that entire day.
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES 121

Lesson Nine
A. 1. the gate of their (m) city 2. the garden tree 3. his sons’ property 4. his daughters’ husbands
5. your (ms) servant’s wife 6. the king’s servants 7. the king’s wives 8. the field of those men
9. the covenant of our people 10. their (m) wives’ female servants 11. gold vessels 12. the
kingdoms of the earth 13. his son’s name 14. the name of the Lord 15. the temple altar 16.
Abraham’s son 17. the doorway of his tent 18. her servant’s name 19. the king of the city 20.
the king of Egypt

B. 1. ay:bin} ymeg:tpi the words of the prophet 2. ar;hn" yme water of the river 3. hyter'b] lq; his daughter’s
voice 4. ak;lm' tn"gI the king’s garden 5. ytiybe [r't] yçed' the door-leaves of my house 6. tm;ylew[/tm'ylew[u
ytit]ai my wife’s maiden/maidens 7. an:w"rqi ymem][' the peoples of our cities 8. ˜whulk'yhe bh'd] the gold
of their (m) temple 9. at;rq' yteb; the houses of the city 10. ay:bin} tn:b] the prophet’s daughters 11.
hytewkulm' ymewyO the days of his reign 12. ˜wnUyaih; ay:k'lm'd] ab;r;q] the battle of those kings 13. lko th;m;ç]
yhiwnOb] the names of all his sons 14. ˜ydeh; ar;bg"d] am;rk' this man’s vineyard 15. a[;ra' lko ypea' l[' on
the surface of all the earth 16. ayhih; a[;ra' rh'n} the river of that land 17. ap;sk'd] an:am; silver vessel
18. hr'b] lq; her son’s voice 19. aj;b]dm' rt'a] the site of the altar 20. hytet]aid] at;ma' his wife’s
maidservant.

C. 1. He overthrew all their (m) cities. 2. I urged them (m) and they went forth with me. 3. They
(m) broke the doors of his house, and seized him and killed him. 4. She hid the men in her house.
5. They (m) seized his sons and bound them. 6. I purchased all their (m) vessels except for that
gold vessel. 7. They (m) planted the trees outside of the garden. 8. They (m) went forth and
became widespread over the surface of all the earth. 9. Where did you (mp) hide the silver vessels?
10. These are the names of the men whom we sent to Egypt.

D. 1. yhiwnOb] ˜mi rb; ay:r'bg" lko wluz"a] All of the men went except for his sons. 2. lko ayhih; at;rq'b] bytey}
hytewkulm' ymewyO He dwelt in that city all the days of his reign. 3. yn"mi rb; ay:m'ylew[u lko ty: wrus'a] They (m)
bound all of the servants except me. 4. tyqir'[]w" ab;r;q] lqo ty: ty[im'ç] I heard the sound of the battle
and I fled. 5. aj;b]dm' ˜m;t' db'[]w" And he made an altar there. 6. ad;h; at;rq' ˜mi rb; a[;ra' lko ty: an:kp'h]
We overthrew the entire land except for this city. 7. ˜whot]y: ˜wtuqyjed] al; am;l] Why did you (mp) not
press them (m)? 8. ak;lm'd] ad;ybi ay:bin} ty: wrus'm] They (m) handed the prophet over to the king. 9.
ht'y: rb'twU hydeybi ab;rj' ty: bysen} He took the sword into his hand and broke it. 10. ak;lm'd] az:gwru πyqet]
yhiwdob['b] The king became angry with his servants.

Lesson Ten
A. 1. They (m) came to our vineyard. 2. They (f) summoned their servants. 3. Where did you
pasture your (ms) flock? 4. We acquired the utensils there. 5. What did his sons acquire in Egypt?
6. They (m) rejoiced over the property that they acquired there. 7. We drank the water that she
gave us. 8. I saw the altar that you (sg) built there. 9. I purchased a vineyard east of the city. 10.
They (m) did not drink any of the water of that river.

B. 1. ˜wtoytea] ˜n:m] From where have you (mp) come? 2. qj;xyI yrib] µwço ty: ytiyreq] I named my son
Isaac. 3. ar;ç]ymeb] ˜whor]y[ib] ty: w[or] They (m) tended their cattle in the valley. 4. ar;b;mo ˜wtoyzEj] am;
at;rq'l] What did you see outside the city? 5. hy[ert' ty: wrub'twU hyteybel] wtoa] They (m) came to his
house and broke his gate. 6. at;a] al;w} ay:binli ak;lm' ar;q] The king summoned the prophet but he did
122 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

not come. 7. ˜yleyaih; ay:t'b; ty: an:b] ˜m' Who built these houses? 8. at;n}gIb] wbux'ndi ay:n"l;yai ty: wnOm] They (m)
counted the trees that they had planted in the garden. 9. ah;n"b] wdub'[]d' ay:n"m; ty: tn:m] She counted the
vessels that her sons had made. 10. am;rk' ˜m;t' bxunwU a[;ra'b] bytey} He settled in the land and planted
a vineyard there.

C. 1. Saul became king over our people. 2. His daughter was not outside the house. 3. His sons
were not among those men. 4. Where were you (sg) (or, Where was I) on that day? 5. All of their
(m) cities are west of the mountains. 6. I summoned my sons, but they did not come to me. 7.
All of her sons fell in that battle. 8. My kingdom is to the north of the river. 9. They (m) summoned
us but they did not press us. 10. They (m) served him all the days of his reign.

D. 1. ˜whok]lm'd] ad;ybi am;[' ty: wrus'mwU at;rq' ty: wkup'h] They (m) overthrew the city and delivered the
people into the power of their king. 2. hybe hytey: tr'm'fwU hn"k]çm'l] awhuh; ar;bg" at;a] That man came to
her tent and she hid him in it. 3. aj;b]dm' ty: ˜m;t' an:bdi ar;ta' ty: an:yzEj] al; We did not see the place
where he built the altar. 4. yhiwmod;q] ad;ygIswU hytew:l] at;rq' yçen} ha;t'a] The women of the city went into
his presence and bowed before him. 5. ˜yhet]w:l] wtoa] al;w} ˜whot]h;ma' ˜whol] ha;r'q] Their maidservants
summoned them but they did not come to them. 6. al;k]yheb] wwOhd' ay:n"m; ty: wbuysin} They (m) took the
vessels that were in the temple. 7. am;[' lko wdub'a]w" a[;ra'b] an:pk' hw:h] There was a famine in the land
and all the people perished. 8. ar;wfu ypea' l[' an:n"[; ty: an:y[er] We pastured our flock(s) up against the
mountain. 9. ˜ydeh; ar;wto ty: at;ynEq] ˜m;m] From where did you (ms) acquire this bull? 10. ˚t;r]wto
yl'qj'b/] yliqj'b] Your (ms) cow is in my field/fields.

Lesson Eleven
A. 1. They (m) returned to their city. 2. Samuel judged the people. 3. He entered the palace and
stood before the king. 4. We sojourned among them. 5. He went to the plain and settled in it, he
and his wife, his sons, and his entire household. 6. Their king grew old and died. 7. They (m) set
up camp beside the river. 8. The woman returned to her husband’s house. 9. Where did you (mp)
come to a stop that night? 10. What did you (mp) do when your king died?

B. 1. ymi['l] tybit; al; I did not return to my people. 2. ay:r'bg" ty: ˜d; ˜m' Who judged the men? 3. wmuq;
at;rq'mi wqup'nwU ay:l]yleb] They (m) arose in the night and left the city. 4. ˜m;t' tyrid;w} ab;r['m' d[' tylif'n} I
traveled as far as the west and sojourned there. 5. ay:bin} ty: wluf'qwU an:t'rq'l] wlu[/; wlu[' They (m) entered
our city and killed the prophet. 6. yhiwnOb] wtuymi ˜a; Where did his sons die? 7. hymeylew[ul] ar;qwU ar;px'b] µq;
He arose in the morning and summoned his servant. 8. aç;mr'b] hymeai tb't' al; His mother did not
return in the evening. 9. ˜whoynEybewU an:n"ybe ab;r;q] hw:h] There was war between us and them (m). 10. πyqet]
hytey: lf'qwU yhiwlo[] µq;w} hyrebbi hyzEgwru He became angry with his son and arose and killed him.

C. 1. the stars of the sky 2. all these stars 3. the prophet’s words 4. outside of this place 5.
beside that altar 6. your (ms) whole kingdom 7. your (mp) mother’s name

D. 1. ay:m'ç] ypea' l[' up against the sky 2. yhiwmoylew[u ˜ybel] ym'ylew[u/ymiylew[u ˜ybe between my servant/
servants and his servants 3. ad;h; ar;ybe rf'sbi beside this well 4. ayhih; ar;ybe yme the water of that well
5. ˜whom]rk' wgOb] within their (m) vineyard 6. am;yai yleymi my/the mother’s words 7. hymeyaid] at;ma' his
mother’s servant
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES 123

E. 1. And when he entered the house, he closed the door behind him. 2. When they (m) came to
the mountain, they built a city there, and dwelt in it. 3. In those days, that king made war with us.

F. 1. yhiwmod;q] wmuq;w} hytew:l] wbuyriqwU yhiwnObli ar;q] dk' hw:hw" When he summoned his sons, they approached
him and stood before him. 2. hm'['l] tb't'w} an:t'rq'mi tq'p'nwU hl'[b' tymid] rt'b; hw:hw" After her husband
died, she left our city and returned to her people. 3. ˜whom][i an:rz"gdi am;y:q] ymeg:typi ty: wruf'n} al; dk' hw:hw"
˜whom][i ab;r;q] an:db'[]w" ˜whob] an:z"gwru πyqetwU When they (m) did not keep the words of the treaty that we
had made with them, we became angry with them and made war with them.

Lesson Twelve
A. 1. They (m) were not able to see. 2. They (m) prevented me from building a house. 3. They
(m) came to this place to acquire cattle. 4. I was unable to judge them (m). 5. Why did you (sg)
prevent me from drinking the water? 6. They (m) went down to Egypt to buy food there. 7. She
was able to hide her son. 8. I allowed you (ms) to dwell here. 9. I was not able to buy the vineyard.
10. They (m) went forth to make war with that king. 11. I entered the house to give the silver to
my mother. 12. He stayed there to guard the property. 13. When he settled there, he grew very
wealthy in cattle and in silver. 14. When she fled from her husband, she ran to her son’s house.

B. 1. ˜m;t' rd;mli an:lykey} al; We were not able to sojourn there. 2. ay:b'k]wko ty: ynEmymil] lykey} al; He was
unable to count the stars. 3. µyIr'xmil] l['ymel] wbuyriq] They (m) were about to enter Egypt. 4. qb'ç]
˜whot]rq'l] bt;myli ˜whot]y: He allowed them (m) to return to their city. 5. wçuypin} yrea] ad;jk' bt'ymil] wluykiy} al;
ad;jl' They (m) could not live together because they had become very numerous. 6. an:t'y: wqub'ç] al;
awhuh; ar;ç]ymeb] yreçymil] They (m) did not allow us to set up camp in that valley. 7. ˚p'hymil] lykey} al;
˜whot]rq' ty: He was not able to overthrow their (m) city. 8. am;ylew[u ty: rs'ymel] wmuq; They (m) arose to
bind the lad. 9. a[;rt' ty: jt'pymil]mi ytiy: [n"m] He prevented me from opening the gate. 10. an:t'y: qb'ç]
hy[era' ty: rb'[iymil/] rb'[ymil] He allowed us to cross his land. 11. an:m'y[i µy:qi rz"gmil] an:t'w:l] wbuyriq] They
(m) approached us to make a treaty with us. 12. µyIr'xmil] tj'ymel] wluykiy} al; They (m) could not go
down to Egypt. 13. a[;ra'd] am;wrod;l] lf'nwU µyIr'xmimi hyqes]ymib] hw:hw' When he went up from Egypt, he
traveled to the south of the land. 14. ˜['n"kdi a[;ra'l] wtoa]w" ˜['n"kdi a[;ra'l] lz"ymel] wqup'n} They (m) went
forth to go to the land of Canaan, and they came to the land of Canaan.

Lesson Thirteen
A. 1. She heeded her husband. 2. Why did you (mp) destroy our houses. 3. I spoke with him
there. 4. Into whose hand did they (m) sell the boy? 5. They (m) praised the woman to the king.
6. He blessed his sons. 7. They (m) presented their offerings. 8. They (m) made him king over
them. 9. The Lord did not accept his offering. 10. He prayed there in the name of the Lord.

B. 1. ˚ytir'b] µy[i tlylem' ˜a; Where did you speak with your (fs) daughter? 2. ar;ybe rf's]mi ˜whot]y: ˚yret;
He drove them (m) away from (beside) the well. 3. hytey: ˜wtujb'ç' al; am; l[' Why did you (mp) not
praise him? 4. ˜whom]ai ˜mi wluybiq' They (m) obeyed their mother. 5. ah;n"b] µd;q] am;jl' ty: ta'ywIç' She
placed the food before her sons. 6. ar;ç]yme ywErqi ty: yy lybej' The Lord destroyed the cities of the plain.
7. al;k]yhel] hr'b] ty: tb'yreq; She brought her son to the temple. 8. an:r'y[ib] ty: an:ybez" We sold our cattle.
9. ˚r;b] ty: tkyreb; al; am;l] Why did you not bless your (ms) son? 10. hytewlox] ty: yy lybeq' al; The Lord
did not receive his prayer.
124 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

C. 1. Isaac went forth to pray in the field. 2. The prophet went to meet the king. 3. This is the
blessing that he has given to his people. 4. And he accepted the maidservant’s prayer. 5. The
people did not heed the prophet. 6. They (m) began to build an altar. 7. These are the words of
the prayer that he prayed (on) that day. 8. I prevented them (m) from destroying our city. 9. I
drove the man from my presence. 10. They (m) were unable to expel him. 11. After he blessed
them (m), he died.

D. 1. ˜ynIyaih; ay:w"ryqi ty: yy twlub;j' µd;q] ˜m;t' ar;ç] He set up camp there before the Lord desroyed those
cities. 2. ˜whom][i al;l;m'l] ytiyriç; I began to speak with them (m). 3. ytiybeb] hytey: tywIç'w} ap;sk' ty: tylif'n} I
lifted up the silver and put it in my house. 4. an:t'wmud;q'l] tyjen} He came down to meet us. 5. wauyriç;
˜whoynEk]çm' ty: sr'pmil] They (m) began to pitch their tents. 6. ar;hn" ˜ybewU ar;wfu ˜ybe yreçmil] yriç; He began
to settle down between the mountain and the river. 7. ˚d;b['d] at;wlox] ty: tlybeq' al; am;l] Why have
you not accepted your (ms) servant’s prayer? 8. ytik;rbi/ytik]rbi ty: tbysen} am;l] Why did you (sg) take
my blessing/blessings? 9. hyleqj' rf'sbi bt'mil] ˜whot]y: qb'ç] He allowed them (m) to stay beside his
field. 10. ˜wkol] hytey: wnUybiz"w} an:n"y:nqi ty: wbuysin} They (m) took our property and sold it to you (mp).

Lesson Fourteen
A. 1. He pursued his father. 2. Did you eat your (fs) brother’s food? 3. They (m) guarded their
father’s gold. 4. She ran to meet her father. 5. This are the words of our fathers.

B. 1. ˜whowjua] ty: wrus'm] They (m) handed over their brother. 2. (yhiwjoa)' yhiwjoa/] yhiwjua] µ[i µy:q] tyriz"g} I
made a covenant with his brother/brothers. 3. ˜wkowjua] ty: ˜wtuqb'çh' Did you (mp) abandon your
brother? 4. (yj'a)] yj'a/' yjia] µd;q] ˜mi ad;jl' tyliyjed] I was greatly afraid of my brother/brothers. 5. am;l]
˚wbua]d' yhiwjua] rb' ty: tlf'q] Why did you kill your (ms) uncle’s son?

C. 1. We came to take possession of the land. 2. They went early to the palace. 3. The Lord
separated the darkness and the light. 4. They (m) made the Israelites work. 5. I was not able to
find the wine. 6. He led the people across the river. 7. He showed him the stars of the sky. 8.
They (m) accompanied them (m) as far as the river. 9. The Lord called the light daylight, and the
darkness he called night. 10. They (f) gave their father wine to drink. 11. Her female servant
wandered into the steppe. 12. Why did you (sg) lead my people astray? 13. I spoke with my
father early in the morning.

D. 1. ˜wkowbua] tn"s;ja' ty: ˜wtulybej' am;l] Why did you (mp) destroy your father’s inheritance? 2. tynIybez"
˚wjua]l' ˜ydeh; ar;mj' ty: I sold this wine to your (ms) brother. 3. ak;wçojb' ar;hn" ty: rb'[mil] wluykiy} al; They
(m) could not cross the river in the darkness. 4. a[;ra'b] ˜wkot]y: rb'[a' ˜m' Who took you (mp) across
the land? 5. hyme[' ty: ˜wtujl'pa' am;l] Why have you (mp) reduced his people to servitude? 6. wauyriç;
˜whoylemg" ty: ha;q;ça'l] They (m) began to water their camels. 7. ˜m;t' ywIç'd] aj;b]dm' ty: an:jk'ça' We found
the alter that he had placed there. 8. hytek;rbi/hytek]rbi yleymi ty: ˜whot]y: [m'ça' He made them (m) hear
(or, He proclaimed to them) the words of his blessing/blessings. 9. ˜wkon}b;rwqu ty: ˜wtubyreq; al; am; l['
Why have you (mp) not presented your offering? 10. awhuh; am;wyOb] ak;lm' ylix'd] at;wlox] ad;w} And this
is the prayer that the king prayed on that day. 11. ˜wkotwauw:la'l] an:t'y: qb'ç] al; He did not allow us to
accompany you (mp). 12. ynI[; ty: ha;q;ça'l]mi ytiy: w[un"m] They (m) prevented me from watering my flock.
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES 125

Lesson Fifteen
A. 1. They (m) took him outside of the city and put him to death there. 2. And he stationed the
men there to guard the property. 3. After the famine grew severe, he sent his sons down to Egypt
to buy food from there. 4. And he answered his father and said: I did not lead my brothers astray.
5. And they (f) brought their sons back to the city. 6. The Lord brought us up from the land of
Egypt and settled us in this land. 7. The messenger hurried to inform the king of this matter. 8.
Why have you (mp) brought this affliction upon us? 9. He led them (m) into the palace and stood
them before the king. 10. His wife hurried to make the food. 11. They (m) judged the servant
and put him to death. 12. I sent my servant out of my house. 13. Why did you (mp) bring these
messengers into our city? 14. He settled the people in the cities of the plain. 15. I/You (sg) hurried
to go outside to meet them (m). 16. I gave you (mp) this land to take possession of it. 17. He
heard my words but did not answer me. 18. The Lord established this covenant with us and with
our children. 19. She hurried early in the morning to find her husband. 20. When the plague
became severe, all the people died.

B. 1. am;wrod;mi ˜ydeh; ar;m;j/] ar;mj' ty: wauytiyae/wauytiya' They (m) brought this wine/donkey from the south.
2. at;rq'l] ar;b;mil] ay:k'a]lm' hytey: wauywIla'w} And the angels accompanied him outside the city. 3. bysi
ha;j;waol] lykey} al;w} ad;jl' He grew old and was unable to hurry. 4. yhiwjoa/] yhiwjua] µ[i ˜m;t'mi hytey: wquysia'
They (m) brought him up from there with his brother/brothers. 5. awhuh; ak;lm' ydeg"zai ty: tymea] am;l]
Why did he kill that king’s messengers?

Lesson Sixteen
A. 1. ad;j] at;ç' one year 2. ad;j] at;r'bwU dj' ar;b] one son and one daughter 3. ˜ydig"zai ˜yret] two
messengers 4. ˜ywIrqi ˜ytert' two cities 5. ˜yçit;km' h[;bçi/h[;bç' seven plagues 6. ˜ykia]lm' ht;l;t] three
angels 7. ˜yriwhon} ˜yret] two lights 8. ˜yjia' hy:n}m;t] eight brothers 9. ˜k;rbi ˜ytert' two blessings 10. tl;t]
ay:r'ybe the three wells 11. ˜ymiwyO h[:b]ra' four days 12. ˜ybik]wko hr;s[' ten stars 13. ˜yliqj' hç;mj' five
fields 14. ˜ymiylew[u hç;mj' five boys 15. ˜m;ylew[u çymej] five girls 16. ˜yçin} [b''ç] seven women 17. ynEm;t]
˜ynIç] eight years 18. ˜r;wto [ç't] nine cows 19. ˜h;m;ç] ht;yçi six names 20. ˜n:t;a' tyçe six female donkeys
21 ˜w:l;yle ht;l;t] three nights.

B. 1. Abraham had flocks, cattle, male donkeys, male and female servants, female donkeys, and
camels. 2. He sent messengers to him. 3. He begot sons and daughters. 4. They (m) did not kill
any man (anyone) (in) that year. 5. I did not say one word to him. 6. They (m) set men over him
to guard him. 7. He sent plagues against them (m). 8. He rejoiced when he saw the son that his
wife had borne to him. 9. I brought him servants and camels. 10. He sent two lads down to the
river to bring back water from there. 11. He separated between us and them (m) and settled them
there. 12. He prevented them (f) from presenting offerings. 13. We destroyed the five cities. 14.
I sold two oxen to his father’s brother. 15. They (m) built three altars there. 16. They (m) remained
there ten years.

Lesson Seventeen
A. 1. good year 2. great blessing 3. new city 4. seven good years 5. the great lights 6. the
evil utterance 7. the great affliction 8. the small well 9. the beautiful star 10. many offerings

B. 1. ay:b'r]br' ay:b'r;q] the great wars 2. at;dj' aj;b]dm' the new altar 3. ar;y[ez} am;rk' the small vineyard
4. ˜yaiygIs' ˜yçit;km' many plagues 5. at;dj' ar;mj' the new wine 6. ˜ybir]br' ˜h;m;ç] important names 7.
126 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

aç;ybi ar;ta' the wicked place 8. ˜yriypiç' ˜ynIm; excellent vessels 9. ˜r;ypiç' ˜n:b] beautiful daughters 10.
at;b]r' at;wkulm' great kingdom.

C. 1. We entered the city’s great gate. 2. Who made this beautiful vessel? 3. The prophet’s word
was bad in the king’s opinion. 4. Your (mp) words are very good. 5. He made a new treaty with
them (m). 6. The messenger’s utterance was excellent in the opinion of the queen. 7. They (m)
put the guilty messengers to death. 8. He answered and said: your words are pleasing to me. 9.
She stood the wicked boy before his father. 10. They (m) sent the evil men out of their midst. 11.
She brought the small boy to the prophet in the temple. 12. I separated the good from the bad. 13.
He showed them (m) the beautiful land. 14. He made us a numerous people in the land. 15. He
settled them (m) in new cities. 16. I purchased five fine cows. 17. They (m) found the wicked
servant beside the well. 18. The rich man giave all of his property to the king. 19. There are nine
men in the city. 20. There is no water in it (m).

D. 1. ˜ydeh; am;ylew[u ad;jl' µykij' This lad is very wise. 2. ˜wnUyaih; ay:m'wyOb] ryti[' ytiywEh] al; I was not rich in
those days. 3. am;ykij' ay:bin} at;rq'b] hw:h] The wise prophet was in the city. 4. am;[' ynEy[eb] ˜ybiy:j' an:ywEh]
We were guilty in the eyes of the people. 5. ˜ymiykij'w} ˜yriypiç' yhiwnOb] wwOh] His sons were handsome and
wise. 6. hynEy:nqi lko ty: hyreb] tyreywI ar;yti[' tymi The rich man died and his son inherited all his property.

Lesson Eighteen
A. 1. severe famine 2. living soul 3. the powerful kings 4. proper conduct 5. the words of
this Torah 6. twenty men 7. forty-five people 8. eight-eight men 9. ninety-three female donkeys
10. correct behaviors 11. My daughter-in-law is very beautiful. 12. The Philistines were then in
the land. 13. He lived one hundred twenty years. 14. He did not live two hundred years. 15. My
shepherds are bad men. 16. He fled by the mountain road. 17. I know that your (ms) son is alive.
18. Here is your (ms) wife.

B. 1. He was unaware that his daughter-in-law had died. 2. I know that they (m) are eating bread
there. 3. They (m) were going by the valley road. 4. He saw three men coming to meet him. 5.
What are you (ms) building here? I am building a new house. 6. I am making this covenant with
you (mp) and with your children. 7. Where are you (mp) taking this food? 8. I am fleeing because
I fear my husband. 9. And the Egyptians were oppressing them (m). 10. Why are you (ms)
sojourning here with us? 11. I am judging you (mp) and all your words/affairs. 12. And they (m)
were rejoicing over those words. 13. What do you see before you on the road? 14. He is giving
us water and food. 15. They (m) found the prophet sitting at the city gate. 16. I informed him
that his son was dying. 17. We were not able to find him/it. 18. I am not able to find him/it. 19.
All their ways were correct before the Lord. 20. We were going down to Egypt. 21. I am not
taking your (ms) property. 22. You have now driven me from this land. 23. I am now making
my covenant with you (ms).

C. 1. yhiwrot]b; ˜ypid]r; ˜wnUyai ah;w} az:j] He saw them (m) chasing after him. 2. ˜y:t]ç; an:jn"a] ˜y:t]ç; ˜ytia' am;
ar;mj' What are you (fp) drinking? We are drinking wine. 3. ˜whon}[; ty: ˜['r; yhiwjoa] ˜a; Where are his
brothers tending their flock? 4. hytew:[]r' ty: jl'ç/; jl'ç] ˜a;l] Where did he send/is he sending his
shepherds? 5. ˜whowbua] dyqep'd] am;k] ˜ydib][; wwOh] al; They (m) were not acting as their father commanded.
6. at;rq'l] ar;b;mil] hytey: wauywIla'w} yhiwlo[] ˜yribwgU ak;lm' dyqep' The king put men in charge of him and they
accompanied him outside the city.
 KEY TO THE EXERCISES 127

Lesson Nineteen
A. 1. We will pursue them in the morning. 2. They (f) will approach our city in the evening. 3.
He will/May he write to us. 4. I will not forsake you (fs) and your people. 5. They (m) went down
to Egypt so that they might buy food there. 6. We will not/Let us not bow down to them (m). 7.
We will/Let us lie here until morning. 8. There was a quarrel between the men of my house and
the men of his house. 9. They (f) will serve (before) that king. 10. We will/Let us hand him over
to those men. 11. You (fp) will/may not take your sister with you. 12. Bow down (ms) before
him lest he become angry and kill you.

B. 1. an:m'y[i µy:q] ˜wruz}gyI They (m) will make a treaty with us. 2. lz"ymel]mi an:t'y: [n"myI al; He will/May he
not prevent us from going. 3. ytir'b] ˜ylij]dti al: You are not afraid/Fear not, my daughter. 4. w[um'ç]
yn"b] ym'g:typi ty: Hear my words, my sons. (Or, yn"b] ymeg:typi the words of my sons; or, They (m) heard the
words of my sons.) 5. ˜yleyaih; ay:ç'ybi ay:m'g:typi ty: ˜wdub][t' al; Do (mp) not do these evil things. 6.
an:t'y: lwfoqyI am;lydi qwro[nI We will/Let us flee so that he will/does not kill us. 7. br'qwU ar;hn"b] rb'[]
at;b]r' at;rq'l] Cross (ms) the river and approach the big city 8. an:m'[i ab;r;q] ˜wdub][y" They (m) will
make war with us.

Lesson Twenty
A. 1. They (f) will perish in that land. 2. And now let us go to the temple. 3. Close (fs) the door
behind you. 4. They will/Let them (m) not eat any of this bread. 5. We will bind you (mp) so that
you are not able to flee. 6. What will we say to them (m)? 7. Take (mp) the bread and give it to
the men of his house. 8. We will/Let us write to you so that you (mp) will/may know these things.
9. And now let us sit here and eat. 10. Stay (ms) here and guard the flock. 11. Go down (fs) to
the river. 12. We will/Let us set out in the morning. 13. Do (mp) not shed our brother’s blood.

B. 1. ˜m;t' byteti al; Do (ms) not sit there. 2. ay:r'wful] wqus' Go up (mp) to the mountains. 3. lypeyI
awhuh; ab;r;qbi He will fall in that battle. 4. an:t'rq' ty:w} an:m'[' ty: qwboçnI al; ˜['kwU And now, let us/we will
not abandon our people and our city. 5. at;rq'l] qs'ymil] lwkuyI al; He will not be able to go up to the
city. 6. yniy:nyqi ty: tr'yyE ˜m' Who will inherit my property? 7. µyIr'xmil] ˜wtuj]yyE They will/Let them (m)
go down to Egypt. 8. ˜yleyaih; ay:n"m; ty: ˜wbozyaid] lydib] ap;sk' ty: yli bh' Give (ms) me the silver so that I
may buy these utensils.

Lesson Twenty-One
A. 1. They (m) will rejoice when they see you (ms). 2. Go down (mp) to the river but do not
drink the water. 3. I will summon them in the morning. 4. We will/Let us go down to Egypt in
order to acquire food there. 5. Go (mp) up to your cities and remain there until morning. 6. Count
(ms) the stars if you are able to count them. 7. You (mp) will come to the palace when I summon
you. 8. And on that day there will be strife between us and them (m). 9. Where shall/should we
pasture our flock(s)? 10. Plant (mp) a tree within the garden. 11. I will return to my land. 12.
Come (ms) to me that I may judge concerning your word(s).

B. 1. ad;h; ar;ybe rf'sybi yreçynI We will/Let us set up camp beside this well. 2. ˜m;t' twmuywI hyterq'l] bwtuy}
He will return to his city and die there. 3. ar;wful] lyzEynEw} µwqun} We will/Let us arise and go to the
mountain. 4. hytey: ˜wduj]yyEd] lydib] ay:l]yleb] ˜wtoyyE They (m) will come in the night in order to seize him.
5. lz"ymel]mi an:t'y: [n"mymil] lwkoti al; She/You (ms) will not be able to prevent us from going. 6. am;l]
128 KEY TO THE EXERCISES

ak;l]h; ˜y:t]yyE Why will they (f) come here? 7. ˜wkorb' ty: yzEjmil] ˜wkot]y: ˜wqub]çyI al; They (m) will not allow
you (mp) to see your son. 8. hytey: ˜n"mtiw} ap;sk' ty: ˜ybis]yti You (fs) will take the silver and count it.

Lesson Twenty-Two
A. 1. The girl ran and told her mother these words. 2. And the Lord said to Abram, Go from your
land and from your father’s house to the land that I will show you. 3. And you (mp) will tell my
father all that you saw there. 4. And the king also returned to him all of his property. 5. And the
Lord said, Let the earth produce a living soul.

B. 1. ˚wjua] at;a] al; yrea] ˚l; ha;w:j'l] ydib[' ty: tyjil'ç] I sent my servant to tell you (ms) that your brother
had not come. 2. am;l][; d[' ˚n:bliw} ˚l; µy:qli ˜ydeh; am;g:tpi ty: ˜wruf]ytiw} And you (mp) will keep this word
as a covenant for yourself and for your children forever. 3. ˜ydeh; am;g:tpi ty: db'[] ˜m' ty[id'y} al; rm'a]w"
yli tywEj' al; ta' πa'w} And he said, I did not know who did this thing; moreover, you did not tell me.
4. ˚r'b;m] yheywI ˚r;b] ty: ˚yreb;a] I will bless your (ms) son and he will be blessed.

Lesson Twenty-Three
A. 1. All the families of the earth will be blessed because of your children. 2. The tops of the
mountains appeared. 3. And he summoned his children and said to them, Gather and I will tell
you my words. 4. And a river was coming out of Eden to water the garden, and from there it was
divided, becoming four river heads. 5. And you (ms), take for yourself any of the edible food in
the garden.

B. 1. µyIr'xmil] twjoyte al; rm'a]w" ywy hyle ylig}tai The Lord appeared to him and said, Do not go down to
Egypt. 2. ˜yaiygIs' ˜ymiwyO ad;h; at;rq'b] µh;r;ba' bt'wtoyaiw} And Abraham settled in this city many days. 3.
˜r;jwau rt'a]l' ˜wluz}yyEw} ˜m;t'mi ˜wqul]t'syI They (m) will go up from there and go to another place. 4. tr'b'd]yai
ak;lm' tybel] hytet]yai His wife was taken to the king’s house.

Lesson Twenty-Four
1. he sent me 2. I will bless you (ms) 3. he commanded you (ms) 4. he caused me to enter 5.
I will take you (ms) 6. he sent her out 7. she took them (m) 8. he commanded us 9. he seized
them (m) 10. I/she seized him 11. who bore you (ms) 12. she found us 13. I/you (ms)/she
found her 14. you (ms) informed me 15. I/she took you (ms) 16. I/she sent him 17. I/you
(ms)/she gave it (f) 18. They (m) sent you (ms) up. 19. They (m) lifted it (m). 20. They (m)
wrote it (f) 21. They (m) expelled them (m) 22. You (mp) sent me 23. We gave it (f) 24. he
will find me 25. he will inherit you (ms) 26. he will take her 27. you (ms) will take us up 28.
you (ms) will bless them (m) 29. I will establish it (m) 30. I will take them (m) in 31. you (ms)
will take him 32. you (ms) will make it (f) 33. they (m) will serve you (ms) 34. they (m) will
inherit it (f) 35. you (mp) will find him 36. bless (ms) me 37. let (ms) me know 38. take (ms)
him 39. send (ms) it (m) up 40. present (ms) them (m) 41. take (mp) me 42. eat (mp) it (m)
43. he showed you (ms) 44. he brought it (m) 45. he saw them (m) 46. she saw me 47. I called
you (ms) 48. I saw them (m) 49. he will see her